FiberHome Hardware Description

FONST 5000
Intelligent OTN Equipment
Hardware Description
Version: D
Code: MN000000994
FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
January 2016
Thank you for choosing our products.
We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.
Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice
are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
All rights reserved
No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface
Related Documentation
Document Description
Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN
principles, network modes and applications, and technical
Equipment Product Description
specifications.
Describes the equipment’s structures, functions, signal

flows, specifications, and technical parameters in terms of
Equipment Hardware
its hardware components (i.e. the cabinet, the subrack,
Description
cards, and cables).
Describes the equipment’s appearance and structure, how

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN to install the equipment, connect and lay out its wires and
Equipment Installation Guide cables, as well as the requirements for the installation
environment.
Describes how to install the equipment, connect and lay out
Equipment Quick Installation
its wires and cables using figures.
Guide
Describes the important issues for the commissioning of
Equipment Commissioning
the equipment, the commissioning flow, and the methods.
Guide
Gives a detailed description of routine maintenance items
OTN Series Intelligent OTN
and operation procedures in terms of day, week, month,
Equipment Routine Maintenance
quarter and year.
OTN Series Intelligent OTN Gives a detailed introduction to notices of fault

Equipment Troubleshooting management, fault isolating methods as well as procedures
Guide and methods of fault management.
Describes classification and category of alarm and

OTN Series Intelligent OTN
performance indicators and their binding relationships, and
Equipment Alarm and
lists definitions, causes and management of each alarm
Performance Reference
and performance.
e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Introduces the rules and methods for the configuration of
Management System OTN various services through service management GUI in the
Product Service Configuration OTNM2000; gives some typical configuration examples
Guide and operation procedures.
I
Document Description
Includes four manuals, i. e., product description, operation

e-Fim OTNM2000 Element guide, routine maintenance and installation guide, all of
Network Management System which are aimed at introducing common and fundamental
Manual Set contents of the OTNM2000 for a better understanding and
proficient use of the network management system.
Quick Installation Guide for the

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet
21-inch Cabinet (600 mm-deep)
(600 mm-deep) (404000096 to 404000099).
(404000096 to 404000099)
Quick Installation Guide for the

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet
21-inch Cabinet (300 mm-deep)
(300 mm-deep) (4102661 to 4102664).
(4102661 to 4102664)
Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000064); briefs how

PDP850A User Guide
to install the PDP, connect and lay out its wires and cables.

PDP296B User Guide

PDP4100B User Guide
II
Version
Version Description
A Initial version.
Description of the WDM2, OTDR8, and 2OTU2S cards is
added; description of the 16TA, OTU2S, TA4, and LMS4E
cards is modified.
Description of the PDP (3000068) and the corresponding
B wires and cables is added; description of the 300 mm-deep
cabinet is added, and the equipment layout is modified.
Description of the PDP (3000078) and the corresponding
wires and cables is added; the equipment layout is
modified.
Description of the 4TEA2, 4TEL2, 8TEA2, 4LXA2, OTU3S
(coherent), OTU3E (coherent), BIDI, EOSAD, WOSAD and
C
BEOSC cards is added; description of the ITL50 card is
modified.
Description of the WSS8MR, WSS8DT, WSS8M, WSS8D,
FOSC, ODU8T, VGA, WSS20T, WSS8T, FWSS8M,
D
FWSS20M, FWSS8D, FWSS20D, and 4OTU2S cards is
added.
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
u Planning and designing engineers
u Commissioning engineers
u Operation and maintenance engineers
To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:
u OTN technology
u Data communication technology
u Optical fiber communication technology
u SDH communication theory
u Ethernet technology
III
Conventions
Terminology Conventions
Terminology Convention
FONST 5000 FiberHome FONST 5000 Equipment
FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management

OTNM2000
System
8TDGF 8-Port Data Service Interface Card

8TDGS 8-Port Multi-Rate Interface Card
8TGX 8-Ports GE/STM16 Service Interface Card
8TA1 8-Port 2.5G Service Interface Card
16TA 16-Port Any Service Interface Card
2TA2 2-Port 10G Service Interface Card

TA3 40G Service Interface Card
ETA3 40G Enhanced Service Interface Card
TA4 100G Service Interface Card
4TEA2 4-Port 10G Enhanced Tributary Interface Card
8TEA2 Eight-port,STM64/10GE WAN/LAN, General, LC
TGX GE Interface Card with Switch Function

MXCU Master Cross-connect Card
SXCU Slave Cross-connect Card
4-Port 2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced
LMS2E
FEC
2LMS2E 8×2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Unit
4-Port 10G Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced

LMS3E
FEC
LMS4E Multi-rate 100G Aggregation Line Interface Card
2LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC
4TEL2 4 Port 10G Enhanced Line Interface Card

4LXA2 10 Gigabit Date Services Card
MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card
IV
Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With Enhanced
OTU2E
FEC
10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with Super
OTU2S
FEC
2-Port 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with
2OTU2S
Super FEC
4OTU2S 4-ports 10G Optical Transponder Unit
OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

OTU3E
Enhanced FEC
4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With
OTU3E (coherent)
Enhanced FEC (Coherent)
OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC
43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

OTU3S (coherent)
(Coherent)
OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)
100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with

OTU4E
Enhanced FEC (PM-QPSK,10×10G)
OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC
8EF 8-Port FC Service Distance Extension Card

BIDI Single Fiber and Double Direction Transmission BOARD
EOSAD East 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
WOSAD West 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
BEOSC Bidirectional Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel
OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

VMU48_E
Attenuator (VOA, C, E)

VMU40_E
Attenuator (VOA, C, E)
OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)
OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)
ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)
ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)
V
VMU48_O
Attenuator (VOA, C, O)

VMU40_O
Attenuator (VOA, C, O)
OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card
ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card
WDM2 2 Line WDM Card

ITL50 50GHz Grid Interleaved Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card
OSCAD 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
SOAD8 8 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card
SOAD4 4 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card

WSS8M
(100GHz, 1×9)
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer Card

WSS8D
(100GHz, 1×9)

WSS8M
(50GHz, 1×9)

WSS8D
(50GHz, 1×9)

WSS4M
(50GHz, 1×5)

WSS4D
(50GHz, 1×5)
Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer and 1310

WSS8DT
Transmitter
Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer and 1310
WSS8MR
Receiver
ODU8T 8 Chs Optical Demultiplexer Unit and 1310 Transmitter
WSS20T Twin 20-Port Wavelength-Selective Switch Unit
WSS8T Twin 9-Port Wavelength-Selective Switch Unit
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card (flex,

FWSS8M
1×9)
VI
FWSS8D
(flex, 1×9)
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card (flex,

FWSS20M
1×20)

FWSS20D
(flex, 1×20)
OA Optical Amplification Card
OA High Power Optical Amplifier Card (above 21 dBm)
PA Pre-amplifier Card
MSA Two-Stage Amplifier with Mid-Stage Access
HOA High Power Optical Amplifier Card (above 26 dBm)
ROA Remote Optical Amplifier Card
RAU_F / RAU_B Forward / Backward Raman Amplifier Unit Card
VGA Variable Gain Optical Amplifier Card
OCP Optical Channel Protection Card
OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection Card
OLP_1:1 Optical Line Protection Card (1:1)
OLP_1+1 Optical Line Protection Card (1+1)
GFF Gain Flattening Filter Card
DGE Dynamic Gain Equalizer
OPM4 4 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card
OPM8 8 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card
OTDR8 8Ch OTDR Card

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel Card
EOSC Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel Card
FOSC Fast Optical Supervisor Channel
CAIF1 Clock Card 1 (with Auxiliary Terminal Interface)
CAIF2 Clock Card 2 (with Auxiliary Terminal Interface)
EMVU NE Management Card (OTH Subrack)
FCVU Frame Control Unit Card (OTH Subrack)
EFCVU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card (OTH Subrack)
EMU NE Management Card (WDM Subrack)
FCU Frame Control Unit Card (WDM Subrack)
EFCU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card (WDM Subrack)
ASCU Control Unit Card
VII
SCU Control Unit Card
PWRV Power Supply Card (OTH Subrack)
PWR Power Supply Card (WDM Subrack)
CTU Clock Terminal Card

AIF Auxiliary Terminal Board
EAIF Enhanced Auxiliary Terminal Board
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Convention Description
Note Important features or operation guide.
Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

Caution
interruption or loss.
Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.
➔ Jump Jumps to another step.
Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service
VIII
Contents
Preface...................................................................................................................I
Related Documentation ...................................................................................I
Version ..........................................................................................................III
Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III
Conventions ................................................................................................. IV
1 Cabinet...........................................................................................................1
1.1 300 mm Deep Cabinet ......................................................................2
1.1.1 Type ...................................................................................2

1.1.2 Appearance ........................................................................2
1.1.3 Structure.............................................................................3
1.1.4 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 ................................8
1.1.5 Technical Parameter ......................................................... 11
1.2 600 mm Deep Cabinet ....................................................................12
1.2.1 Type .................................................................................12

1.2.2 Appearance ......................................................................12
1.2.3 Structure...........................................................................13
1.2.4 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 ..............................18
1.2.5 Technical Parameter .........................................................31
2 PDP .............................................................................................................33
2.1 PDP (3000064)...............................................................................34
2.1.1 Function ...........................................................................34

2.1.2 Appearance ......................................................................35
2.1.3 Front Panel.......................................................................35
2.1.4 Connector and Switch.......................................................36
2.1.5 Lightning Protection Module..............................................40
2.2 PDP (3000068)...............................................................................41
2.2.1 Function ...........................................................................41

2.2.2 Appearance ......................................................................42
2.2.3 Front Panel.......................................................................42
2.2.4 Connector and Switch.......................................................43
2.3 PDP (3000078)...............................................................................47
2.3.1 Function ...........................................................................47

2.3.2 Appearance ......................................................................48
2.3.3 Front Panel.......................................................................48
2.3.4 Connectors and Switches .................................................49
3 OTH Subrack (3030066) ...............................................................................55
3.1 Function .........................................................................................56
3.2 Structure.........................................................................................56
3.3 Fan Unit..........................................................................................57
3.3.1 Type .................................................................................57

3.3.2 Function ...........................................................................58
3.3.3 Appearance ......................................................................58
3.3.4 Intelligent Fan Feature ......................................................58
3.3.5 Indicator LED....................................................................59
3.3.6 Safety Sign .......................................................................60
3.4 Fiber Spool .....................................................................................61
3.5 Anti-dust Screen .............................................................................62
3.6 Slot Allocation.................................................................................63
3.7 Distribution of GCCs in the OTH Subrack ........................................65
3.8 Technical Parameter .......................................................................66
4 Channel Subrack (3030036) .........................................................................67
4.1 Function .........................................................................................68
4.2 Structure.........................................................................................68
4.3 Fan Unit..........................................................................................69
4.3.1 Type .................................................................................69

4.3.2 Function ...........................................................................69
4.3.3 Appearance ......................................................................70
4.3.5 Indicator LED....................................................................71
4.3.6 Safety Sign .......................................................................72
4.4 Fiber Spool .....................................................................................72
4.5 Anti-dust Screen .............................................................................75
4.6 Slot Arrangement............................................................................77
4.7 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack...................................78
5 Channel Subrack (3030105) .........................................................................79
5.1 Function .........................................................................................80
5.2 Structure.........................................................................................80
5.3 Fan Unit..........................................................................................81
5.3.1 Type .................................................................................81

5.3.2 Function ...........................................................................81
5.3.3 Appearance ......................................................................82
5.3.5 Indicator LED....................................................................83
5.3.6 Safety Sign .......................................................................84
5.4 Fiber Spool .....................................................................................84
5.5 Anti-dust Screen .............................................................................86
5.6 Slot Arrangement............................................................................87
5.7 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack...................................88
6 Card .............................................................................................................89
6.1 Card Overview................................................................................90
6.1.1 Card Structure ..................................................................90

6.1.2 Card Classification............................................................96
6.1.3 Positioning of Cards in the System ....................................97
6.1.4 Corresponding Relationships between Cards and Slots.....98
6.2 Tributary Interface Card ................................................................102

6.2.1 The 8TDGF Card ............................................................102
6.2.2 The 8TDGS Card............................................................107
6.2.3 The 8TGX Card .............................................................. 111
6.2.4 The 8TA1 Card ............................................................... 116
6.2.5 The 16TA Card ...............................................................120
6.2.6 The 2TA2 Card ...............................................................126
6.2.7 The 4TA2 Card ...............................................................130
6.2.8 The 4TEA2 Card.............................................................135
6.2.9 The 8TEA2 Card.............................................................140
6.2.10 The 8TA2 Card ...............................................................145
6.2.11 The 10TA2 Card .............................................................150
6.2.12 The TA3 Card .................................................................155
6.2.13 The ETA3 Card ...............................................................159
6.2.14 The TA4 Card .................................................................163
6.2.15 The TGX Card ................................................................167
6.2.16 The 8EF Card .................................................................172
6.3 Cross-connect Card......................................................................177
6.3.1 Function .........................................................................178

6.3.2 Application in the System ................................................179
6.3.3 The Panel Description.....................................................179
6.3.4 Specifications of the MXCU / SXCU Cards ......................181
6.4 Line Interface Card .......................................................................182
6.4.1 The LMS2E Card ............................................................182

6.4.2 The 2LMS2E Card ..........................................................186
6.4.3 The 4LXA2 Card .............................................................191
6.4.4 The 2LA2 Card ...............................................................197
6.4.5 The 4LA2 Card ...............................................................202
6.4.6 The 4TEL2 Card .............................................................207
6.4.7 The 8LA2 Card ...............................................................212
6.4.8 The LMS3E Card ............................................................217
6.4.9 The LMS4E Card ............................................................225
6.5 Optical Transponder Card .............................................................230
6.5.1 The MST2 Card ..............................................................230

6.5.2 The OTU2S Card............................................................237
6.5.3 The 2OTU2S Card..........................................................243
6.5.4 The 4OTU2S Card..........................................................249
6.5.5 The OTU2E Card............................................................255
6.5.6 The OTU2F Card ............................................................261
6.5.7 The OTU3S Card............................................................266
6.5.8 The OTU3S Card (Coherent) ..........................................274
6.5.9 The OTU3E Card............................................................280
6.5.10 The OTU3E Card (Coherent) ..........................................287
6.5.11 The OTU3F Card ............................................................293
6.5.12 The OTU4S Card............................................................299
6.5.13 The OTU4E Card............................................................305
6.5.14 The OTU4F Card ............................................................ 311
6.6 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card ........................................316
6.6.1 System Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture ......317

6.6.2 The OMU Series of Cards ...............................................318
6.6.3 The VMU Series of Cards ...............................................324
6.6.4 The ODU Series of Cards ...............................................331
6.6.5 The WDM2 Card.............................................................338
6.6.6 The ITL50 Card...............................................................343
6.6.7 The OSCAD Card ...........................................................348
6.6.8 The EOSAD Card ...........................................................353
6.6.9 The WOSAD Card ..........................................................358
6.6.10 The BIDI Card.................................................................363
6.7 Optical Add / Drop Multiplexing Card .............................................369
6.7.1 The WSS8M Card / WSS4M Card...................................370

6.7.2 The WSS8D Card / WSS4D Card....................................375
6.7.3 The SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card .............................................380
6.7.4 The FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card .....................................386
6.7.5 The FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card......................................393
6.7.6 The WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card ........................399
6.7.7 The WSS8T / WSS20T Card...........................................409
6.8 Optical Amplification Card .............................................................413
6.8.1 The OA, PA and HOA Cards ...........................................413

6.8.2 The VGA Card ................................................................421
6.8.3 The MSA Card................................................................429
6.8.4 The RAU_B / RAU_F Card..............................................437
6.8.5 The ROA Card................................................................444
6.8.6 The RGU Unit .................................................................451
6.9 Optical Protection Card .................................................................454
6.9.1 The OCP Card................................................................454

6.9.2 The OMSP Card .............................................................461
6.9.3 The OLP (1:1) Card ........................................................466
6.9.4 The OLP (1+1) Card .......................................................473
6.10 Optical Supervisory Card ..............................................................480
6.10.1 The OSC Card................................................................480

6.10.2 The EOSC Card .............................................................488
6.10.3 The FOSC Card..............................................................496
6.10.4 The BEOSC Card ...........................................................503
6.10.5 The OPM4 / OPM8 Card .................................................512
6.10.6 The OTDR8 Card............................................................516
6.11 Channel Equilibrium Card .............................................................521
6.11.1 The DGE Card................................................................521

6.11.2 The GFF Card ................................................................526
6.12 System Connection and Management Card ..................................530
6.12.1 The EMU Card................................................................530

6.12.2 The FCU Card ................................................................538
6.12.3 The EFCU Card ..............................................................541
6.12.4 The EMVU Card .............................................................544
6.12.5 The EFCVU Card............................................................550
6.12.6 The FCVU Card ..............................................................553
6.12.7 The ASCU Card..............................................................556
6.12.8 The SCU Card ................................................................561
6.12.9 The AIF Card ..................................................................563
6.12.10The EAIF Card................................................................567
6.12.11The CAIF1 Card..............................................................572
6.12.12The CAIF2 Card..............................................................577
6.12.13The CTU Card ................................................................582
6.12.14The PWRV Card .............................................................586
6.12.15The PWR Card ...............................................................588
6.13 DCM.............................................................................................591
6.13.1 Function .........................................................................592

6.13.2 Panel..............................................................................592
6.13.3 DCM Specifications ........................................................593
7 Wire and Cable ...........................................................................................594
7.1 Power Cable and Earth Ground Cable...........................................595
7.1.1 Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064)...................595

7.1.4 Subrack Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064) ..................601
7.1.7 Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (for the PDP
3000064) ........................................................................607
3000068) ........................................................................608
3000078) ........................................................................610
7.1.10 Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable .......................... 611
7.2 Alarm Cable..................................................................................612
7.2.1 Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet .......................612

7.2.2 Subrack Alarm Cable (for the PDP 3000068)...................613
7.2.5 PDP Alarm Cable............................................................618
7.3 Clock Cable ..................................................................................619
7.3.1 Application......................................................................620
7.3.2 Structure.........................................................................620
7.3.3 Connection .....................................................................620
7.4 E1 Cable ......................................................................................621
7.4.1 Application......................................................................621
7.4.2 Structure.........................................................................622
7.4.3 Connection .....................................................................623
7.5 Network Cable ..............................................................................623
7.5.1 Network Cable between the Network Management System

and the Equipment..........................................................623
7.5.2 Network Cable between Subracks...................................625
7.5.3 RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface........................626
7.6 Cable for the HK Interface .............................................................628

7.6.1 Application......................................................................628
7.6.2 Structure.........................................................................629
7.6.3 Connection .....................................................................632
7.7 Optical Fiber Jumper.....................................................................633
7.7.1 Application......................................................................634
7.7.2 Structure.........................................................................634
7.7.3 Connection .....................................................................635
Appendix A Summary of Card Numbers .....................................................636
Appendix B Abbreviations ..........................................................................639

Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet .........................................3

Figure 1-2 Exploded View of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet .....................................4
Figure 1-3 Overall View of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet.........................................6
Figure 1-4 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High and 300 mm Deep Cabinet .....9
Figure 1-5 Equipment Layout of a 2200 mm High and 300 mm Deep Cabinet ...10
Figure 1-6 Equipment Layout of a 2000 mm High and 300 mm Deep Cabinet ... 11
Figure 1-7 Cabinet Appearance (600mm deep)................................................13
Figure 1-8 The Exploded-View of the Cabinet (600mm deep) ...........................15
Figure 1-9 Structure of the Cabinet (600mm deep) ...........................................16
Figure 1-10 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet (the
FONST 5000 + the FONST 5000) ...................................................20
FONST 5000 + the FONST 4000) ...................................................21
FONST 5000 + the FONST 3000) ...................................................22
FONST 5000 + the FONST 4000 + the FONST 3000) .....................23
FONST 5000 + the 40-Channel WDM) ............................................24
FONST 5000 + the 80-Channel WDM) ............................................25
FONST 5000 + the WDM) ...............................................................26
Figure 1-17 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet
(WDM)............................................................................................27
Figure 1-18 Equipment Layout of a 2200 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet..........28
FONST 5000 + the WDM) ...............................................................29
FONST 5000 + the DCM)................................................................30
Figure 1-21 Equipment Layout of a 1600 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet..........31
Figure 2-1 Appearance of the PDP (3000064)..................................................35
Figure 2-2 Front Panel of the PDP (3000064)...................................................36
Figure 2-3 Connectors and Switches on the PDP (3000064) ............................37
Figure 2-4 Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors ...............39
Figure 2-5 Appearance of the PDP (3000068)..................................................42
Figure 2-6 Front Panel of the PDP (3000068)...................................................42
Figure 2-7 Rear Panel of the PDP (3000068) ...................................................44
Figure 2-8 The Appearance of the PDP (3000078) ...........................................48
Figure 2-9 The Front Panel of PDP (3000078) .................................................49
Figure 2-10 Distribution of the PDP (3000078) Connectors and Switches ...........50
Figure 2-11 Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors ...............52
Figure 3-1 The Appearance of the OTH Subrack (3030066) .............................56
Figure 3-2 The Fan Unit...................................................................................58
Figure 3-3 Components of the Subrack Fiber Spool .........................................62
Figure 3-4 Location for the Anti-dust Screen of the OTH Subrack .....................63
Figure 3-5 The Anti-dust Screen for the OTH Subrack......................................63
Figure 3-6 The Slot Allocation at the front of the OTH Subrack (3030066).........64
Figure 3-7 The Slot Allocation at the back of the OTH Subrack (3030066) ........64
Figure 4-1 The Structure of the Channel Subrack (3030036) ............................68
Figure 4-2 The Fan Unit (3030036) ..................................................................70
Figure 4-3 Arrangement of the Fiber Spools for the Channel Subrack ...............74
Figure 4-4 The Fiber Spool for the Channel Subrack ........................................75
Figure 4-5 The Position of the Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack..........76
Figure 4-6 The Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack ................................77
Figure 4-7 Slot Arrangement for the Channel Subrack......................................77
Figure 5-1 The Structure of the Channel Subrack (3030105) ............................80
Figure 5-2 The Fan Unit...................................................................................82
Figure 5-3 The Fiber Spool for the Channel Subrack ........................................86
Figure 5-4 The Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack ................................87
Figure 5-5 Slot Arrangement for the Channel Subrack......................................87
Figure 6-1 Card Appearance and Structure ......................................................91
Figure 6-2 Positioning of the Common Cards in the System .............................98
Figure 6-3 The 8TDGF Card Panel ................................................................105
Figure 6-4 The 8TDGS Card Panel ................................................................109
Figure 6-5 The 8TGX Card Panel................................................................... 114
Figure 6-6 The 8TA1 Card Panel.................................................................... 118
Figure 6-7 The 16TA Card Panel....................................................................123
Figure 6-8 The 2TA2 Card Panel....................................................................128
Figure 6-10 The 4TEA2 Card Panel .................................................................138
Figure 6-11 The 8TEA2 Card Panel .................................................................143
Figure 6-13 The 10TA2 Card Panel..................................................................153
Figure 6-14 The TA3 Card Panel .....................................................................157
Figure 6-15 The ETA3 Card Panel ...................................................................161
Figure 6-16 The TA4 Card Panel .....................................................................165
Figure 6-17 The TGX Card Panel ....................................................................170
Figure 6-18 Application and Positioning of the 8EF Card in the System ............174
Figure 6-19 The 8EF Card Panel .....................................................................175
Figure 6-20 The Active / Standby Cross-connect Card on the OTH Subrack .....178
Figure 6-21 The LMS2E Card Panel ................................................................184
Figure 6-22 The 2LMS2E Card Panel ..............................................................189
Figure 6-23 The 4LXA2 Card Panel .................................................................195
Figure 6-24 The 2LA2 Card Panel ...................................................................200
Figure 6-26 The 4TEL2 Card Panel .................................................................210
Figure 6-30 The MST2 Card Panel ..................................................................234
Figure 6-31 The OTU2S Card Panel ................................................................240
Figure 6-32 The 2OTU2S Card Panel ..............................................................246
Figure 6-33 The 4OTU2S Card Panel ..............................................................252
Figure 6-34 The OTU2E Card Panel ................................................................258
Figure 6-35 Positioning of the OTU2F Card in the System................................263
Figure 6-36 The OTU2F Card Panel ................................................................264
Figure 6-38 The OTU3S Card (Coherent) Panel...............................................277
Figure 6-40 The OTU3E Card (Coherent) Panel...............................................290
Figure 6-47 System Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture ....................317
Figure 6-48 Composition and Signal Flow of the OMU48 Card .........................319
Figure 6-49 The OMU Series of Card Panels ...................................................321
Figure 6-50 Composition and Signal Flow of the VMU48 Card..........................326
Figure 6-51 The VMU Series of Card Panels....................................................328
Figure 6-52 Composition and Signal Flow of the ODU48 Card..........................333
Figure 6-53 The ODU Series of Card Panels....................................................334
Figure 6-54 Positioning of the OTDR8 Card and WDM2 Card in the System .....339
Figure 6-55 Composition and Signal Flow of the WDM2 Card...........................339
Figure 6-56 The WDM2 Card Panel .................................................................341
Figure 6-57 Composition and Signal Flow of the ITL50 Card ............................344
Figure 6-58 The ITL50 Card Panel...................................................................345
Figure 6-59 Composition and Signal Flow of the OSCAD Card.........................349
Figure 6-60 The OSCAD Card Panel ...............................................................350
Figure 6-61 The Structure Diagram of the BEOSC, WOSAD, EOSAD Cards ....354
Figure 6-62 Composition and Signal Flow of the EOSAD Card .........................354
Figure 6-63 The EOSAD Card Panel ...............................................................356
Figure 6-65 Composition and Signal Flow of the WOSAD Card ........................360
Figure 6-66 The WOSAD Card Panel ..............................................................361
Figure 6-67 Application of the BIDI Card in the System ....................................364
Figure 6-68 Composition and Signal Flow of the BIDI Card...............................365
Figure 6-69 The BIDI Card Panel .....................................................................366
Figure 6-70 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8M Card.........................371
Figure 6-71 The WSS8M and the WSS4M Card Panels ...................................372
Figure 6-72 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8D Card.........................376
Figure 6-73 The WSS8D and the WSS4D Card Panels ....................................377
Figure 6-74 Application of the SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card in the System .................380
Figure 6-75 Composition and Signal Flow of the SOAD8 Card .........................381
Figure 6-76 The SOAD8 / SOAD4 Card Panel .................................................383
Figure 6-77 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS8M Card ......................388
Figure 6-78 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS20M Card ....................389
Figure 6-79 The FWSS8M and FWSS20M Card Panels...................................390
Figure 6-80 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS8D Card.......................394
Figure 6-81 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS20D Card.....................395
Figure 6-82 The FWSS8D and FWSS20D Card Panels ...................................396
Figure 6-83 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8MR Card ......................401
Figure 6-84 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8DT Card.......................402
Figure 6-85 Composition and Signal Flow of the ODU8T Card .........................403
Figure 6-86 The WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T Card Panels .......................405
Figure 6-87 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8T Card .........................410
Figure 6-88 The WSS8T and WSS20T Card Panels......................................... 411
Figure 6-89 Composition and Signal Flow of the OA / PA / HOA Card ...............415
Figure 6-90 The OA / PA / HOA Card Panel .....................................................417
Figure 6-91 Composition and Signal Flow of the VGA Card ..............................422
Figure 6-92 The VGA Card Panel ....................................................................424
Figure 6-93 The Application Scenario of the MSA Card at an OLA Station ........430
Figure 6-94 The Application Scenario of the MSA Card at an OTM Station .......431
Figure 6-95 Composition and Signal Flow of the MSA Card..............................431
Figure 6-96 The MSA Card Panel ....................................................................433
Figure 6-97 Application of the RAU Card in the System ....................................438
Figure 6-98 Composition and Signal Flow of the RAU_B Card..........................439
Figure 6-99 Composition and Signal Flow of the RAU_F Card..........................439
Figure 6-100 The RAU_B and the RAU_F Card Panels......................................441
Figure 6-101 Application of the ROA Card in the System–Using the Same Fiber.445
Figure 6-102 Application of the ROA Card in the System–Using Different Fibers.446
Figure 6-103 Composition and Signal Flow of the ROA Card..............................447
Figure 6-104 The ROA Card Panel ....................................................................449
Figure 6-105 The RGU Card Principle (Using the Same Fiber) ...........................452
Figure 6-106 The RGU Card Principle (Using Different Fibers) ...........................453
Figure 6-107 The RGU Card Panel ....................................................................453
Figure 6-108 Positioning of the OCP Card in the System (Optical Channel 1+1
Wavelength Protection).................................................................455
Figure 6-109 Positioning of the OCP Card in the System (Optical Channel 1+1
Route Protection)..........................................................................456
Figure 6-110 Composition and Signal Flow of the OCP Card..............................456
Figure 6-111 The OCP Card Panel ....................................................................458
Figure 6-112 Positioning of the OMSP Card in the System .................................462
Figure 6-113 Composition and Signal Flow of the OMSP Card ...........................462
Figure 6-114 The OMSP Card Panel .................................................................464
Figure 6-115 Positioning of the OLP (1:1) Card in the System ............................467
Figure 6-116 Composition and Signal Flow of the OLP (1:1) Card ......................468
Figure 6-117 The OLP (1:1) Card Panel.............................................................470
Figure 6-118 Positioning of the OLP (1+1) Card in the System ...........................474
Figure 6-119 Composition and Signal Flow of the OLP (1+1) Card .....................474
Figure 6-120 The OLP (1+1) Card Panel............................................................477
Figure 6-121 Composition and Signal Flow of the OSC Card..............................482
Figure 6-122 The OSC Card Panel ....................................................................484
Figure 6-123 Composition and Signal Flow of the EOSC Card ...........................490
Figure 6-124 The EOSC Card Panel..................................................................492
Figure 6-125 Composition and Signal Flow of the FOSC Card............................497
Figure 6-126 The FOSC Card Panel ..................................................................499
Figure 6-128 Composition and Signal Flow of the BEOSC Card .........................505
Figure 6-129 The BEOSC Card Panel ...............................................................508
Figure 6-130 Composition and Signal Flow of the OPM4 Card ...........................513
Figure 6-131 The OPM4 / OPM8 Card Panel .....................................................514
Figure 6-132 Positioning of the OTDR8 Card and WDM2 Card in the System .....517
Figure 6-133 Composition and Signal Flow of the OTDR8 Card .........................518
Figure 6-134 The OTDR8 Card Panel................................................................519
Figure 6-135 Application of the DGE Card in the System....................................522
Figure 6-136 Composition and Signal Flow of the DGE Card..............................523
Figure 6-137 The DGE Card Panel ....................................................................524
Figure 6-138 Application of the GFF Card in the System ....................................527
Figure 6-139 Composition and Signal Flow of the GFF Card ..............................527
Figure 6-140 The GFF Card Panel.....................................................................528
Figure 6-141 Composition and Signal Flow of the EMU Card..............................531
Figure 6-142 The EMU Card Panel ....................................................................533
Figure 6-143 DIP Switches in the EMU Card......................................................536
Figure 6-144 Composition and Signal Flow of the FCU Card ..............................539
Figure 6-145 Composition and Signal Flow of the EFCU Card............................542
Figure 6-146 Composition and Signal Flow of the EMVU Card ...........................545
Figure 6-147 The EMVU Card Panel..................................................................547
Figure 6-148 Composition and Signal Flow of the EFCVU Card .........................551
Figure 6-149 Composition and Signal Flow of the FCVU Card............................554
Figure 6-150 Composition and Signal Flow of the ASCU Card............................557
Figure 6-151 The ASCU Card Panel ..................................................................558
Figure 6-152 Composition and Signal Flow of the SCU Card ..............................562
Figure 6-153 The AIF Card Panel ......................................................................564
Figure 6-154 The EAIF Card Panel ....................................................................568
Figure 6-155 Composition and Signal Flow of the CAIF1 Card ...........................573
Figure 6-156 The CAIF1 Card Panel..................................................................574
Figure 6-157 Composition and Signal Flow of the CAIF2 Card ...........................578
Figure 6-158 The CAIF2 Card Panel..................................................................579
Figure 6-159 Composition and Signal Flow of the CTU Card ..............................582
Figure 6-160 The CTU Card Panel ....................................................................584
Figure 6-161 The PWRV Card Panel .................................................................587
Figure 6-162 The PWR Card Panel ...................................................................589
Figure 6-163 The DCM Panel ............................................................................592
Figure 7-1 The -48 V Power Cable and PE Protection Cable for the Cabinet
(Connected with the PDP 3000064) ..............................................596
Figure 7-2 GND Cabinet Power Cable (25 mm2, Connected with the PDP
3000064) ......................................................................................596
Figure 7-3 GND Cabinet Power Cable (16 mm2, Connected with the PDP
3000064) ......................................................................................596
Figure 7-4 The Cabinet Power Cable for the PDP 3000068 ............................597
Figure 7-5 The Cabinet Power Cable (to PDP-3000078) ................................599
Figure 7-6 The PE Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-3000078) ............599
Figure 7-7 The Subrack Power Cable for the PDP 3000064 ...........................601
Figure 7-9 Definition of Connectors for the Subrack Power Cable (PDP
3000064) ......................................................................................602
Figure 7-11 The OTH Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078) .......................605
Figure 7-12 The Channel Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)..................606
Figure 7-13 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable for the PDP 3000064.608
Figure 7-14 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable for the PDP 3000068.609
Figure 7-15 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-3000078) .....610
Figure 7-16 The Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable ................................. 611
Figure 7-17 The Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet...............................613
Figure 7-18 The Subrack Alarm Cable for the PDP 3000068 ............................614
Figure 7-21 The OTH Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078) ........................617
Figure 7-22 The Channel Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078)...................617
Figure 7-23 The PDP (3000064) Alarm Cable ..................................................618
Figure 7-24 The PDP (3000078) Alarm Cable ..................................................619
Figure 7-25 The Interface of the External Clock Cable......................................620
Figure 7-26 The Connection of the External Clock Cable..................................621
Figure 7-27 Appearance of the DE-9 Connector...............................................622
Figure 7-28 The Network Cable .......................................................................624
Figure 7-29 The Network Cable .......................................................................625
Figure 7-30 The RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface ...............................627
Figure 7-31 Connection of the RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface..........628
Figure 7-32 The Cable for the HK Interface ......................................................629
Figure 7-33 Connection of the Cable for the HK Interface .................................633
Tables
Table 1-1 Names and Functions of Components of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet ..7
Table 1-2 Introduction to Indicator LEDs on the 300 mm-deep Cabinet ..............8
Table 1-3 Technical Parameters of the 300 mm Deep Cabinet......................... 11
Table 1-4 Name and Function of Each Component of the Cabinet (600mm
deep)..............................................................................................17
Table 1-5 The Indicator LEDs of the Cabinet (600mm deep)............................17
Table 1-6 Technical Parameters for the 600 mm Deep Cabinet .......................31
Table 2-1 Description of the PDP (3000064)'s External Power Input
Connectors.....................................................................................38
Table 2-2 Description of the PDP (3000064)'s Branch Power Rail Output
Connectors.....................................................................................38
Table 2-3 The Correspondence Relationship between the Power Connectors
and the ACB Control Switches ........................................................38
Table 2-4 Pin Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors .........39
Table 2-5 Technical Parameters of the PDP (3000064) ...................................40
Table 2-6 Description of the PDP (3000068)'s External Power Input
Connectors.....................................................................................45
Table 2-7 Description of the PDP (3000068)'s Branch Power Rail Output
Connectors.....................................................................................45
Table 2-9 The External -48 V Power Input Connectors of the PDP (3000078) ..51
Table 2-10 The Branch -48 V Power Output Connectors of the PDP (3000078) .51
Table 2-11 Pins of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors.......................52
Table 3-1 Description of Components of the OTH Subrack (3030066) and Their
Functions........................................................................................57
Table 3-2 Description of the Subrack Fan Unit Indicator LEDs.........................60
Table 3-3 Safety Sign for the Fan Unit ............................................................60
Table 3-4 Technical Parameters of the Fan Unit ..............................................60
Table 3-5 Distribution of GCCs on the EMVU Card in the OTH Subrack ..........65
Table 3-6 Distribution of GCCs on the ASCU Card in the OTH Subrack...........65
Table 3-7 Technical Parameters of the OTH Subrack (3030066) .....................66
Table 4-1 Description of Components of the Channel Subrack and Their
Functions........................................................................................69
Table 4-3 Safety Sign on the Fan Unit.............................................................72
Table 4-5 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack...................................78
Table 4-6 Technical Specifications of the Channel Subrack (3030036) ............78
Table 5-1 Description of Components of the Channel Subrack and Their
Functions........................................................................................80
Table 5-3 Safety Sign on the Fan Unit.............................................................84
Table 5-5 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack...................................88
Table 5-6 Technical Specifications of the Channel Subrack (3030105) ............88
Table 6-1 Card Appearance and Dimensions..................................................92
Table 6-2 Card Classification..........................................................................96
Table 6-3 Corresponding Relationship between OTH Subrack Slots and
Cards .............................................................................................99
Table 6-4 Mapping Relationships between Cards and Channel Subrack
Slots .............................................................................................101
Table 6-5 Access Service and Quantity of the 8TDGF Card ..........................104
Table 6-6 Description of the 8TDGF Card Panel ...........................................106
Table 6-7 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGF Card .......................106
Table 6-8 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TDGF Card ..................................107
Table 6-9 Power Consumption of the 8TDGF Card .......................................107
Table 6-10 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8TDGS Card..................108
Table 6-11 Description of the 8TDGS Card Panel ........................................... 110
Table 6-12 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card ....................... 110
Table 6-13 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TDGS Card .................................. 111
Table 6-14 Power Consumption of the 8TDGS Card ....................................... 111
Table 6-15 The 8TGX Card’s Service Type and Quantity................................. 112
Table 6-16 The 8TGX Card Panel................................................................... 115
Table 6-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card ......................... 115
Table 6-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TGX Card..................................... 116
Table 6-19 Power Consumption of the 8TGX Card.......................................... 116
Table 6-20 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8TA1 Card ..................... 117
Table 6-21 Description of the 8TA1 Card Panel............................................... 119
Table 6-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card .......................... 119
Table 6-23 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TA1 Card......................................120
Table 6-24 Power Consumption of the 8TA1 Card...........................................120
Table 6-25 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 16TA Card .....................122
Table 6-26 Description of the 16TA Card Panel...............................................124
Table 6-27 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card ..........................124
Table 6-28 4GFC Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card ................125
Table 6-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 16TA Card......................................125
Table 6-30 Power Consumption of the 16TA Card...........................................126
Table 6-31 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2TA2 Card .....................127
Table 6-32 Description of the 2TA2 Card Panel...............................................129
Table 6-33 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2TA2 Card ..........................129
Table 6-36 The 4TA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .....................132
Table 6-37 Descriptions of the 4TA2 Card Panel .............................................134
Table 6-41 The 4TEA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity...................137
Table 6-42 Descriptions of the 4TEA2 Card Panel ..........................................139
Table 6-43 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEA2 Card ........................139
Table 6-44 Mechanical Parameters of the 4TEA2 Card ...................................140
Table 6-45 Power Consumption of the 4TEA2 Card ........................................140
Table 6-46 The 8TEA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity...................142
Table 6-47 Descriptions of the 8TEA2 Card Panel ..........................................144
Table 6-48 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TEA2 Card ........................144
Table 6-49 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TEA2 Card ...................................145
Table 6-50 Power Consumption of the 8TEA2 Card ........................................145
Table 6-51 The 8TA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .....................147
Table 6-52 Descriptions of the 8TA2 Card Panel .............................................149
Table 6-56 The 10TA2 Card’s Service Type and Quantity................................151
Table 6-57 The 10TA2 Card Panel..................................................................154
Table 6-58 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TA2 Card.........................154
Table 6-59 Mechanical Parameters of the 10TA2 Card....................................155
Table 6-60 Power Consumption of the 10TA2 Card.........................................155
Table 6-61 The TA3 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .......................156
Table 6-62 Descriptions of the TA3 Card Panel ...............................................158
Table 6-63 Optical Interface Specifications of the TA3 Card ............................158
Table 6-64 Mechanical Parameters of the TA3 Card .......................................159
Table 6-65 Power Consumption of the TA3 Card.............................................159
Table 6-66 The ETA3 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .....................160
Table 6-67 Description of the ETA3 Card Panel ..............................................162
Table 6-68 Optical Interface Specifications of the ETA3 Card ..........................162
Table 6-69 Mechanical Parameters of the ETA3 Card .....................................163
Table 6-70 Power Consumption of the ETA3 Card ..........................................163
Table 6-71 The TA4 Card’s Service Type and Quantity ...................................164
Table 6-72 The TA4 Card Panel .....................................................................166
Table 6-73 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the TA4 Card ....166
Table 6-74 Mechanical Parameters of the TA4 Card .......................................167
Table 6-75 Power Consumption of the TA4 Card.............................................167
Table 6-76 Access Service Type and Quantity of the TGX Card ......................169
Table 6-77 Description of the TGX Card Panel................................................171
Table 6-78 Optical Interface Specifications of the TGX Card ...........................171
Table 6-79 Mechanical Parameters of the TGX Card ......................................172
Table 6-80 Power Consumption of the TGX Card............................................172
Table 6-81 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8EF Card .......................173
Table 6-82 Description of the 8EF Card Panel ................................................176
Table 6-83 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card ............................176
Table 6-84 Mechanical Parameters of the 8EF Card .......................................177
Table 6-85 Power Consumption of the 8EF Card ............................................177
Table 6-86 The Cross-connect Card Panel .....................................................180
Table 6-87 Description for the MXCU / SXCU Card Panel ...............................181
Table 6-88 Mechanical Parameters of the MXCU / SXCU Cards .....................181
Table 6-89 Power Consumption of the MXCU / SXCU Cards ..........................181
Table 6-90 The LMS2E Card’s Service Type and Quantity ..............................183
Table 6-91 Description of the LMS2E Card Panel ...........................................185
Table 6-92 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS2E Card .......................185
Table 6-93 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS2E Card ..................................186
Table 6-94 Power Consumption of the LMS2E Card .......................................186
Table 6-95 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2LMS2E Card ................188
Table 6-96 Description of the 2LMS2E Card Panel .........................................190
Table 6-97 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card .....................190
Table 6-98 Mechanical Parameters of the 2LMS2E Card ................................191
Table 6-99 Power Consumption of the 2LMS2E Card .....................................191
Table 6-100 The 4LXA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity ...................193
Table 6-101 Descriptions of the 4LXA2 Card Panel...........................................196
Table 6-102 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LXA2 Card ........................196
Table 6-103 Mechanical Parameters of the 4LXA2 Card ...................................197
Table 6-104 Power Consumption of the 4LXA2 Card ........................................197
Table 6-105 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2LA2 Card .....................199
Table 6-106 Description of the 2LA2 Card Panel...............................................201
Table 6-107 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card ..........................201
Table 6-108 Mechanical Parameters of the 2LA2 Card .....................................202
Table 6-109 Power Consumption of the 2LA2 Card...........................................202
Table 6-110 The 4LA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .....................204
Table 6-111 Descriptions of the 4LA2 Card Panel .............................................206
Table 6-115 The 4TEL2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity ...................209
Table 6-116 Descriptions of the 4TEL2 Card Panel........................................... 211
Table 6-117 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEL2 Card ........................ 211
Table 6-118 Mechanical Parameters of the 4TEL2 Card ...................................212
Table 6-119 Power Consumption of the 4TEL2 Card.........................................212
Table 6-120 The 8LA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity .....................214
Table 6-121 Descriptions of the 8LA2 Card Panel .............................................216
Table 6-125 The LMS3E Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity ..................219
Table 6-126 Descriptions of the LMS3E Card Panel..........................................221
Table 6-127 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) ..221
Table 6-128 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) ..222
Table 6-129 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the LMS3E Card (Double-
slot) ..............................................................................................223
Table 6-130 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)..............223
Table 6-131 Power Consumption of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)...................223
Table 6-132 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)....223
Table 6-133 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)....224
Table 6-134 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the LMS3E Card (Single-
slot) ..............................................................................................225
Table 6-135 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) ...............225
Table 6-136 Power Consumption of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) ....................225
Table 6-137 The LMS4E Card’s Service Access Capacity.................................227
Table 6-138 The LMS4E Card Panel ................................................................229
Table 6-139 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the
LMS4E Card.................................................................................229
Table 6-140 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS4E Card ..................................230
Table 6-141 Power Consumption of the LMS4E Card .......................................230
Table 6-142 Access Service Type and Quantity of the MST2 Card ....................233
Table 6-143 Description of the MST2 Card Panel..............................................235
Table 6-144 Client Side Interface Specifications of the MST2 Card (STM-16 /
OTU1 Service)..............................................................................235
Table 6-145 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (GE
Service) ........................................................................................236
Table 6-146 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card .237
Table 6-147 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card ....................................237
Table 6-148 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card..........................................237
Table 6-149 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2S Card..................239
Table 6-150 Description of the OTU2S Card Panel ...........................................241
Table 6-151 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................241
Table 6-152 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................242
Table 6-153 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card ..................................242
Table 6-154 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card .......................................243
Table 6-155 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2OTU2S Card................245
Table 6-156 Description of the 2OTU2S Card Panel .........................................247
Table 6-157 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................247
Table 6-158 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................248
Table 6-159 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card ................................249
Table 6-160 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card .....................................249
Table 6-161 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 4OTU2S Card................251
Table 6-162 The 4OTU2S Card Panel ..............................................................253
Table 6-163 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 4OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................253
Table 6-164 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the 4OTU2S
Card .............................................................................................254
Table 6-165 Mechanical Parameters of the 4OTU2S Card ................................255
Table 6-166 Power Consumption of the 4OTU2S Card .....................................255
Table 6-167 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2E Card..................257
Table 6-168 Description of the OTU2E Card Panel ...........................................259
Table 6-169 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E
Card .............................................................................................259
Table 6-170 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E
Card .............................................................................................260
Table 6-171 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card ..................................261
Table 6-172 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card .......................................261
Table 6-173 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2F Card ..................263
Table 6-174 Description of the OTU2F Card Panel ...........................................265
Table 6-175 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2F
Card .............................................................................................265
Table 6-176 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card ..................................266
Table 6-177 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card .......................................266
Card .............................................................................................271
Card .............................................................................................272
Table 6-182 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the OTU3S Card.......................273
Table 6-183 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card .................273
Table 6-186 Access Service and Quantity of the OTU3S Card (Coherent).........275
Table 6-187 Descriptions on the OTU3S Card (Coherent) Panel .......................278
Table 6-188 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card
(Coherent) ....................................................................................278
Table 6-189 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the OTU3S Card
(Coherent) ....................................................................................279
Table 6-190 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S (Coherent) Card.................280
Table 6-191 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)......................280
Table 6-192 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU3E Card..................282
Card .............................................................................................284
Card .............................................................................................285
Table 6-196 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the OTU3E Card.......................286
Table 6-197 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card .................287
Table 6-198 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E Card ..................................287
Table 6-199 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card .......................................287
Table 6-200 Access Service and Quantity of the OTU3S Card (Coherent).........289
Table 6-201 Descriptions on the OTU3E Card (Coherent) Panel .......................291
Table 6-202 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card
(Coherent) ....................................................................................291
Table 6-203 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card
(Coherent) ....................................................................................292
Table 6-204 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E (Coherent) Card.................293
Table 6-205 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)......................293
Table 6-207 The OTU3F Card Panel ................................................................297
Card .............................................................................................297
Table 6-209 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card...........298
Card .............................................................................................303
Card .............................................................................................304
Table 6-218 The OTU4E Card’s Service Type and Quantity ..............................307
Card .............................................................................................309
Card .............................................................................................310
Table 6-222 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU4E Card .................................. 311
Table 6-223 Power Consumption of the OTU4E Card ....................................... 311
Table 6-225 Description of the OTU4F Card Panel ...........................................315
Card .............................................................................................315
Table 6-229 The OMU Series of Cards and Functions ......................................318
Table 6-230 Description of the OMU Series of Card Panels...............................322
Table 6-231 Specifications of the OMU Series of Cards ....................................323
Table 6-232 Mechanical Parameters of the OMU Series of Cards .....................323
Table 6-233 Power Consumption of the OMU Series of Cards ..........................323
Table 6-234 The VMU Series of Cards and Functions.......................................324
Table 6-235 Description of the VMU Series of Card Panels ...............................329
Table 6-236 Specifications of the VMU Series of Cards.....................................330
Table 6-237 Mechanical Parameters of the VMU Series of Cards......................330
Table 6-238 Power Consumption of the VMU Series of Cards...........................330
Table 6-239 Functions of the ODU Series of Cards ...........................................331
Table 6-240 Description of the ODU Series of Card Panels ...............................335
Table 6-241 Specifications of the ODU Series of Cards.....................................336
Table 6-242 Mechanical Parameters of the ODU Series of Cards......................337
Table 6-243 Power Consumption of the ODU Series of Cards...........................337
Table 6-244 Description of the WDM2 Card Panel ............................................342
Table 6-245 Specifications of the WDM2 Card ..................................................342
Table 6-246 Mechanical Parameters of the WDM2 Card ...................................343
Table 6-247 Power Consumption of the WDM2 Card ........................................343
Table 6-248 Description of the ITL50 Card Panel ..............................................346
Table 6-249 Specifications of the ITL50 Card....................................................347
Table 6-250 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card.....................................348
Table 6-251 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card ..........................................348
Table 6-252 Description of the OSCAD Card Panel ..........................................351
Table 6-253 Specifications of the OSCAD Card ................................................352
Table 6-254 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card .................................352
Table 6-255 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card ......................................353
Table 6-256 Description of the EOSAD Card Panel...........................................357
Table 6-257 Specifications of the EOSAD Card ................................................358
Table 6-258 Mechanical Parameters of the EOSAD Card .................................358
Table 6-259 Power Consumption of the EOSAD Card.......................................358
Table 6-260 Description of the WOSAD Card Panel..........................................362
Table 6-261 Specifications of the WOSAD Card ...............................................363
Table 6-262 Mechanical Parameters of the WOSAD Card ................................363
Table 6-263 Power Consumption of the WOSAD Card......................................363
Table 6-264 Description of the BIDI Card Panel ................................................367
Table 6-265 Specifications of the BIDI Card......................................................368
Table 6-266 Mechanical Parameters of the BIDI Card.......................................368
Table 6-267 Power Consumption of the BIDI Card ............................................368
Table 6-268 Description of the WSS8M and WSS4M Card Panels ....................373
Table 6-269 Specifications of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card ................................374
Table 6-270 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card .................374
Table 6-271 Power Consumption of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card.......................375
Table 6-272 Description of the WSS8D and the WSS4D Card Panels ...............378
Table 6-273 Specifications of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card .................................379
Table 6-274 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card ..................379
Table 6-275 Power Consumption of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card .......................379
Table 6-276 Description of the SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card Panel.............................384
Table 6-277 Specifications of the SOAD8 Card.................................................385
Table 6-278 Mechanical Parameters of the SOAD8 Card..................................385
Table 6-279 Power Consumption of the SOAD8 Card .......................................385
Table 6-280 Specifications of the SOAD4 Card.................................................385
Table 6-281 Mechanical Parameters of the SOAD4 Card..................................386
Table 6-282 Power Consumption of the SOAD4 Card .......................................386
Table 6-283 Description of the FWSS8M and FWSS20M Card Panels ..............391
Table 6-284 Specifications of the FWSS8M Card..............................................392
Table 6-285 Specifications of the FWSS20M Card............................................392
Table 6-286 Mechanical Parameters of the FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card ...........392
Table 6-287 Power Consumption of the FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card ................393
Table 6-288 Description of the FWSS8D and FWSS20D Card Panels...............397
Table 6-289 Specifications of the FWSS8D Card ..............................................398
Table 6-290 Specifications of the FWSS20D Card ............................................398
Table 6-291 Mechanical Parameters of the FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card ............398
Table 6-292 Power Consumption of the FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card .................399
Table 6-293 Description of the WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T Card Panels...406
Table 6-294 Specifications of the WSS8MR Card .............................................407
Table 6-295 Specifications of the WSS8DT Card ..............................................407
Table 6-296 Specifications of the ODU8T Card.................................................408
Table 6-297 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T
Card .............................................................................................408
Table 6-298 Power Consumption of the WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card ....409
Table 6-299 Description of the WSS8T and WSS20T Card Panels ....................412
Table 6-300 Specifications of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card ................................412
Table 6-301 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card .................413
Table 6-302 Power Consumption of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card ......................413
Table 6-303 Functions of the OA / PA / HOA Card ............................................415
Table 6-304 Description of the OA / PA / HOA Card Panel ................................418
Table 6-305 Specifications of the OA Card .......................................................419
Table 6-306 Specifications of the PA Card ........................................................419
Table 6-307 Specifications of the HOA Card .....................................................420
Table 6-308 Mechanical Parameters of the OA / PA / HOA Card .......................421
Table 6-309 Power Consumption of the OA / PA / HOA Card ............................421
Table 6-310 Description of the VGA Card Panel ...............................................425
Table 6-311 Common Specifications of the VGA Card ......................................425
Table 6-312 VGFA481521-11 ...........................................................................427
Table 6-313 VGFA482221-11 ...........................................................................428
Table 6-314 VGFA482821-11 ...........................................................................428
Table 6-315 Mechanical Parameters of the VGA Card ......................................428
Table 6-316 Power Consumption of the VGA Card ...........................................429
Table 6-317 Description of the MSA Card Panel ...............................................434
Table 6-318 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 21 dBm) ......435
Table 6-319 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 24 dBm) ......436
Table 6-320 Mechanical Parameters of the MSA Card ......................................437
Table 6-321 Power Consumption of the MSA Card ...........................................437
Table 6-322 Description of the RAU_B and the RAU_F Card Panels.................442
Table 6-323 Specifications of the RAU Cards ...................................................443
Table 6-324 Mechanical Parameters of the RAU_B / RAU_F Card ....................444
Table 6-325 Power Consumption of the RAU_B / RAU_F Card .........................444
Table 6-326 Description of the ROA Card Panel ...............................................450
Table 6-327 Specifications of the ROA Card .....................................................451
Table 6-328 Mechanical Parameters of the ROA Card ......................................451
Table 6-329 Power Consumption of the ROA Card ...........................................451
Table 6-330 Description of the RGU Panel .......................................................453
Table 6-331 Description of the OCP Card Panel ...............................................459
Table 6-332 Specifications of the OCP Card .....................................................460
Table 6-333 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card ......................................460
Table 6-334 Power Consumption of the OCP card ............................................460
Table 6-335 Description of the OMSP Card Panel.............................................465
Table 6-336 Specifications of the OMSP Card ..................................................466
Table 6-337 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card ...................................466
Table 6-338 Power Consumption of the OMSP card .........................................466
Table 6-339 Description of the OLP (1:1) Card Panel ........................................471
Table 6-340 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card..............................................472
Table 6-341 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card...............................472
Table 6-342 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card ....................................473
Table 6-343 Description of the OLP (1+1) Card Panel.......................................478
Table 6-344 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card ............................................479
Table 6-345 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card..............................479
Table 6-346 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card...................................480
Table 6-347 Description of the OSC Card Panel ...............................................485
Table 6-348 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card ...........................486
Table 6-349 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048 kbit/
s)..................................................................................................487
Table 6-350 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048 kHz).488
Table 6-351 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC Card ......................................488
Table 6-352 Power Consumption of the OSC Card ...........................................488
Table 6-353 Description of the EOSC Card Panel .............................................493
Table 6-354 Clock Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card...........................495
Table 6-355 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card...................495
Table 6-356 Mechanical Parameters of the EOSC Card....................................496
Table 6-357 Power Consumption of the EOSC Card .........................................496
Table 6-358 Description of the FOSC Card Panel .............................................500
Table 6-359 Major Interface Specifications of the FOSC Card ...........................502
Table 6-360 Mechanical Parameters of the FOSC Card ....................................503
Table 6-361 Power Consumption of the FOSC Card .........................................503
Table 6-362 Description of the BEOSC Card Panel...........................................509
Table 6-363 Optical Interface Specifications of the BEOSC Card ...................... 511
Table 6-364 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the BEOSC Card ................ 511
Table 6-365 Mechanical Parameters of the BEOSC Card .................................512
Table 6-366 Power Consumption of the BEOSC Card.......................................512
Table 6-367 Description of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card Panel ................................515
Table 6-368 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ......................................515
Table 6-369 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .......................516
Table 6-370 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ............................516
Table 6-371 Description of the OTDR8 Card Panel ...........................................520
Table 6-372 Specifications of the OTDR8 Card.................................................520
Table 6-373 Mechanical Parameters of the OTDR8 Card..................................521
Table 6-374 Power Consumption of the OTDR8 Card .......................................521
Table 6-375 Description of the DGE Card Panel ...............................................525
Table 6-376 Mechanical Parameters of the DGE Card ......................................525
Table 6-377 Power Consumption of the DGE Card ...........................................525
Table 6-378 The Configuration Rules of the GFF Card......................................526
Table 6-379 Description of the GFF Card Panel ................................................529
Table 6-380 Mechanical Parameters of the GFF Card.......................................529
Table 6-381 Power Consumption of the GFF Card............................................529
Table 6-382 Description of the EMU Card Panel ...............................................534
Table 6-383 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU / FCU / EFCU Card ................538
Table 6-384 Power Consumption of the EMU Card ...........................................538
Table 6-385 Mechanical Parameters of the FCU Card ......................................540
Table 6-386 Power Consumption of the FCU Card............................................540
Table 6-387 Mechanical Parameters of the EFCU Card ....................................543
Table 6-388 Power Consumption of the EFCU Card .........................................544
Table 6-389 The EMVU Card Panel..................................................................548
Table 6-390 Mechanical Parameters of the EMVU Card....................................550
Table 6-391 Power Consumption of the EMVU Card.........................................550
Table 6-392 Mechanical Parameters of the EFCVU Card..................................553
Table 6-393 Power Concumption of the EFCVU Card .......................................553
Table 6-394 Mechanical Parameters of the FCVU Card ....................................555
Table 6-395 Power Consumption of the FCVU Card .........................................555
Table 6-396 Description of the ASCU Card Panel .............................................559
Table 6-397 Mechanical Parameters of the ASCU Card ....................................561
Table 6-398 Power Consumption of the ASCU Card .........................................561
Table 6-399 Mechanical Parameters of the SCU Card ......................................563
Table 6-400 Power Consumption of the SCU Card ...........................................563
Table 6-401 Description of the AIF Card Panel .................................................565
Table 6-402 Connectors on Interfaces of the AIF Card ......................................565
Table 6-403 Mechanical Parameters of the AIF Card ........................................566
Table 6-404 Power Consumption of the AIF Card .............................................567
Table 6-405 Description of the EAIF Card Panel ...............................................569
Table 6-406 Definition for the Interface's Connectors on the EAIF Card .............570
Table 6-407 Mechanical Parameters of the EAIF Card ......................................571
Table 6-408 Power Consumption of the EAIF Card ...........................................571
Table 6-409 The CAIF1 Card Panel..................................................................575
Table 6-410 Terminals on interfaces of the CAIF1 card .....................................576
Table 6-411 Mechanical Parameters of the CAIF1 Card....................................576
Table 6-412 Power Consumption of the CAIF1 Card .........................................576
Table 6-413 The CAIF2 Card Panel..................................................................580
Table 6-414 Terminals on Interfaces of the CAIF2 Card ....................................581
Table 6-415 Mechanical Parameters of the CAIF2 Card....................................581
Table 6-416 Power Consumption of the CAIF2 Card .........................................581
Table 6-417 The CTU Card Panel ....................................................................585
Table 6-418 Terminals on Interfaces of the CTU Card .......................................585
Table 6-419 Mechanical Parameters of the CTU Card ......................................586
Table 6-420 Power Consumption of the CTU Card............................................586
Table 6-421 The PWRV Card Panel .................................................................587
Table 6-422 Mechanical Parameters of the PWRV Card ...................................588
Table 6-423 Power Consumption of the PWRV Card ........................................588
Table 6-424 Description of the PWR Card Panel...............................................590
Table 6-425 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card .....................................591
Table 6-426 Power Consumption of the PWR Card...........................................591
Table 6-427 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications.......................................593
Table 6-428 The G.655 Fiber - DCM Specifications ..........................................593
Table 6-429 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM ..............................................593
Table 7-1 Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064).................................595
Table 7-2 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP
3000064) ......................................................................................596
Table 7-3 The Cabinet Power Cable for the PDP 3000068 ............................597
Table 7-4 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP
3000068) ......................................................................................598
Table 7-5 Description for the Cabinet Power Cables (to PDP-3000078).........599
Table 7-6 The Connection of the Cabinet Power Cable (PDP-3000078) ........600
Table 7-7 Connection of the Subrack Power Cable with the PDP 3000064 ....603
Table 7-8 Connection of the Subrack Power Cable with the PDP 3000068 ....604
Table 7-9 The Connection of the Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)....606
Table 7-10 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground
Cable (for PDP 3000064) ..............................................................608
Table 7-11 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground
Cable (for the PDP 3000068) ........................................................609
Table 7-12 Connection of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-
3000078) ...................................................................................... 611
Table 7-13 Connection of the Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable ............612
Table 7-14 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet..........613
Table 7-15 Connection Relationship of the Subrack Alarm Cable (for the PDP
3000068) ......................................................................................614
Table 7-16 Connection of the Subrack Alarm Cable with the PDP 3000064 .....616
Table 7-17 Connection of the Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078) ...........618
Table 7-18 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the PDP (3000064) ..................619
Table 7-19 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the PDP (3000078) ..................619
Table 7-20 The Definition for the Pins of the External Clock Cable...................620
Table 7-21 Description of the External Clock Cable Connection ......................621
Table 7-22 Pinout and Wiring for the DE-9P Connector of the E1 Cable (75 Ω) 622
Table 7-23 Pinout and Wiring for the DE-9P Connector of the E1 Cable (120
Ω) .................................................................................................623
Table 7-24 Connection of the E1 Cable...........................................................623
Table 7-25 Interconnection of Network Cables between Subracks...................626
Table 7-26 Pinout and Wiring of the RJ-45 Cable for the CTR Interface ...........627
Table 7-27 Pinout and Wiring of the RJ-45 Cable for the MON Interface ..........627
Table 7-28 Cable Pinout and Wiring for the HK Interface .................................629
Table 7-29 The Fiber Connector Diagram .......................................................634
Table A-1 Summary of Card Numbers...........................................................636
1 Cabinet
The following introduces the FONST 5000 cabinet.
300 mm Deep Cabinet
600 mm Deep Cabinet
Version: D 1
FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment Hardware Description
1.1 300 mm Deep Cabinet
The following introduces the code, appearance, structure, equipment layout, and
technical parameters of the 300 mm deep cabinet.
1.1.1 Type
FiberHome provides four types of 300 mm-deep cabinets for the FONST 5000.
Cabinet Type Cabinet Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)
4102661 1600 × 600 × 300

4102662 2000 × 600 × 300
4102663 2200 × 600 × 300
4102664 2600 × 600 × 300
1.1.2 Appearance
The cabinet is used to contain subracks, the PDP and the DCM supporting plate, as
well as implements cabling (wires, cables and fibers), anti-dust, and equipment
protection functions.
The appearance of the 300 mm-deep cabinet is shown in Figure 1-1.
2 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet
1.1.3 Structure
The following introduces the main components of a 300 mm-deep cabinet.
The 300 mm-deep cabinet used by the FONST 5000 is mainly composed of the
cabinet body, front door, side doors and rear door.
Version: D 3
u The cabinet body consists of four vertical mounting flanges, the cabinet top, the
cabinet base, slide rails and fastenings between the vertical mounting flanges.
Detachable cover plates are used at the cabinet top and bottom so that wires
and cables can go through the wiring holes easily.
u The cabinet doors include the front door, the side doors and the rear door. All of
them can be removed from the cabinet (to facilitate the cable arrangement).
See Figure 1-2 for the exploded view of the 300 mm-deep cabinet.
(1) Side door (2) Rear door (3) Cabinet body (4) Front door
Figure 1-2 Exploded View of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet
4 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Cabinets of different specifications have similar appearance and structure, different

from each other only in height. Figure 1-3 shows the structure of a 2200 mm-high
cabinet. The locations and names of the main cabinet components are marked in
the figure.
Version: D 5
(1) Wiring hole (top) (2) Indicator LED (3) ESD protection (4) Rear door
earth ground fastener
(5) Wiring channel (6) Mounting hole on (7) Wiring hole (8) Ventilation hole
the vertical mounting (bottom) (bottom)
flanges
(9) Mounting hole for (10) Ventilation hole

the top-connection (top)
bent angle bracket
Figure 1-3 Overall View of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet
6 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Table 1-1 lists the name and function of each component of the 300 mm-deep
cabinet.
Table 1-1 Names and Functions of Components of the 300 mm-deep Cabinet
Number Name Function

For leading in and out all wires and cables in the top access
(1) Wiring hole (top)
wiring mode.
For indicating cabinet alarm information with red, green, and

(2) Indicator LED
yellow lights.
ESD protection
For securing the ESD protection wrist strap to prevent
(3) earth ground
damage to equipment caused by electrostatic discharge.
fastener
Protects the subrack and prevents the dust from entering the
(4) Rear door
cabinet.
(5) Wiring channel Lays wires and cables.
Mounting hole on
(6) the vertical For securing the subrack and PDP in the cabinet.
mounting flanges
Wiring hole For leading in and out all wires and cables in the floor
(7)
(bottom) access wiring mode.
Ventilation hole Located on the cabinet bottom, for ventilation and air cooling
(8)
(bottom) of the cabinet.
Mounting hole for
the top- For installing the top-connection bent angle bracket on the
(9)
connection bent cabinet top.
angle bracket
Ventilation hole Located on the cabinet top, for ventilation and air cooling of
(10)
(top) the cabinet.
The indicator LEDs for a 300 mm-deep cabinet are located on the cabinet top. They
indicate the equipment power supply status and the levels of the alarms currently
generated by the equipment. Users can have an idea about the current operating
status of the equipment by observing the cabinet indicator LEDs.
Three indicator LEDs are on the 300 mm-deep cabinet. Table 1-2 introduces the
statuses of each indicator LED.
Version: D 7
Table 1-2 Introduction to Indicator LEDs on the 300 mm-deep Cabinet
Indicator LED Status Description
The equipment has a normal input of power

ON
supply.
Green
The equipment has no input of power
OFF
supply.
A critical alarm or major alarm occurs in the

ON
Critical alarm / major alarm equipment.
indicator LED – red The equipment has no critical alarm or
OFF
major alarm.
Minor alarm indicator LED – ON A minor alarm occurs in the equipment.

yellow OFF The equipment has no minor alarm.
1.1.4 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000
The layout of the FONST 5000 varies when cabinets of different specifications such
as 2600 mm, 2200 mm, 2000 mm, are used. Select the right configuration diagram
according to the practical subrack configuration on site.
Follow the installation guidelines below for the equipment layout:
u Select the right equipment layout diagram with regard to the cabinet
specifications and arrange the subracks accordingly.
u The spaces marked as empty are for air cooling of the equipment and cannot
be occupied.
u If the cabinet is not equipped with a DCM, keep the corresponding position for
DCM empty and the positions for subracks unchanged.
u When the channel subrack is configured with a 100G card, users should use
the 3000064 / 3000078 type of the PDP. Keep the ambient temperature below
40℃ in a long period and below 45℃ in a short period.
u The reversed height of the PDP is 150 mm. If the actual height of the PDP is
less than 150 mm, the PDP should be installed against the cabinet top.
8 Version: D
1 Cabinet
2600 mm Cabinet
The WDM subrack configuration of the the 2600 mm cabinet (300 mm deep) is
shown in Figure 1-4 (unit: mm).
Figure 1-4 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High and 300 mm Deep Cabinet
When installing the equipment, you should keep the following principles.
u When configuring three WDM subracks (without 100G cards), operate

according to Figure (A).
u When configuring four WDM subracks (without 100G cards), operate according
to Figure (B). This configuration mode is not recommended; if it is used, keep
the ambient temperature below 40℃ in a long period and below 45℃ in a short
period.
u When configuring three WDM subracks (with 100G cards), operate according
to Figure (C).
Version: D 9
2200mm Cabinet
u When configuring three WDM subracks (without 100G cards), operate

according to Figure (A).
u When configuring four WDM subracks (with 100G cards), operate according to
Figure (B). if this mode is used, keep the ambient temperature below 35℃ in a
long period and below 40℃ in a short period
2000mm Cabinet
10 Version: D
1 Cabinet
When installing the equipment, you should keep the following principles: When
configuring two WDM subracks (with100G cards), operate according to the previous
figure.
1.1.5 Technical Parameter
The 300 mm-deep cabinet technical parameters include dimensions, weights, etc.
See Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Technical Parameters of the 300 mm Deep Cabinet
Item Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) Weight (kg)
1600 × 600 × 300 51

300 mm deep cabinet 2000 × 600 × 300 61
2200 × 600 × 300 66
Version: D 11
Table 1-3 Technical Parameters of the 300 mm Deep Cabinet (Continued)
Item Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) Weight (kg)
2600 × 600 × 300 76
1.2 600 mm Deep Cabinet
The following introduces the code, appearance, structure, equipment layout, and
technical parameters of the cabinet (600 mm deep).
1.2.1 Type
We provide four types of 600 mm deep cabinets of the FONST 5000.
Cabinet Number Cabinet Dimension (Height×Width×Depth) (mm)
404000096 1600×600×600
404000097 2000×600×600
404000098 2200×600×600
404000099 2600×600×600
1.2.2 Appearance
The cabinet accommodates the subrack, the PDP and the DCM supporting plate
and performs wiring, anti-dust and equipment level protection.
The cabinet (600mm deep) appearance is shown in Figure 1-7.
12 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Figure 1-7 Cabinet Appearance (600mm deep)
1.2.3 Structure
The following introduces the main components of the cabinet (600mm deep).
The FONST 5000 cabinet (600mm deep) is composed of the cabinet body, the front
door, the side doors, and the rear door.
Version: D 13
u The cabinet body includes the cabinet top, the cabinet base, and the vertical
mounting flange. Both the cabinet top and base use the structure of plastic net
for letting in and out wires and cables.
u The cabinet doors include the front door, the side doors and the rear door. All of
them can be removed from the cabinet for easy access to the internal
equipment (for the convenience of the layout of the wires and cables).
See Figure 1-8 for the exploded view of the cabinet (600mm deep).
14 Version: D
1 Cabinet
(1) Front door (2) Side door (3) Cabinet body (4) Rear door
Figure 1-8 The Exploded-View of the Cabinet (600mm deep)
The outline structures of cabinets with different specifications are similiar to each
other, only differ in height. Figure 1-9 shows the structure of the 2600 mm cabinet
and marks the position and name of each main component.
Version: D 15
(1) Cabinet indicator (2) Mounting hole for (3) Wiring hole (top) (4) Ventilation hole
LEDs the top connection bent (top)
angle bracket
(5) ESD protection (6) Mounting hole on the (7) Floor mounting (8) Wiring hole
earth ground vertical mounting flange hole (bottom)
fastener
Figure 1-9 Structure of the Cabinet (600mm deep)
16 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Table 1-4 lists the name and function of each component of the cabinet (600mm
deep).
Table 1-4 Name and Function of Each Component of the Cabinet (600mm deep)

Cabinet indicator For indicating cabinet alarm information with red, green,
(1)
LEDs and yellow lights.
Mounting hole for

For installing the top-connection bent angle bracket on the
(2) the top-connection
cabinet top.
bent angle bracket
For leading in and out all wires and cables in the top
(3) Wiring hole (top)
access wiring mode.
Ventilation hole Located on the cabinet top, for ventilation and air cooling of
(4)
(top) the cabinet.
ESD protection
For securing the ESD protection wrist strap. Avoid the
(5) earth ground
equipment damage caused by ESD.
fastener
Mounting hole on
(6) the vertical For securing the subrack and PDP in the cabinet.
mounting flanges
Located on the cabinet bottom, for connecting the cabinet

(7) Floor mounting hole and the floor or connecting the cabinet and the adjustable
cabinet base.
Wiring hole For leading in and out all wires and cables in the floor
(8)
(bottom) access wiring mode.
The indicator LEDs of the cabinet (600mm deep) are located on the cabinet top. The
LEDs indicate the equipment power supply status and the levels of the alarms
currently generated by the equipment. You can have an idea about the current
operation status of the equipment by observing the cabinet indicator LEDs.
There are three indicator LEDs on the cabinet (600mm deep). Table 1-5 introduces
the statuses of each LED.
Table 1-5 The Indicator LEDs of the Cabinet (600mm deep)
The equipment has normal power

ON
Green supply.
OFF The equipment has no power supply.
Version: D 17
Table 1-5 The Indicator LEDs of the Cabinet (600mm deep) (Continued)
A critical alarm or major alarm occurs

ON
Critical alarm / major alarm indicator in the equipment.
LED (red) No critical alarm or major alarm
OFF
occurs on the equipment.
A minor alarm occurs in the

ON
equipment.
Minor alarm indicator LED (yellow)
No minor alarm occurs on the
OFF
equipment.
1.2.4 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000
The layout of the FONST 5000 varies when cabinets of different specifications such
as 2600 mm, 2200 mm, 2000 mm, 1600mm are used. Select the right configuration
diagram according to the practical subrack configuration on site.
Abide by the installation guidelines below for the equipment layout:
u Select the right equipment layout diagram with regard to the cabinet
specifications and arrange the subracks accordingly.
u The spaces marked as empty are for air cooling of the equipment and cannot
be occupied.
u If the cabinet is not equipped with a DCM, keep the corresponding position for
DCM empty and the positions for subracks unchanged.
u When the channel subrack is configured with a 100G card, users should use
the 3000064 / 3000078 type of the PDP. Keep the ambient temperature below
40℃ in a long period and below 45℃ in a short period.
u When the FONST 5000 OTH subrack is configured, the PDP (3000064) or the
PDP (3000078) should be used.
u The reversed height of the PDP is 150 mm. If the actual height of the PDP is
less than 150 mm, the PDP should be installed against the cabinet top.
18 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Note:
The FONST 5000 OTH subrack height is 1040 mm, occupying an

installation height of 1050 mm; the FONST 4000 OTH subrack height is
1045 mm, occupying an installation height of 1050 mm
1.2.4.1 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High 600 mm Deep

Cabinet
The following introduces the equipment layout of the 2600 mm high 600 mm deep
cabinet.
The FONST 5000 + the FONST 5000
Figure 1-10 shows the subrack layout of the 2600 mm high 600 mm deep cabinet
equipped with the OTH subracks of the FONST 5000. (unit: mm).
Version: D 19
Figure 1-10 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet (the FONST 5000 +
the FONST 5000)
u When installing only one FONST 5000 OTH subrack, arrange the subrack
according to the position of OTH subrack 1 in the layout figure.
u When installing two FOSNT 5000 OTH subracks, keep the ambient
temperature below 35℃ in a long period and below 40℃ in a short period.
20 Version: D
1 Cabinet
equipped with the FONST 5000 OTH and the FONST 4000 OTH subracks. In the
figure, OTH subrack 1 represents the FONST 5000 OTH subrack, and the OTH
subrack 2 and OTH subrack 3 represent the FONST 4000 OTH subracks (unit: mm).
the FONST 4000)
When installing the equipment, you should abide by the following principles.
u When installing two or more OTH subracks, keep the ambient temperature
below 35℃ in a long period and below 40℃ in a short period.
Version: D 21
equipped with the FONST 5000 OTH and the FONST 3000 OTH subracks. In the
figure, OTH subrack 1 represents the FONST 5000 OTH subrack, and the OTH
subrack 2 and OTH subrack 3 represent the FONST 3000 OTH subracks (unit: mm).
the FONST 3000)
22 Version: D
1 Cabinet
The FONST 5000 + the FONST 4000 + the FONST 3000
equipped with the FONST 5000, the FONST 4000, and the FONST 3000 OTH
subracks. In the figure, OTH subrack 1 represents the FONST 5000 OTH subrack,
and the OTH subrack 2 represents the FONST 4000 OTH subrack and OTH
subrack 3 represent the FONST 3000 subracks respectively (unit: mm).
the FONST 4000 + the FONST 3000)
Version: D 23
according to the position of OTH subrack 3 in the layout figure. When installing
only one FONST 4000 OTH subrack, arrange the subrack according to the
position of OTH subrack 2 in the layout figure.
The FONST 5000 + WDM (without 100G Card) (40-Channel)
equipped with the 40-channel FONST 5000 OTH subrack and WDM subrack
(without the 100G card) (unit: mm).
the 40-Channel WDM)
24 Version: D
1 Cabinet
When installing the equipment, keep the following principle: Install the WDM
subracks according to the sequence from WDM subrack 1 to WDM subrack 4 in the
figure.
The FONST 5000 + WDM (without 100G Card) (80-Channel)
equipped with the 80-channel FONST 5000 OTH subrack and WDM subrack
(without the 100G card) (unit: mm).
the 80-Channel WDM)
figure.
Version: D 25
The FONST 5000 + WDM (with 100G Card)
equipped with the OTH subrack and WDM subrack (with the 100G card), (unit: mm).
the WDM)
figure.
The WDM (with 100G Card)
only equipped with the WDM subrack (with the 100G card) (unit: mm).
26 Version: D
1 Cabinet
Figure 1-17 Equipment Layout of a 2600 mm High 600 mm Deep Cabinet (WDM)
u When installing the WDM subrack, follow the sequence of WDM subrack 1 to
WDM subrack 6 as indicated in the figure.
u Keep the ambient temperature below 45℃.

Cabinet
cabinet.
Version: D 27
equipped with the OTH and WDM subracks of the FONST 5000. (unit: mm).
u When installing the WDM subracks, arrange them from to WDM subrack 1 to
WDM subrack 2 in the figure. If only one WDM subrack is configured, install it
according to the position of subrack 1 in the figure. Keep the ambient
temperature below 45℃.
u When one FONST 5000 OTH subrack and at least one WDM subrack (with the
100G card) are configured, keep the ambient temperature below 35℃ in a long
period and below 40℃ in a short period.
28 Version: D
1 Cabinet

Cabinet
cabinet.
The FONST 5000 + WDM
equipped with the FONST 5000 OTH and WDM subracks. (unit: mm).
the WDM)
Version: D 29
u When installing the WDM subracks, arrange them from to WDM subrack 1 to
WDM subrack 2 in the figure. If only one WDM subrack is configured, install it
according to the position of subrack 1 in the figure.
u When one FONST 5000 OTH subrack and at least one WDM subrack (with the
100G card) are configured, keep the ambient temperature below 35℃ in a long
period and below 40℃ in a short period.
The FONST 5000 + DCM
equipped with only the FONST 5000 OTH subracks, (unit: mm).
the DCM)
30 Version: D
1 Cabinet

Cabinet
cabinet.
equipped with the FONST 5000 OTH subracks and the DCM installed at the cabinet
bottom (unit: mm).
The following introduces the dimensions and weight of each type of the 600-mm
deep cabinets. See Table 1-6.
Table 1-6 Technical Parameters for the 600 mm Deep Cabinet
Item Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm) Weight (kg)
600 mm deep cabinet 1600×600×300 87
Version: D 31
Table 1-6 Technical Parameters for the 600 mm Deep Cabinet (Continued)
Item Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm) Weight (kg)
2000×600×300 91
2200×600×300 95.5
2600×600×300 116
32 Version: D
2 PDP
The following introduces the PDP of the FONST 5000.
PDP (3000064)
PDP (3000068)
PDP (3000078)
Version: D 33
2.1 PDP (3000064)
The following introduces the functions, appearance, front panel, connectors,

switches, lightning protection module, and technical parameters of the PDP
(3000064).
2.1.1 Function
The PDP (3000064) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution,
alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and protection against reverse polarity
connection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified
devices inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from
other devices inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.
The PDP mainly performs the following functions:
u Inducts eight channels of -48 V power (four active and four standby) from the
external (e.g. the power cabinet), and then outputs four sets of redundant
branch power rails (eight branch power rails total). The maximum output current
of a single branch is 50 A.
Note:
For the detailed input / out current values of the PDP, refer to PDP850A
User Manual.
u Supports the reverse polarity connection protection function.
u Receives alarm signals reported from the corresponding equipment via the four
alarm convergence connectors, provides audio alarms for the signals,
illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and outputs alarm signals to the
upper layer equipment (such as the head of row cabinet).
u Supports the lightning protection module alarm reporting function: When the
lightning protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure
signals, and reports them to the network management system via the
equipment.
34 Version: D
2 PDP
u Performs the lightning protection function: The PDP can effectively block the
induced lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) on the power cable.
2.1.2 Appearance
The appearance of the PDP (3000064) is shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Appearance of the PDP (3000064)
2.1.3 Front Panel
The positions of the control switches of the automatic circuit breakers (ACBs) for
power rails are identified on the front panel of the PDP (3000064), as shown in
Figure 2-2. The control switches are SW1-1 to SW1-4 and SW2-1 to SW2-4.
Version: D 35
Figure 2-2 Front Panel of the PDP (3000064)
2.1.4 Connector and Switch
The following introduces the connectors and switches of the PDP (3000064).
Switch
u Switches SW1-1 to SW1-4 control the connection / interruption of the four -48 V
signals of the active power supply.
u Switches SW2-1 to SW2-4 control the connection / interruption of the four -48 V
signals of the standby power supply.
Connector
After the front panel of the PDP is removed, users can see connectors and switches
populated on the PDP panel, as shown in Figure 2-3.
36 Version: D
2 PDP
(1) External power -48 V input (2) Alarm connector for the head (3) Alarm connector for the (4) Busbar
connector (A) of row cabinet cabinet top indicator LED
(5) Audio alarm buzzer (6) Subrack alarm convergence (7) External power -48 V input (8) Lightning protection module
connector connector (B)
(9) -48 V branch power rail output (10) Jumper pin (11) 0V branch power rail output (12) Protection earth ground
connector (B) connector (B) connector
(13) 0 V branch power rail output (14) -48V branch power rail
connector (A) output connector (A)
Figure 2-3 Connectors and Switches on the PDP (3000064)
Version: D 37
Power Connector
u The description of the external power input connectors is listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Description of the PDP (3000064)'s External Power Input Connectors
External Power Input Connector Description
Access 2×4 channels of -48 V

-48V_A_1 to -48V_A_4 external power signals. The
-48V_B_1 to -48V_B_4 connectors A and B are mutual
backup.
2×4 channels of input Four connectors on the Access four channels of
busbar external power GND signals.
Connects with the external

The left connector of XS6 power protection earth ground
PE.
u The branch power rail output connectors are described in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Description of the PDP (3000064)'s Branch Power Rail Output Connectors
Branch Power Rail Output Connector Description
Output 2×4 channels of -48 V

XS2, XS3, XS7, XS8 power signals. The branches A
and B are mutual backup.
2×4 channels of output
Output 2×4 channels of 0V
XS4, XS5, XS9, XS10 power signals. The branches A
and B are mutual backup.
The correspondence relationship between the power connectors on the PDP

(3000064) and the ACB control switches on the front panel is shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 The Correspondence Relationship between the Power Connectors and the ACB
Control Switches
ACB Control Switch Branch Power Rail Output Connector
SW1-1 to SW1-4 -48V_A_1 to -48V_A_4
SW2-1 to SW2-4 -48V_B_1 to -48V_B_4
Socket
u Subrack alarm convergence connector
38 Version: D
2 PDP
Four RJ-45 sockets on the PDP (3000064) (AlmIn1 to AlmIn4) are subrack
alarm convergence connectors. See Figure 2-4 for the definition of connectors.
Figure 2-4 Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors
See Table 2-4 for the description of pins.
Table 2-4 Pin Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors
Pin Number Definition Description
Pin1 SPK-
Pin1 and Pin2 form a pair of audio alarm signals
Pin2 SPK+
Pin3 0V A common return path for CALL, NUA and UA
Pin4 CALL Order wire call signal
Pin5 NUA Non-urgent alarm
Pin6 UA Urgent alarm
Pin7 LALM- Pin7 and Pin8 form a pair of lightning protection failure
Pin8 LALM+ alarm signals
u The alarm output connector XP1 for the head of row cabinet
XP1 has three pins, which are defined as, from the top down, CALL (order wire
call), NUA (non-urgent alarm), and UA (urgent alarm).
u The alarm connector XP2 for the cabinet top indicator LED
XP2 is a six-pin D-type socket, whose pins are defined as, from the right to the
left according to pairs, CALL (order wire call), NUA (non-urgent alarm), and UA
(urgent alarm).
Jumper Pin
The JP1 is the jumper pin for selection of the PDP (3000064) operating status
indicator LED, and supports the following two ways of shorting.
Version: D 39
u Short pin1 and pin2 of the JP1: Selects and transmits the PDP power-on status
information to the cabinet-top indicator LED (green). When any branch (or
multiple branches simultaneously) of the PDP is powered on, the cabinet-top
indicator LED will be solid green.
u Short pin2 and pin3 of the JP1: Selects and transmits the CALL (order wire call)
status information to the cabinet-top indicator LED (green).
Note:
The pins 2 and 3 of the JP1 have been shorted by default in the PDP
before delivery.
Audio Alarm Buzzer
SPK1 is the audio alarm buzzer.
2.1.5 Lightning Protection Module
The power lightning protection module of the PDP (3000064) uses a standard DB-
25 plug to connect with the lightning protection module socket (XS11 / XS12) on the
PDP. The PDP can effectively block the induced lightning of 4 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20
us combination wave) in the common mode or of 2 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) in the differential mode on the power line.
The following introduces the technical parameters of the PDP (3000064).
Table 2-5 Technical Parameters of the PDP (3000064)
Item Parameter
Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) 150 × 530 × 145.8
Weight (kg) 4.5
Maximum single input current (A) 50
Maximum single output current (A) 50
40 Version: D
2 PDP
2.2 PDP (3000068)
The following introduces the functions, appearance, front panel, connectors,

switches, lightning protection module, and technical parameters of the PDP
(3000068).
2.2.1 Function
alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and protection against reverse polarity
connection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified
devices inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from
other devices inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.
u Power supply distribution function: Inducts two channels of -48 V power supply
(one active and one standby) from the external (e.g. the power cabinet), and
then outputs three sets of redundant branch power rails (six branch power rails
total). The maximum output current for a signal channel is 32 A.
u Supports the protection against the reverse polarity connection.
u Alarm signal processing: Receives alarm signals reported from the

corresponding device inside the cabinet, provides audio alarms for the signals,
illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and outputs alarm signals to the
upper layer equipment (such as the head of row cabinet).
u Lightning protection module alarm reporting function: When the lightning

protection module fails, the PDP will output the lightning protection failure alarm
signal, and report it to the network management system via the equipment.
u Lightning protection function: The PDP can effectively block the induced
lightning of 4 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave) in the common mode
or of 2 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave) in the differential mode on
the power line.
Version: D 41
2.2.2 Appearance
Figure 2-5 Appearance of the PDP (3000068)
2.2.3 Front Panel
The positions of the control switches of the automatic circuit breakers (ACBs) for
branch power rails are identified on the front panel of the PDP (3000068), as shown
in Figure 2-6. The control switches are SW1-1 to SW1-3 and SW2-1 to SW2-3.
Figure 2-6 Front Panel of the PDP (3000068)
42 Version: D
2 PDP
2.2.4 Connector and Switch
The following introduces the connectors and switches of the PDP (3000068).
Switch
u The ACBs SW1-1 to SW1-3 respectively control the branch power rails
-48V_A_1 to -48V_A_3.
u The ACBs SW2-1 to SW2-3 respectively control the branch power rails
-48V_B_1 to -48V_B_3.
Connector
After the front panel of the PDP is removed, users can see connectors and switches
populated on the PDP panel, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Version: D 43
(1) -48V branch power rail output (2) Alarm connector for the (3) Alarm connector for the cabinet (4) External power -48 V input
connector (A) head of row cabinet top indicator LED connector
(5) External power 0 V input (6) Protection earth ground (7) -48 V branch power rail output (8) 0 V branch power rail output
connector connector connector (B) connector (B)
(9) Lightning protection module (10) 0 V branch power rail (11) Subrack alarm convergence
output connector (A) connector
Figure 2-7 Rear Panel of the PDP (3000068)
44 Version: D
2 PDP
Power Connector
u The description of the external power input connectors is listed in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Description of the PDP (3000068)'s External Power Input Connectors
Connector Description
The -48 V external power input connectors. The connectors A and B

-48V_A, -48V_B
are mutual backup.
The 0V external power input connectors. The connectors A and B

0V_A, 0V_B
are mutual backup.
PE Protection earth ground connector.
u The branch power rail output connectors are described in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 Description of the PDP (3000068)'s Branch Power Rail Output Connectors
Automatic circuit breakers (ACB), the outer connector is the

-48V_A_1 to -48V_A_3 output connector of the -48 V branch power rail, corresponding
to -48V_A.
Automatic circuit breakers (ACB), the outer connector is the

-48V_B_1 to -48V_B_3 output connector of the -48 V branch power rail, corresponding
to -48V_B.
0V_A_1 to 0V_A_3 (XS1) 0 V branch power output connectors, corresponding to 0V_A.
0 V branch power output connectors, corresponding to to 0V_

0V_B_1 to 0V_B_3 (XS2)
B.
Alarm Connector
u The subrack alarm convergence connectors AlmIn1 to AlmIn3
AlmIn1 to AlmIn3 are all RJ-45 sockets and can receive the alarm messages
from the corresponding equipment in the cabinet.
u The alarm output connector XP1
XP1 is a 3-pin D-type socket and can output the alarm message to the head of
row cabinet.
u The alarm output connector XS4
XS4 is a 6-pin D-type socket and can output the trigger signal of the alarm
indicator LED to the cabinet top indicator LED.
Version: D 45
Jumper Pin
JP1 is the jumper pin for selecting the PDP's working status indicator LED. Two
selection methods can be used as follows.
u When pins 1 and 2 of JP1 are shorted, the green indicator LED on the cabinet
top shows the working status of the PDP.
u When pins 2 and 3 of JP1 are shorted, the green indicator LED on the cabinet
top is controlled by the Call (order wire call) signal.
Note:
Pins 2 and 3 of JP1 are shorted by default in the PDP (3000068) before
delivery.
Audio Alarm Buzzer
SPK1 is the audio alarm buzzer.
The power lightning protection module of the PDP (3000068) uses a standard DB-
25 plug to connect with the lightning protection module socket (XS3) on the PDP.
The PDP can effectively block the induced lightning of 4 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) in the common mode or of 2 kV (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) in the differential mode on the power line.
The following introduces the technical parameters of the PDP (3000068).
Item Parameter
Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) 100 × 530 × 168.5
Weight (kg) 4.2
46 Version: D
2 PDP
Table 2-8 Technical Parameters of the PDP (3000068) (Continued)
Item Parameter
Maximum single input current (A) 96
Maximum single output current (A) 32
2.3 PDP (3000078)
The following introduces the function, appearance, front panel, connectors and
switches, the lightning protection module and technical parameters of the PDP
(3000078) .
2.3.1 Function
alarm signal handling, and lightning protection. It inducts an external power and
distributes it among other powered devices inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP
receives the alarm signals from other devices inside the cabinet, and then displays
and outputs the alarm signals.
u The power distribution function:　Inducts four or two channels of -48 V active

and standby power supplies from the external (e.g. the power cabinet), and
then outputs two sets of branch power rails. The maximum output current of a
single branch is 100A.
Note:
For details of the input / output current of the PDP, refer to PDP4100B
User Manual.
u Receives alarm signals reported from the corresponding equipment, provides

audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LED and
outputs alarm signals to the upper layer equipment (such as the head of row
cabinet).
Version: D 47
u Supports the lightning protection module alarm reporting function: When the
lightning protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure
signals, and reports them to the network management system via the
equipment.
u Performs the lightning protection function: The PDP can effectively block the
induced lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us
combination wave) on the power cable.
2.3.2 Appearance
Figure 2-8 The Appearance of the PDP (3000078)
2.3.3 Front Panel
The control switches SW1-1 to SW1-2 and SW2-1 to SW2-2 for the automatic circuit
breaker (ACB) of the power supply are located on the front panel of the PDP
(3030078), as shown in Figure 2-9.
48 Version: D
2 PDP
Figure 2-9 The Front Panel of PDP (3000078)
2.3.4 Connectors and Switches
The following introduces the connectors and switches on the PDP (3000078).
Switches
u Switches SW1-1 to SW1-2 control the connection / interruption of the two -48 V
signals of the active power supply.
u Switches SW2-1 to SW2-2 control the connection / interruption of the two -48 V
signals of the standby power supply.
Terminal Board
Remove the front panel and you can see the connectors and switches on the PDP
panel, as shown in Figure 2-10.
Version: D 49
(1) External power -48 V (2) Lightning protection (3) Alarm connector for the (4) External power (5) Earth ground
input connector (A) module socket (A) indicator LEDs on the 0V input connector connector
cabinet top (A)
(6) Subrack alarm (7) External power 0V (8) Alarm connector for the (9) Lightning (10) External power -48 V
convergence connector input connector (B) head of row cabinet protection module input connector (B)
socket (B)
(11) -48 V branch power rail (12) -48 V branch power (13) -48 V input connector (14) 0V branch (15) Alarm concatenation
output connector 1 (B) rail output connector 2 (B) shorting stub (B) power rail output connector 3
connector 1 (B)
(16) 0V branch power rail (17) Alarm concatenation (18) 0 V branch power rail (19) Alarm (20) 0 V branch power rail
output connector 2 (B) connector 2 output connector 2 (A) concatenation output connector 1 (A)
connector 1
(21) -48 V input connector (22) -48V branch power (23) -48V branch power rail
shorting stub (A) rail output connector 2 (A) output connector 1 (A)
Figure 2-10 Distribution of the PDP (3000078) Connectors and Switches
50 Version: D
2 PDP
Power Connectors
u See Table 2-9 for the description of the external -48 V power input connectors.
Table 2-9 The External -48 V Power Input Connectors of the PDP (3000078)
Input four external -48 V power signals

External -48 V power u The left sides in areas A and B back up each other
input connector (A) u The right sides in areas A and B back up each other
External -48 V power Input two external -48 V power signals
input connector (B) The right side in area A and the left side in area B back up each
other
The external 0 V power input connector (A) and the external -48 V
External 0V power input power input connector (A) correspond to each other one by one at
connector (A) the left and right sides respectively Note 1
External 0V power input The external 0 V power input connector (B) and the external -48 V
connector (B) power input connector (B) correspond to each other one by one at
the left and right sides respectively
XS5: PE earth ground Left: Connected with the external earth ground bar
connector Right: Connected with the cabinet earth ground point
Note 1: Both the external 0 V and -48 V input connectors are divided into the left and right
sides.
u See Table 2-10 for the description of the branch power rail output connectors.
Table 2-10 The Branch -48 V Power Output Connectors of the PDP (3000078)
Output four branch -48 V power signals

SW1-1, SW1-2
u SW1-1 and SW2-1 back up each other
SW2-1, SW2-2
u SW1-2 and SW2-2 back up each other
0V_A_1 / 0V_A_2 0V_A_1 and 0V_A_2 correspond to SW1-1

0V_A_3 / 0V_A_4 0V_A_3 and 0V_A_4 correspond to SW1-2
0V_B_1 / 0V_B_2 0V_B_1 and 0V_B_2 correspond to SW2-1
0V_B_3 / 0V_B_4 0V_B_3 and 0V_B_4 correspond to SW2-2
Socket
u Subrack alarm convergence connector
Version: D 51
The three RJ-45 sockets XS1 to XS3 on the PDP (3000078) are subrack alarm
convergence connectors. See Figure 2-11 for the definition of connectors.
Figure 2-11 Definition of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors
See Table 2-11 for the description of pins.
Table 2-11 Pins of the Subrack Alarm Convergence Connectors
Pin Number Definition Description
Pin1 SPK-
1 and 2 are a pair of audio alarm signals.
Pin2 SPK+
Pin3 0V A common return path for CALL, NUA and UA.
Pin4 CALL Order wire call signal
Pin5 NUA Non-urgent alarm
Pin6 UA Urgent alarm
Pin7 LALM- 7 and 8 are a pair of lightning protection failure alarm

Pin8 LALM+ signals.
u Alarm concatenation connector
The alarm concatenation connectors (XP1 to XP3) on the PDP (3000078) and
the subrack alarm convergence connectors (XS1 to XS3) correspond to each
other one by one. When two PDPs are installed in one cabinet, if the alarm
cable of the front part of the subrack is connected with XS1 of the front PDP
and the alarm cable of the rear part of the subrack is connected with XS2 of the
rear PDP, users should concatenate XP1 of the front PDP and XP2 of the rear
PDP.
u Alarm connector XPB1 for the head of row cabinet
As the alarm connector for the head of row cabinet, the XPB1 uses a three-
conductor socket. The three pins from top to bottom are defined as CALL (order
wire call), NUA (non-urgent alarm), and UA (urgent alarm) respectively.
52 Version: D
2 PDP
u Alarm connector XPB2 for the indicator LEDs on the cabinet top
As the alarm connector for the indicator LEDs on the cabinet top, the XPB2
uses a six-conductor D-type socket. Its pins are in pairs, and are defined from
top to bottom as CALL (order wire call), NUA (non-urgent alarm) and UA
(urgent alarm) respectively.
-48 V Input Connector Shorting Stub (A) /-48 V Input Connector Shorting Stub (B)
Correspond to the external -48 V power input connectors (A) and (B).
u When the current of the external power is not higher than 100 A, the equipment
needs four external power signals. Under this condition, the -48 V input
connector shorting stubs do not need to be shorted.
u When the current of the external power is higher than 100 A, the equipment
needs two external power signals. Under this condition, the -48 V input
connector shorting stubs need to be shorted.
Audio Alarm Buzzer
SPK1 to SPK3 are audio alarm buzzers, corresponding to XS1 to XS3 respectively.
The power lightning protection module of the PDP (3000078) uses the standard DB-
25 plug to connect the lightning protection module socket on the PDP (XS11 and
XS12), and can withstand the surge of 4KV (1.2/50us-8/20us combination wave)
under the common mode, and withstand the surge of 2kV under the differential
mode, so as to ensure the normal equipment operation.
The following introduces the PDP (3000078) technical parameters.
Item Technical Parameter

Dimensions (height×width×depth) (mm) 148×530×206.8
Weight (kg) 4.5
Version: D 53
Table 2-12 Technical Parameters of the PDP (3000078) (Continued)

Maximum input current of a single
200
channel (A)
Maximum output current of a single

100
channel (A)
54 Version: D
3 OTH Subrack (3030066)
The following introduces structure, related components and technical parameters of

the OTH subrack (3030066). The OTH subrack (3030066) is applicable for the
FOSNT 5000.
Function
Structure
Fan Unit
Fiber Spool
Anti-dust Screen
Slot Allocation
Distribution of GCCs in the OTH Subrack
Technical Parameter
Version: D 55
3.1 Function
The OTH subrack performs electrical layer cross-connect, optical layer cross-
connect, and traditional WDM functions.
3.2 Structure
The OTH subrack (3030066) appearance and structure are shown in Figure 3-1.
(1) Mounting ear (2) Fiber spool (3) Fan unit
(4) Anti-dust screen (5) Fiber passage area (6) Card area
(7) Power cable wiring channel
Figure 3-1 The Appearance of the OTH Subrack (3030066)
The description of various components of the OTH subrack (3030066) is shown as

following:
56 Version: D
Table 3-1 Description of Components of the OTH Subrack (3030066) and Their Functions

(1) Mounting ear Secures the subrack in the cabinet
Located on both sides of the subrack for coiling the redundant
(2) Fiber spool
part of fibers.
For air cooling of the equipment in the cabinet, and each OTH
(3) Fan unit
subrack is configured with four fan units.
Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a metal

bearer and a low-density anti-dust screen. It can be secured by
(4) Anti-dust screen
self-locking and be plugged out of the subrack along the slide
rails.
Located below the card area of the subrack. Each slot in the
Fiber passage subrack corresponds to a fiber passage hole in the fiber
(5)
area passage area. Fibers are led through the corresponding fiber
passage holes so that the equipment looks neat and orderly.
The principal part of the subrack, holding all cards that

(6) Card area
implement various functions of the equipment.
Power cable
(7) For wiring of subrack power cables.
wiring channel
3.3 Fan Unit
The following introduces the functions, appearance, intelligent fan features,

indicator LEDs, safety signs, and technical parameters of the equipment's fan unit.
The fan unit is used for lowering the temperature inside the subrack, so as to
prevent the equipment faults caused by the over-high temperature.
3.3.1 Type
The number of the OTH subrack (3030066) fan unit is 405000021.
Version: D 57
3.3.2 Function
The fan unit is used for air cooling of the subrack. Users can control each fan’s
running status through the network management system. If any fan fails, the other
fans will raise their rotation speed, so that the equipment can operate normally and
efficiently under steady temperature.
3.3.3 Appearance
The OTH subrack (3000078) are equipped with four fan units so that hot air drawn
by the upper fan units will exhaust via the lower ones. Each fan unit consists of
three fans that work independently. See Figure 3-2 for the appearance of the fan
unit.
Figure 3-2 The Fan Unit
3.3.4 Intelligent Fan Feature
The 's fan unit provides two working modes: intelligent and manual modes.
Overview
u The intelligent mode: The fan unit automatically adjusts the fan rotation speed
according to the change of the equipment temperature.
58 Version: D
u The manual mode: The speed choices of the fans are set via the network
management system. The speed choices include: full-speed, fast, slow and
low.
Warning:
In the manual mode, the change in equipment temperature cannot be
monitored in a real-time manner, which may lead to equipment failure. In
the normal operations of the equipment, make sure that the fan unit is in
the intelligent mode.
Function Implementation
The start mode of the fan unit is soft start, which can reduce the fan unit’s impact on
the equipment. In the intelligent mode, after starting, the fan unit rotates at a
medium speed before the network element management card monitors the fan unit.
u When starting to monitor the fan unit, the network element management card
collects the feedback information on card temperature periodically and
compares it with the built-in speed control parameters on each card to
determine the fan unit’s rotating speed choice information.
u The fan unit controls the running of fans according to the rotating speed choice
information from the NE management card to guarantee air cooling of the
equipment.
u When a fault occurs, the fan unit sends the fault information to the network
element management card, which then reports the fan unit fault alarm on the
OTNM2000.
3.3.5 Indicator LED
The indicator LEDs on the frame of the fan unit are used to display the fan's
operating status. Table 3-2 lists the description of the fan indicator LEDs.
Version: D 59
Table 3-2 Description of the Subrack Fan Unit Indicator LEDs
Name Meaning Description
ON (green): the power supply is present.

ACT Working indicator LED
OFF: the power supply is not present.
ALM Alarm indicator LED ON (red): a fault has occurred in the fan unit.
3.3.6 Safety Sign
Table 3-3 Safety Sign for the Fan Unit
Sign Meaning Location

The fan unit safety warning sign.
The sign reminds the operation
The sign is located in the fan
staff to pull out 5 cm, wait 1
unit panel.
minute, remove unit from shelf
completely.
See Table 3-4 for the technical specifications of the fan unit.
Table 3-4 Technical Parameters of the Fan Unit

Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm) 64×487×260
Power consumption (W) Typical power consumption Note 1: 23
(with three fans) Maximum power consumption Note 2: 288
Weight (kg) 4.5

Note 1: The typical power consumption refers to the power consumption of the fan unit when
the equipment is configured with typical services and is operating under the normal
temperature (23 ± 2℃).
Note 2: The maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption of the fan unit
when the equipment is configured with the maximum consumption and is operating
under a high temperature (＞45℃).
60 Version: D
3.4 Fiber Spool
The fiber spools are located inside the cabinet for coiling and storing the redundant
part of fibers.
Type
Two models of fiber spools for the OTH subrack (3030066) are provided according
to the installation direction.
u Model number of the left fiber spool: 4.500.068.
u Model number of the right fiber spool: 4.500.067.
Background Knowledge
u Remember that the optical fibers are fragile when you are laying out optical
fiber cables. Make sure that the bend radius of optical fibers is no less than
38mm.
u Due to the special requirements on optical fiber connectors, optical cables

cannot be manufactured on site. To cater for the requirements on field
commissioning, the optical fiber connection cables are generally longer than
required. Therefore, a special unit for storing the redundant part of the optical
fiber connection cables is needed.
Function
u Stores the redundant optical fiber.
u Ensures that the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 38mm.
Appearance
The fiber spools are arranged on the left and right sides of the OTH subrack, eight in
total. Figure 3-3 illustrates the fiber spools.
Version: D 61
(1) Captive screw (2) Fiber spool (3) Fixed shaft (4) Small fiber
spool
Figure 3-3 Components of the Subrack Fiber Spool
3.5 Anti-dust Screen

Type
The type of the anti-dust screen on the OTH subrack (3030066) is 4.127.250.
Function
u Prevents dust from entering the subrack and keeps the card components inside
the subrack clean. Dust gathered on the components may cause over high
temperature of the components.
u The anti-dust screen should be cleaned regularly so as to ensure good

ventilation of the subrack.
Appearance
The anti-dust screen for the OTH subrack is installed at the bottom of the subrack,
as shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5.
62 Version: D
Figure 3-4 Location for the Anti-dust Screen of the OTH Subrack
Figure 3-5 The Anti-dust Screen for the OTH Subrack
3.6 Slot Allocation
The OTH subrack(3030066) is a two-sided subrack. The OTH subrack provides 33

slots in the front side. Its slot arrangement and typical card configuration are shown
in Figure 3-6.
Version: D 63
Figure 3-6 The Slot Allocation at the front of the OTH Subrack (3030066)
The OTH subrack provides 32 slots in the rear side. Its slot arrangement and typical
card configuration are shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 The Slot Allocation at the back of the OTH Subrack (3030066)
64 Version: D
3.7 Distribution of GCCs in the OTH Subrack
The GCC bus is the interface bus between the service cards and the EMVU card
and between the service cards and the ASCU card, for transmitting the information
on the network management system and the control plane.
Distribution of GCC on the EMVU Card
The supervisory information between NEs can be sent via either GCCs or OSCs. If
both OSCs and GCCs exist between two NEs, the EMVU card will automatically
select one of them. You can identify the GCC in use according to the states of the
GCC communication LEDs on the EMVU card panel.
See Table 3-5 for the distribution of GCCs on the EMVU card in the OTH subrack
(3030066).
Table 3-5 Distribution of GCCs on the EMVU Card in the OTH Subrack
Subrack Slot GCC Description
16 to 11 01 to 14
19 to 1E 15 to 28
Each slot corresponds to two
06 to 00 29 to 42
GCCs. For example, Slot 16
09 to 0F 43 to 56
OTH Subrack corresponds to GCC1 and GCC2;
36 to 30 57 to 70
Slot 2F corresponds to GCC111
39 to 3F 71 to 84
and GCC112.
26 to 20 85 to 98
29 to 2F 99 to 112
Distribution of GCCs on the ASCU Card
See Table 3-6 for the distribution of GCCs on the ASCU card in the OTH subrack
(3030066).
Table 3-6 Distribution of GCCs on the ASCU Card in the OTH Subrack
Slot GCC Description
16 to 11 01 to 14 Each slot corresponds to

06 to 00 15 to 28 two GCCs. For example,
39 to 3F 29 to 42 Slot 16 corresponds to
GCC1 and GCC2; Slot 2F
29 to 2F 43 to 56 corresponds to GCC55 and
GCC56.
Version: D 65
3.8 Technical Parameter
See Table 3-7 for the technical specifications of the OTH subrack (3030066).
Table 3-7 Technical Parameters of the OTH Subrack (3030066)

Dimensions (height×width×depth) (mm) 1040×496×570
Weight (kg) 62.1 (without the fan unit)
66 Version: D
4 Channel Subrack (3030036)
The following introduces the structure, related components, and technical

parameters of the channel subrack. The channel subrack is applicable for the
FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.
Function
Structure
Fan Unit
Fiber Spool
Anti-dust Screen
Slot Arrangement
Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
Technical Parameter
Version: D 67
4.1 Function
The channel subrack performs the optical layer cross-connect and the traditional
WDM functions, but does not perform the electrical layer cross-connect function.
4.2 Structure
The structure of the channel subrack (3030036) is shown in Figure 4-1.
(1) Fan unit (2) Fiber spool (3) Card area
(4) Fiber passage area (5) Subrack anti-dust screen (6) Mounting ear
Figure 4-1 The Structure of the Channel Subrack (3030036)
See Table 4-1 for description of various components of the channel subrack.
68 Version: D
Table 4-1 Description of Components of the Channel Subrack and Their Functions
Number Component Name Function

Located above the card area in the subrack, used for air
(1) Fan unit
cooling of the equipment.
Located at both sides of the subrack for coiling the

(2) Fiber spool
redundant part of fibers.
The principal part of the subrack, holding various cards

(3) Card area
to implement various functions of the equipment.
Located just below the card area. Each slot in the

subrack corresponds to one fiber passage hole in the
(4) Fiber passage area fiber passage area. Fibers pass through the
corresponding fiber passage holes so that the
equipment looks more neat and orderly.
Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a

Subrack anti-dust metal bearer and low-density anti-dust screen. It can be
(5)
screen secured by self-locking and be unplugged from the
subrack along the slide rails.
(6) Mounting ear Used for securing the subrack in the cabinet.
4.3 Fan Unit

4.3.1 Type
The type number of the fan unit for the channel subrack is 4500073.
4.3.2 Function
fans will raise their rotation speed, so that the equipment can operate normally and
Version: D 69
4.3.3 Appearance
The channel subrack (3030036) is equipped with three fan units. Each fan unit can
be installed independently. The fan unit appearance is shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 The Fan Unit (3030036)
The 's fan unit provides two working modes: intelligent and manual modes.
Overview
u The manual mode: The speed choices of the fans are set via the network
management system. The speed choices include: full-speed, fast, slow and
low.
Warning:
monitored in a real-time manner, which may lead to equipment failure. In
the normal operations of the equipment, make sure that the fan unit is in
70 Version: D
information from the NE management card to guarantee air cooling of the
equipment.
u When a fault occurs, the fan unit sends the fault information to the network
element management card, which then reports the fan unit fault alarm on the
OTNM2000.
4.3.5 Indicator LED
ON (green): the power supply is present.

OFF: the power supply is not present.
Version: D 71
4.3.6 Safety Sign
Table 4-3 Safety Sign on the Fan Unit

The fan unit safety alarm sign.
This sign reminds the
maintenance staff not to touch the
running fan blades. To remove the Located on the fan unit
fan unit, operate as follows: Pull it panel.
out 5 cm, wait for one minute, and
remove the fan from the subrack
completely.
The technical parameters of the fan unit are shown in Table 4-4.

Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm) 70 × 160 × 240
Power consumption (W) Typical power consumption Note 1: 3
(with three separate fan units) Maximum power consumption Note 2: 25
Weight (kg) 1.0

4.4 Fiber Spool
part of fibers.
72 Version: D
Type
The fiber spool on the channel subrack has two types according to different
installation directions.
u The type number of the left fiber spool: 4.127.219.
u The type number of the right fiber spool: 4.127.220.
u Be aware of the fragility of optical fibers when arranging optical fibers and
cables. The bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 38 mm.
u The optical fiber cannot be made on site due to the optical fiber connector's
specificity. To meet the project start-up requirements, the optical fiber will be
longer than the actual requirement. Therefore, a dedicated device is needed for
storing the redundant optical fiber.
Functions of the Fiber Spool
u Ensures that the bend radius of the optical fiber inside the fiber spool is no less
than 38 mm.
Appearance
Appearance of the fiber spools for the channel subrack is shown in Figure 4-3 and
Figure 4-4.
Version: D 73
Figure 4-3 Arrangement of the Fiber Spools for the Channel Subrack
74 Version: D
Figure 4-4 The Fiber Spool for the Channel Subrack

Type
The type number of the anti-dust screen for the channel subrack is 4.127.201.
Function
u The anti-dust screen filters the dust, keeps components on various cards in the
subrack clean, and prevents the components from overheating due to dust
buildup.
u Clean the anti-dust screen periodically, so as to ensure the good ventilation for
the subrack.
Version: D 75
Appearance
The anti-dust screen for the channel subrack is installed at the bottom of the
subrack, used to filter the dust. The appearance of the anti-dust screen is shown in
Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-5 The Position of the Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack
76 Version: D
Figure 4-6 The Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack
4.6 Slot Arrangement
The channel subrack is a single-sided subrack, which provides 17 slots in total. See
Figure 4-7 for the slot arrangement and typical card configuration in the channel
subrack.
Figure 4-7 Slot Arrangement for the Channel Subrack
Version: D 77
4.7 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
The GCC bus is the interface bus between the service cards and the EMU card, for
transferring the information of the network management system and the control
plane.
The supervisory information between NEs can be transmitted via both the GCC
channels and the OSC channels:
u If both the OSC channels and the GCC channels exist between two NEs, the
EMU card will automatically select one type of them to use.
u If the OSC channels do not exist, the equipment will randomly select one GCC
channel to send the supervisory information; under this condition, you can
identify the GCC channel in use according to the GCC communication indicator
LEDs’ statuses on the EMU card panel.
The distribution of GCCs in the channel subrack is shown in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
07 to 01 29 to 42 Each slot corresponds to two GCCs, e.g., slot 07

corresponds to GCC 29 and GCC 2; slot 0E
08 to 0E 43 to 56
corresponds to GCC 55 and GCC 56.
See Table 4-6 for the technical specifications of the channel subrack (3030036).
Table 4-6 Technical Specifications of the Channel Subrack (3030036)
Item Parameter
Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) 520.5 × 555 × 280.2
Weight (kg) 20.3
78 Version: D
The following introduces the structure, related components, and technical

parameters of the channel subrack. The channel subrack is applicable for the
FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.
Function
Structure
Fan Unit
Fiber Spool
Anti-dust Screen
Slot Arrangement
Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
Technical Parameter
Version: D 79
5.1 Function
The channel subrack performs the optical layer cross-connect and the traditional
WDM functions, but does not perform the electrical layer cross-connect function.
5.2 Structure
The structure of the channel subrack (3030105) is shown in Figure 5-1.
(1) Fiber spool (2) Mounting ear (3) Fan unit
(4) Subrack anti-dust screen (5) Fiber passage area (6) Card area
Figure 5-1 The Structure of the Channel Subrack (3030105)
See Table 5-1 for description of various components of the channel subrack.

Located at both sides of the subrack for coiling the
(1) Fiber spool
redundant part of fibers.
(2) Mounting ear Used for securing the subrack in the cabinet.
80 Version: D
(Continued)

Located above the card area in the subrack, used for
(3) Fan unit
air cooling of the equipment.
Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a

Subrack anti-dust metal bearer and low-density anti-dust screen. It can
(4)
screen be secured by self-locking and be unplugged from
the subrack along the slide rails.
Located just below the card area. Each slot in the

subrack corresponds to one fiber passage hole in the
(5) Fiber passage area fiber passage area. Fibers pass through the
corresponding fiber passage holes so that the
equipment looks more neat and orderly.
The principal part of the subrack, holding various

(6) Card area cards to implement various functions of the
equipment.
5.3 Fan Unit

5.3.1 Type
The type number of the fan unit for the channel subrack is 405000147.
5.3.2 Function
fans will adjust their rotation speed, so that the equipment can operate normally and
Version: D 81
5.3.3 Appearance
The channel subrack (3030105) is equipped with a fan unit, which includes ten fans.
The fan unit appearance is shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 The Fan Unit
The fan unit provides two working modes: intelligent and manual modes.
Overview
u The manual mode: The speeds of the fans are set via the network management
system. The speed choices include full-speed, fast, slow and low.
82 Version: D
Warning:
monitored in a real-time manner, which may lead to equipment fault. In
the normal operation of the equipment, make sure that the fan unit is in
information from the network element management card to guarantee air
cooling of the equipment.
u When a fan fault occurs, the fan unit sends the fault information to the network
element management card, which then reports the fan fault alarm on the
OTNM2000.
5.3.5 Indicator LED
Working indicator ON (green): the power supply is present.

ACT
LED OFF: the power supply is not present.
Version: D 83
5.3.6 Safety Sign
Table 5-3 Safety Sign on the Fan Unit

The fan unit safety alarm sign.
This sign reminds the
maintenance staff not to touch the
running fan blades. To remove the Located on the fan unit
fan unit, operate as follows: Pull it panel.
out 5 cm, wait for one minute, and
remove the fan from the subrack
completely.
The technical parameters of the fan unit are shown in Table 5-4.

Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm) 61 × 484.3 × 255.3
Typical power consumption Note 1: 100
Power consumption (W)
Maximum power consumption Note 2: 500
Weight (kg) 5.0

5.4 Fiber Spool
part of fibers.
84 Version: D
Type
The fiber spool on the channel subrack has two types according to different
installation directions.
u The type number of the left fiber spool: 4.127.219.
u The type number of the right fiber spool: 4.127.220.
u Be aware of the fragility of optical fibers when arranging optical fibers and
cables. The bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 38 mm.
u The optical fiber cannot be made on site due to the optical fiber connector's
specificity. To meet the project start-up requirements, the optical fiber will be
longer than the actual requirement. Therefore, a dedicated device is needed for
storing the redundant optical fiber.
Functions of the Fiber Spool
u Ensures that the bend radius of the optical fiber inside the fiber spool is no less
than 38mm.
Appearance
The fiber spools for the channel subrack is shown in Figure 5-3.
Version: D 85
Figure 5-3 The Fiber Spool for the Channel Subrack

Type
The type number of the anti-dust screen for the channel subrack is 4.127.201.
Function
u The anti-dust screen filters the dust, keeps components on various cards in the
subrack clean, and prevents the components from overheating due to dust
buildup.
u Clean the anti-dust screen periodically, so as to ensure the good ventilation for
the subrack.
86 Version: D
Appearance
The anti-dust screen for the channel subrack is installed at the bottom of the
subrack, used to filter the dust. The appearance of the anti-dust screen is shown in
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 The Anti-dust Screen for the Channel Subrack
5.6 Slot Arrangement
The channel subrack is a single-sided subrack, which provides 17 slots in total. See
Figure 5-5 for the slot arrangement and typical card configuration in the channel
subrack.
Figure 5-5 Slot Arrangement for the Channel Subrack
Version: D 87
5.7 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
The GCC bus is the interface bus between the service cards and the EMU card, for
transferring the information of the network management system and the control
plane.
The supervisory information between NEs can be transmitted via both the GCC
channels and the OSC channels:
u If both the OSC channels and the GCC channels exist between two NEs, the
EMU card will automatically select one type of them to use.
u If the OSC channels do not exist, the equipment will randomly select one GCC
channel to send the supervisory information; under this condition, you can
identify the GCC channel in use according to the GCC communication indicator
LEDs’ statuses on the EMU card panel.
The distribution of GCCs in the channel subrack is shown in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack
07 to 01 29 to 42 Each slot corresponds to two GCCs, e.g., slot 07

corresponds to GCC 29 and GCC 2; slot 0E
08 to 0E 43 to 56
corresponds to GCC 55 and GCC 56.
See Table 5-6 for the technical specifications of the channel subrack (3030105).
Table 5-6 Technical Specifications of the Channel Subrack (3030105)
Item Parameter
Dimensions (H × W ×D) (mm) 512.5 × 555 × 280.2
Weight (kg) 22.1
88 Version: D
6 Card
The following introduces the functions, working principles, panels, and signal flow of
various cards of the FONST 5000.
Card Overview
Tributary Interface Card
Cross-connect Card
Line Interface Card
Optical Transponder Card
Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
Optical Add / Drop Multiplexing Card
Optical Amplification Card
Optical Protection Card
Optical Supervisory Card
Channel Equilibrium Card
System Connection and Management Card
DCM
Version: D 89
6.1 Card Overview
The following introduces the structure and classification of the cards, the cards’
positioning in the system, and the association between the cards and the slots.
6.1.1 Card Structure
Components of the FONST 5000 cards are basically the same. Figure 6-1 shows
the major components and dimensions of the cards using the OTU2E card for an
example (unit: mm). See Table 6-1 for the dimensions of the cards.
90 Version: D
6 Card
(1) Latch (2) The SFP optical module (3) Card panel
on the client side
(4) The optical module on the (5) Circuit board (6) Connector
wavelength division side
(7) Indicator LED (8) Optical interface (9) Bar code label
(10) Laser level identifier (11) Card name
Figure 6-1 Card Appearance and Structure
Version: D 91
Table 6-1 Card Appearance and Dimensions
Quanti-
ty of
Panel Dimensions
Card Appearance Corresponding Card Slots
(H × W) (mm)
Occu-
pied
8TDGF, 8TDGS, 8TGX,

8TA1, 16TA, 2TA2, 4TA2,
8TA2, 10TA2, TA3, ETA3,
TA4, TGX, 8EF, 4TEA2,
8TEA2
LMS2E, 2LMS2E, LMS3E
(single-slot) Note 1, 2LA2,
4LA2, 8LA2, 4TEL2, 4LXA2
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2F,
OTU2S, 2OTU2S, 4OTU2S,
ODU8T
OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8,
1 368 × 30
WDM2
ITL50, OSCAD
BIDI, WOSAD, EOSAD,
BEOSC
OANote 2, PA, VGA
OCP, OMSP, OLP
OSC, EOSC, FOSC
OPM4 / OPM8
GFF, DGE
EMU, FCU, EFCU, EMVU,
EFCVU, FCVU, ASCU,
SCU, CTU, EAIF, AIF
92 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-1 Card Appearance and Dimensions (Continued)
Quanti-
ty of
Panel Dimensions
(H × W) (mm)
Occu-
pied
Note 1
LMS3E (double-slot) ,
LMS4E
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S
(coherent)
OTU4E, OTU4S
OMU40/48_O
OMU40/48_E
VMU40/48_O
VMU40/48_E
ODU40/48_O
ODU40/48_E 2 368 × 60
WSS8M, WSS8D
WSS4M, WSS4D
WSS8MR, WSS8DT,
WSS20T, WSS8T,
FWSS8M, FWSS20M,
FWSS8D, FWSS20D
SOAD8/4
OA Note 2, HOA, ROA, MSA
RAU_B, RAU_F
OTDR8
Version: D 93
Quanti-
ty of
Panel Dimensions
(H × W) (mm)
Occu-
pied
OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E

3 368 × 90
(coherent)
PWR 1 190 × 30
94 Version: D
6 Card
Quanti-
ty of
Panel Dimensions
(H × W) (mm)
Occu-
pied
PWRV 1 148 × 32
MXCU, SXCU 1 635 × 32
Version: D 95
Quanti-
ty of
Panel Dimensions
(H × W) (mm)
Occu-
pied
CAIF1, CAIF2 1 180 × 30
Note 1: The LMS3E cards can be classified as single-slot cards and double-slot cards.
Note 2: The OA card whose saturated output is equal to or lower than 21 dBm occupies one
slot. The OA card whose saturated output is higher than 21 dBm occupies two slots.
6.1.2 Card Classification
Based on the functions, the FONST 5000 cards are classified into electrical layer
cards, optical layer cards, and system connection and management cards. The
electrical layer cards and optical layer cards can also be further classified, as shown
in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Card Classification
Type Corresponding Card
8TDGS, 8TDGF, 8TGX, 8TA1, 16TA, 2TA2, 4TA2,

Electri- Tributary interface unit 8TA2, 10TA2, TA3, ETA3, TA4, TGX, 8EF, 4TEA2,
cal 8TEA2
layer Electrical cross-connect unit MXCU, SXCU
cards LMS2E, 2LMS2E, LMS3E, LMS4E, 2LA2, 4LA2,
Line interface unit
8LA2, 4TEL2, 4LXA2
96 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-2 Card Classification (Continued)
Type Corresponding Card
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S, 2OTU2S, 4OTU2S, OTU2F,

Optical transponder unit OTU3E, OTU3E (coherent), OTU3S, OTU3S
(coherent), OTU3F, OTU4E, OTU4S, OTU4F
Optical OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O, OMU40_E,

OMU series
multi- OMU2, OMU4, OMU8
plexing VMU series VMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O, VMU40_E
/
ODU48_O, ODU48_E, ODU40_O, ODU40_E,
demul- ODU series
ODU2, ODU4, ODU8
tiplex-
ing unit Others ITL50, OSCAD, WDM2, BIDI, WOSAD, EOSAD
Fixed optical add / drop

SOAD4, SOAD8
multiplexer unit
WSS8M, WSS8D, WSS4M, WSS4D, WSS20T,

Opti-
Dynamic optical add / drop WSS8T, FWSS8M, FWSS20M, FWSS8D,
cal
multiplexing unit FWSS20D
layer
cards WSS8MR, WSS8DT, ODU8T
Optical amplifier unit OA, PA, HOA, ROA, RAU_F, RAU_B, MSA, VGA
Optical protection unit OCP, OMSP, OLP_1:1, OLP_1+1
Optical power equalization

GFF, DGE
unit
Optical spectrum analysis unit OPM4, OPM8
Optical time domain reflection

OTDR8
unit
Optical supervisory channel
OSC, EOSC, BEOSC, FOSC
unit
System connection and management EMVU, EFCVU, FCVU, EMU, EFCU, FCU, ASCU,
unit SCU, AIF, EAIF, CAIF1, CAIF2, PWRV, PWR, CTU
6.1.3 Positioning of Cards in the System
The positions of the FONST 5000 common cards in the system are shown in
Figure 6-2.
Version: D 97
Figure 6-2 Positioning of the Common Cards in the System
6.1.4 Corresponding Relationships between Cards and

Slots
This section introduces the corresponding relationships between the cards and the
slots in the OTH and channel subracks.
Mappings between OTH Subrack Slots and Cards
Table 6-3 shows the corresponding relationships between OTH subrack slots and
cards.
Note:
In the following paragraphs the subrack slots without slot offset settings
are used for example.
98 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-3 Corresponding Relationship between OTH Subrack Slots and Cards
Suitable Slot
Card Name Suitable Slot (Rear) Remark
(Front)
8TDGF, 8TDGS, 8TGX, 8TA1, 8TS1, 8EF,

16TA, 2TA2, 4TA2, 8TA2, 10TA2, TA3,
ETA3, TA4, TGX, 4TEA2, 8TEA2, LMS2E,
2LMS2E, 2LA2, 4LA2, 8LA2, 4TEL2,
4LXA2, LMS3E (single-slot), MST2,
OTU2E, OTU2S, 2OTU2S, 4OTU2S
00 to 06 20 to 26
OMU2, OMU4, OMU8, ODU2, ODU4, 09 to 0F 29 to 2F
ODU8, ODU8T, WDM2, ITL50, OSCAD, Optional.
11 to 16 30 to 36
BIDI, WOSAD, EOSAD 19 to 1E 39 to 3F
OA (saturation output is 21 dBm or lower),
PA, VGA
GFF
OPM4, OPM8
OMSP, OCP
LMS3E (double-slot), LMS4E, OTU3E,
OTU3S, OTU3S (coherent), OTU4E,
OTU4S
OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O,
OMU40_E, VMU48_O, VMU48_E,
VMU40_O, VMU40_E, ODU48_O, 00 to 05 20 to 25
ODU48_E, ODU40_O, ODU40_E, 09 to 0E 29 to 2E Optional. Each card
WSS8M, WSS8D, WSS4M, WSS4D, 11 to 15 30 to 35 occupies two slots.
WSS8MR, WSS8DT, WSS20T, WSS8T, 19 to 1D 39 to 3E
FWSS8M, FWSS20M, FWSS8D,
FWSS20D, SOAD4, SOAD8
OA (saturation output is 21 dBm or above),
MSA, HOA, ROA, RAU_F, RAU_B
OTDR8
00 to 04 20 to 24
09 to 0D 29 to 2D Optional. Each card
OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E (coherent)
11 to 14 30 to 34 occupies three slots.
19 to 1C 39 to 3D
OSC, EOSC, BEOSC, FOSC - 3F Optional.
One EMVU card is

mandatory for one NE.
EMVU 10, 11 -
The two slots 10 and 11
back up each other.
Version: D 99
Table 6-3 Corresponding Relationship between OTH Subrack Slots and Cards (Continued)
Suitable Slot
(Front)
EFCVU 10, 11 - Mandatory for the

extended subrack. Select
either the EFCVU card or
the FCVU card according
to whether the DCC
FCVU 10 - function is supported. The
EFCVU card must be
selected when the
equipment is equipped
with the control plane.
Mandatory when the

control plane is equipped
with. This card is installed
ASCU 00, 01 - in the main subrack
where the EMVU card is
configured. Two slots can
back up each other.
Mandatory when the

equipment is equipped
with the control plane.
This card is installed in
SCU 00, 01 -
the extended subrack
where the EFCVU card is
configured. Two slots can
back up each other.
CTU 0F - Optional.
One is mandatory for the

PWRV F0, 18 37, 38 front and rear sides of the
subrack respectively.
CAIF1 17 - Mandatory.
CAIF2 1F - Mandatory.
100 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-3 Corresponding Relationship between OTH Subrack Slots and Cards (Continued)
Suitable Slot
(Front)
MXCU 07 27 Mandatory. The MXCU

card and the SXCU card
on the front side perform
the main cross-connect
card functions and the
SXCU 08 28 MXCU card and the
SXCU card on the rear
side perform the standby
cross-connect card
functions.
Mappings between Channel Subrack Slots and Cards
Table 6-4 lists the corresponding relationships between cards and channel subrack
slots.
Table 6-4 Mapping Relationships between Cards and Channel Subrack Slots
Suitable
Card Name Remark
Slot
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S, 2OTU2S, 4OTU2S 01 to 0E Optional.
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S (coherent), OTU4S,

01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
OTU4E
OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E (coherent) 01 to 0C Optional. Each card occupies three slots.
OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O, OMU40_E,

VMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O, VMU40_E, 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
ODU48_O, ODU48_E, ODU40_O, ODU40_E
WSS8M, WSS8D, WSS4M, WSS4D, WSS8MR,

WSS8DT, WSS20T, WSS8T, FWSS8M, 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
FWSS20M, FWSS8D, FWSS20D, SOAD8/4
ITL50, OSCAD, BIDI, WOSAD, EOSAD, OMU2 /
01 to 0E Optional.
4 / 8, ODU2 / 4 / 8, ODU8T, WDM2
OA (saturation output is 21 dBm or lower), PA,
01 to 0E Optional.
VGA
OA (saturation output is 21 dBm or above), MSA,
01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
HOA, RAU_F, RAU_B, ROA
OTDR8 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
OCP, OMSP 01 to 0E Optional.
Version: D 101
Table 6-4 Mapping Relationships between Cards and Channel Subrack Slots (Continued)
Suitable
Card Name Remark
Slot
GFF
OPM4, OPM8
OLP 06, 07 Optional.
OSC, EOSC, BEOSC, FOSC 02 Mandatory.
One EMU card is mandatory for one NE. The two

EMU 00, 01
slots 00 and 01 can back up each other.
FCU 00 Mandatory for the extended subrack. Select

either the EFCU card or the FCU card according
to whether the DCC function is supported. The
EFCU 00, 01 EFCU card must be selected when the
equipment is equipped with the control plane
unit.
Mandatory when the equipment is equipped with
the Control Plane unit. The ASCU card is used in
ASCU 04, 05
a main subrack installed with the EMU card.
Slots 10 and 11 back up each other.
Mandatory when the equipment is equipped with

the Control Plane unit. The SCU card is used in
SCU 04, 05
an extended subrack installed with the EFCU
card. Slots 10 and 11 back up each other.
PWR 0F Mandatory.
Mandatory for the main subrack (i.e., the subrack

AIF, EAIF 0E
configured with the EMU card).
6.2 Tributary Interface Card
The following introduces the functions, service access capability, application in the
system, panel description and specifications of each tributary interface card.
6.2.1 The 8TDGF Card
The 8TDGF card number is 2.170.798.
It is applicable for the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.
102 Version: D
6 Card
6.2.1.1 Function
The 8TDGF card receives eight optical signals (GE and 1GFC) from the client side
for the O/E conversion, aggregates into four electrical signals and sends to the
electrical cross-connect card for grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 8TDGF card performs the following functions:
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Supports the GE and 1GFC signals' PCS
error and packet statistic monitoring function.
u Laser shutdown: The laser at the optical interface can be turned on or off
flexibly through the network management system to facilitate testing and
maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the remote end loopback of signals at the optical interface
and the backplane side.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces use SFP (Small Form-Factor
Pluggable) optical modules, which are small, pluggable, and easy to operate
and maintain.
u Remote upgrade of card software function: Performs remote software upgrade

function of all cards via the EMS.
u Viewing information about optical interfaces: Information about the optical

interfaces can be obtained through the network management system, including
the module type, the application code, the transmission distance, the rate, the
wavelength window and the receiver type.
6.2.1.2 Access Service and Quantity
The 8TDGF card’s service type and quantity are shown in Table 6-5.
Version: D 103
Table 6-5 Access Service and Quantity of the 8TDGF Card
Card Interface Quantity Service Type Backplane Bandwidth
GE
1GFC
8TDGF 8 Hybrid 10G Note 1
transmission of the
aforesaid services
Note 1: The total rate of the services that the card accesses cannot exceed its backplane
bandwidth.
6.2.1.3 Application in the System
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and positioning of the
card in the system.
6.2.1.4 Panel
Figure 6-3 illustrates the 8TDGF card panel.
104 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-3 The 8TDGF Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the card panel are described in Table 6-6.
Version: D 105
Table 6-6 Description of the 8TDGF Card Panel
Blinking quickly indicates the normal operating status.

Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status;
ACT
LED generally, ON indicates poor communication between the
card and the network management system.
OFF indicates no alarm or all alarms are filtered.

Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or
major alarm).
UA/NUA Alarm indicator LED
Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
Solid orange indicates both urgent and non-urgent
alarms.
OUT is for transmitting
service signals to the client
OUT1 / IN1 The optical interface
The 1st to the 8th side equipment.
to OUT8 / connector: the LC-type
optical interfaces IN is for receiving service
IN8 connector.
signals from the client side
equipment.
6.2.1.5 Specifications of the 8TDGF Card
Interface Specification
Table 6-7 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGF Card
Item Unit Specification
Optical module type – 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-EX 1000BASE-ZX

Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 10 40 80
Operating wavelength
nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean launched

Transmitter dBm -3 0 5
power
at reference
Minimum mean launched
point S dBm -8 -5 0
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 9 9

Transmit signal eye pattern – Compliant with the IEEE802.3 mask
Receiver at
Minimum sensitivity (BER
reference dBm -20 -23 -23
≤ 10-12)
point R
106 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-7 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGF Card (Continued)
Minimum overload (BER ≤

dBm -3 -3 -3
10-12)
Mechanical Parameter
Table 6-8 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TDGF Card
Card Panel Dimensions (H × W) (mm)
8TDGF 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-9 Power Consumption of the 8TDGF Card
Card Maximum Power Consumption (W)
8TDGF 50
6.2.2 The 8TDGS Card
The 8TDGS card number is 2.170.903.
6.2.2.1 Function
The 8TDGS card receives eight STM-1 / 4 / 16, GE, or 1GFC / 2GFC optical signals
from the client side for O / E conversion, aggregates into electrical signals and
sends to the cross-connect card for grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The 8TDGS card performs the following functions:
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Monitors B1 and J0 overhead bytes of the

SDH as well as PCS bit error and packet statistics of the GE signals.
maintenance.
Version: D 107
u Loopback: Supports the remote loopback of signals at the client side optical
interface and the Port interface on the backplane side.
and maintain.
u Remote upgrade of card software function: Performs the remote software

upgrade function of all cards via the EMS.

See Table 6-10 for the 8TDGS card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-10 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8TDGS Card
Card Name Interface Quantity Service Type Backplane Bandwidth
STM-1 / 4 / 16
8TDGS 8 GE 10G Note 1
1GFC / 2GFC
Note 1: The total rates of the services that the card accesses cannot exceed its backplane
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.2.4 Panel
Figure 6-4 illustrates the 8TDGS card panel.
108 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-4 The 8TDGS Card Panel
Version: D 109
Table 6-11 Description of the 8TDGS Card Panel

Working ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status;
ACT
indicator LED generally, ON indicates poor communication between the

Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
Alarm indicator alarm).
UA/NUA
LED Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
alarms.
The 1st to the The optical interface
OUT1 / IN1 to side equipment.
8th optical connector: the LC-type
OUT8 / IN8 IN is for receiving service
interfaces connector.
equipment.
6.2.2.5 Specifications of the 8TDGS Card
Table 6-12 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G

Optical module type – multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP
optical module optical module optical module

nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Source type – SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB

Transmitter
Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1 1 1
at reference
Minimum side mode
point S dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio

dBm 0 3 3
power
110 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-12 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card (Continued)

dBm -5 -2 -2
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2

Transmit signal eye pattern – Compliant with the ITU-T G.957 mask
Receiver type – PIN APD

dBm -18 -27 -28
Receiver at ≤ 10-12)
reference Minimum overload (BER ≤
dBm 0 -9 -9
point R 10-12)
Maximum reflectance of
dB -27 -27 -27
receiver, measured at R
Table 6-13 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TDGS Card
8TDGS 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-14 Power Consumption of the 8TDGS Card
8TDGS 40
6.2.3 The 8TGX Card
The card number of the 8TGX card is 2.200.524.
The card is applicable for the FONST 5000.
Version: D 111
6.2.3.1 Function
The 8TGX card receives eight STM-1 / 4 / 16, GE, or FC100 / FC200 signals from
the client side for O / E conversion, aggregates into electrical signals and sends to
the cross-connect card for grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 8TGX card performs the following functions:
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Monitors B1 and J0 overhead bytes of the

SDH as well as PCS bit error and packet statistics of the GE signals.
maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the remote loopback of signals at the client side optical
interface and the Port interface on the backplane side.
and maintain.


The 8TGX card’s service type and the bandwidth are shown in Table 6-15.
Table 6-15 The 8TGX Card’s Service Type and Quantity
Backplane
Card Interface Quantity Service Type
Bandwidth
STM-1 / 4 / 16
8TGX 8 GE 10GNote 1
FC100 / FC200
bandwidth.
112 Version: D
6 Card
card in the system.
6.2.3.4 The Panel Description
Figure 6-5 illustrates the 8TGX card panel.
Version: D 113
Figure 6-5 The 8TGX Card Panel
114 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-16 The 8TGX Card Panel
Blinking quickly indicates the normal working status;

Working status ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status;
ACT
indicator LED generally, ON indicates the poor communication between
the card and the network management system.
OFF indicates no alarm or all alarms are filtered on the

card.
Alarm indicator Red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
UA / NUA
LED alarm).
Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
Orange indicates both urgent and non-urgent alarms.
The optical
The 1st optical OUT is for transmitting service
interface
OUT1 / IN1 to interface to the signals to client side devices.
connector: the
OUT8 / IN8 8th optical IN is for receiving service signals
LC-type
interface from client side devices.
connector.
6.2.3.5 Specification of the 8TGX Card
Table 6-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G

Optical module type - multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP multi-rate SFP
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ

nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Source type - SLM / DFB SLM / DFB SLM / DFB

Maximum -20 dB width nm 1 1 1
Transmitter
Minimum side mode
at reference dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio
point S
dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power
Version: D 115
Table 6-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card (Continued)

Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T G.957 mask compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤
dBm -18 -27 -28
Receiver at 10-12)
dBm 0 -9 -9
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
Table 6-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TGX Card
8TGX 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-19 Power Consumption of the 8TGX Card
8TGX 40
6.2.4 The 8TA1 Card
The 8TA1 card number is 2.170.799.
6.2.4.1 Function
The 8TA1 card receives eight optical signals (STM-16 / OTU1) from the client side,
performs the O / E conversion, and then sends them to the cross-connect card for
cross-connect. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 8TA1 card performs the following functions:
116 Version: D
6 Card
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Monitors SDH B1 and J0 bytes; Monitors

OTN performance and alarms.
maintenance.
and maintain.


The 8TA1 card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity, is
shown in Table 6-20.
Table 6-20 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8TA1 Card
STM-16
OTU1
8TA1 8 Hybrid transmission 20GNote 1
of the aforesaid
services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
Version: D 117
6.2.4.4 Panel
Figure 6-6 illustrates the 8TA1 card panel.
Figure 6-6 The 8TA1 Card Panel
118 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-21 Description of the 8TA1 Card Panel
Blinking quickly indicates the normal operating

status.
Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating
ACT
LED status; generally, ON indicates poor
communication between the card and the
network management system.
OFF indicates no alarm or all alarms are

filtered.
Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical
alarm or major alarm).
Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm
(minor alarm).
Solid orange indicates both urgent and non-
urgent alarms.
OUT is for
transmitting service
signals to the client
The optical interface
OUT1 / IN1 to OUT8 / The 1st to the 8th side equipment.
connector: the LC-
IN8 optical interfaces IN is for receiving
type connector.
service signals from
the client side
equipment.
6.2.4.5 Specifications of the 8TA1 Card
Table 6-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G


Transmitter Operating wavelength

nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
at reference range
point S Source type – SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB
Version: D 119
Table 6-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card (Continued)

Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio

dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power


dBm -18 -27 -28
dBm 0 -9 -9
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
Table 6-23 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TA1 Card
8TA1 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-24 Power Consumption of the 8TA1 Card
8TA1 30
6.2.5 The 16TA Card
The 16TA card number is 2.200.864.
120 Version: D
6 Card
6.2.5.1 Function
The 16TA card receives 16 optical signals (OTU1 / GE / FE / 1GFC / 2GFC /4GFC /
STM-1 / STM-4 / STM-16) from the client side for O / E conversion, and aggregates
the signals into two ODU2 electrical signals or eight OTU1 electrical signals. The
card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 16TA card performs the following functions:
u Supports hybrid transmission of 16 services with total rate not exceeding the
bandwidth of the backplane (20 G).
u Performance and alarm monitoring:
4 Monitors SDH B1 and J0 overheads.
4 Monitors OTN performance and alarms. Supports the PM function of the

ODU2 signals and the SM / PM function of the OTU1 signals.
maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the loopback of signals at the optical interface and the
backplane side.
and maintain.
u The optical interface performs the following test functions: optical power test,
temperature test, laser bias current test, etc.


Version: D 121
The 16TA card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity, is
Table 6-25 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 16TA Card
OTU1
GE
FE
1GFC / 2GFC / 4GFC
16TA 16 20G Note 1
STM-1 / 4 / 16
The hybrid
transmission of
previous services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.5.4 Panel
Figure 6-7 illustrates the 16TA card panel.
122 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-7 The 16TA Card Panel
Version: D 123
Table 6-26 Description of the 16TA Card Panel

Working ON or OFF indicates abnormal working status; generally,
ACT
indicator LED ON indicates poor communication between the card and
the network management system.

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
Solid orange indicates both urgent and non-urgent alarms.

equipment.
6.2.5.5 Specifications of the 16TA Card
Table 6-27 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G


nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range

Transmitter
Minimum side mode
at reference dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio
point S
dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power
124 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-27 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card (Continued)


dBm -18 -27 -28
dBm 0 -9 -9
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
Table 6-28 4GFC Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card
Target distance km 10
Operating wavelength range nm 1260 to 1335
Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression
dB 30
ratio
Transmit-
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
ter at
Minimum mean launched power dBm -5
reference
point S Extinction ratio dB 8.5 to 15
Compliant with the ITU-T G.
Transmit signal eye pattern –
957 mask
Accuracy of receiving power
dB ±2.0
indication
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -19
Receiver Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0
at Maximum reflectance of receiver,
reference dB -27
measured at R
point R
Accuracy of transmitting power
dB ±1.5
indication
Table 6-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 16TA Card
16TA 368 × 30
Version: D 125
Power Consumption
Table 6-30 Power Consumption of the 16TA Card
16TA 69
6.2.6 The 2TA2 Card
The 2TA2 card number is 2.170.888.
6.2.6.1 Function
The 2TA2 card receives two optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE
WAN / 8GFC / 10GFC / OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f from the client side; after the O/E
conversion, it maps the signals into electrical signals using the mapping mode
defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709, and finally sends them to the cross-connect card via
the backplane for cross-connect grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u Hybrid transmission for services: Supports two channels of hybrid service

transmission.
4 Supports the SDH B1 and J0 overhead monitoring.
4 Supports the OTN performance and alarm monitoring.
flexibly through the EMS to facilitate testing, operation and maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the local / remote loopback of signals at the client side
optical interface and the Port interface on the backplane side.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces use XFP (10 Gigabit Small
Form-Factor Pluggable) optical modules, which are small, pluggable, and easy
to operate and maintain.
126 Version: D
6 Card

u Querying information about optical interfaces: Information about the optical

interfaces can be obtained via the network management system, including the
module type, the application code, the transmission distance, the rate, the
See Table 6-31 for the 2TA2 card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-31 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2TA2 Card
Client Side Interface Backplane

Card Name Service Type
Quantity Bandwidth
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
2TA2 2 20G Note 1
OTU2f
10GFC
8GFC
The hybrid transmission
of previous services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.6.4 Panel
Version: D 127
128 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-32 Description of the 2TA2 Card Panel

Working ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status;
ACT

card.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
alarms.
OUT is for transmitting service The optical
The 1st and the
OUT1 / IN1 to signals to the client side equipment. interface
2nd optical
OUT2 / IN2 IN is for receiving service signals connector: the LC-
interfaces
from the client side equipment. type connector.
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Optical module type –
(multiple rates) (multiple rates) (multiple rates)
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range
Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1.0 0.4 0.4

Minimum side mode
dB 30 – –
Transmitter suppression ratio
at reference Maximum mean launched
dBm -1 2 4
point S power

dBm -6 -1 0
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5 8.2 9

Version: D 129

dBm -14 -17 -24
Receiver at 10-12)
dBm 0 0 -7
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
2TA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
2TA2 44
6.2.7 The 4TA2 Card
The card number of the 4TA2 card is 2.170.877.
It is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
6.2.7.1 Function
The 4TA2 card receives four optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE
WAN / OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f / 10GFC /8 GFC from the client side; after the O/E
defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709, and finally sends them to the cross-connect card for
cross-connect grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
130 Version: D
6 Card
u Hybrid transmission for services: Supports four channels of hybrid service

transmission.
4 Monitors OTN performance and alarms.
u Loopback: Supports the local and remote end loopback of signals at the optical
interface and the backplane side.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces use XFP (10 Gigabit Small
Form-Factor Pluggable) optical modules, which are small, pluggable, and easy
to operate and maintain.


Version: D 131
Table 6-36 The 4TA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Backplane
Card Name Interface Quantity Service Type
Bandwidth
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
4TA2 4 40G
OTU2f
10GFC
8GFC
The hybrid transmission
of previous services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.7.4 Panel
132 Version: D
6 Card
Version: D 133
Table 6-37 Descriptions of the 4TA2 Card Panel

status.
ACT
LED generally, ON indicates poor communication
between the card and the network management
system.

Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm
or major alarm).
UA/NUA Alarm indicator LED Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor
alarm).
urgent alarms.

service signals to the
client side equipment. The optical interface
OUT1 / IN1 to The 1st to 4th optical
IN is for receiving connector: the LC-type
OUT4 / IN4 interfaces
service signals from connector.
the client side
equipment.

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range
Transmitter Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1.0 0.4 0.4

at reference Minimum side mode
dB 30 – –
point S suppression ratio

dBm -1 2 4
power
134 Version: D
6 Card

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
dBm 0 0 -7
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
4TA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
4TA2 50
6.2.8 The 4TEA2 Card
The card number of the 4TEA2 card is 2.107.982.
The 4TEA2 card is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
Version: D 135
6.2.8.1 Function
The 4TEA2 card receives four optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE
WAN / OTU2 / OTU2e / 8GFC from the client side; after the O/E conversion, it maps
the signals into electrical signals using the mapping mode defined in ITU-T Rec.
G.709, and finally sends them to the cross-connect card for cross-connect grooming.
The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 4TEA2 card performs the following functions:
u Hybrid transmission for services: Supports four channels of hybrid service

transmission.
u Loopback: Supports the local and remote loopback of signals at the client side
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces use XFP optical modules,
which are small, pluggable, and easy to operate and maintain.
u Remote upgrade of card software: The card software can be upgraded

remotely through the EMS.

The 4TEA2 card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
is shown in Table 6-41.
136 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-41 The 4TEA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Client Side Interface Client Side Signal Backplane

Card Name
Quantity Type Bandwidth
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
OTU2
4TEA2 4 40G
OTU2e
8GFC
Hybrid transmission of
the aforesaid services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.8.4 Panel
Figure 6-10 illustrates the 4TEA2 card panel.
Version: D 137
Figure 6-10 The 4TEA2 Card Panel
138 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-42 Descriptions of the 4TEA2 Card Panel

status.
ACT
system.

or major alarm).
alarm).
urgent alarms.

client side equipment. The optical interface
OUT1 / IN1 to The 1st to 4th optical
IN is for receiving connector: the LC-type
OUT4 / IN4 interfaces
service signals from connector.
the client side
equipment.
6.2.8.5 Specifications of the 4TEA2 Card
Table 6-43 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEA2 Card

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range

dB 30 – –

dBm -1 2 4
power
Version: D 139
Table 6-43 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEA2 Card (Continued)

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
10-12)
Receiver at
reference dBm 0 0 -7
10-12)
point R
receiver, measured at dB -27 -27 -27
reference point R
Table 6-44 Mechanical Parameters of the 4TEA2 Card
4TEA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-45 Power Consumption of the 4TEA2 Card
4TEA2 55.83
6.2.9 The 8TEA2 Card
The card number of the 8TEA2 card is 2.170.983.
The 8TEA2 card is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
140 Version: D
6 Card
6.2.9.1 Function
The card receives eight optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN /
OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f / 10GFC / 8GFC from the client side; after the O / E
conversion, maps the signals into electrical signals using the ITU-T Rec. G.709
standard mapping mode, and finally transmits them to the electrical cross-connect
card via the backplane for cross-connect grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The 8TEA2 card performs the following functions and features:
u Hybrid transmission for services: supports eight channels of hybrid service

transmission.
u Performance collection and alarm monitoring:
4 Monitors OTN performance data and alarms.
maintenance.
u Loopback: supports the near end or remote loopback of signals at the client
side optical interface and at the backplane side.
u Remote upgrade of card software: performs remote software upgrade function

of the card via the network management system.

The 8TEA2 card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
Version: D 141
Table 6-46 The 8TEA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity

Card Name Client Side Signal Type
Quantity Bandwidth
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
8TEA2 8 80G
OTU2f
10GFC
8GFC
Hybrid transmission of the
aforesaid services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.9.4 Panel
Figure 6-11 illustrates the 8TEA2 card panel.
142 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-11 The 8TEA2 Card Panel
Version: D 143
Table 6-47 Descriptions of the 8TEA2 Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
alarms.
The 1st optical OUT is for transmitting service The optical
OUT1 / IN1 to interface to the signals to the client side equipment. interface
OUT8 / IN8 8th optical IN is for receiving service signals connector: the LC-
interface from the client side equipment. type connector.
6.2.9.5 Specifications of the 8TEA2 Card
Table 6-48 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TEA2 Card

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range

Minimum side mode
dB 30 – –

dBm -1 2 4
point S power

dBm -6 -1 0
power

144 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-48 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TEA2 Card (Continued)

dBm -14 -17 -24
≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-49 Mechanical Parameters of the 8TEA2 Card
8TEA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-50 Power Consumption of the 8TEA2 Card
8TEA2 81
6.2.10 The 8TA2 Card
6.2.10.1 Function
The 8TA2 card receives eight optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE
WAN / OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f / 10GFC /8 GFC from the client side; after the O/E
Version: D 145
u Hybrid transmission for services: Supports eight channels of hybrid service

transmission.


146 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-51 The 8TA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
8TA2 8 OTU2f 80G
10GFC
8GFC
The hybrid
transmission of
previous services
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.10.4 Panel
Version: D 147
148 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-52 Descriptions of the 8TA2 Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
equipment.

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range

Minimum side mode
dB 30 – –

dBm -1 2 4
point S power

dBm -6 -1 0
power

Version: D 149

dBm -14 -17 -24
Receiver at 10-12)
dBm 0 0 -7
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
8TA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
8TA2 81
6.2.11 The 10TA2 Card
6.2.11.1 Function
The 10TA2 card receives 10 optical signals such as STM-64 / 10GE LAN / WAN /
OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f / FC1000 / FC800 from the client side; after the O/E
150 Version: D
6 Card
u Hybrid transmission for services: Supports 10 channels of hybrid service

transmission.


The 10TA2 card’s access service type and quantity are shown in Table 6-56.
Table 6-56 The 10TA2 Card’s Service Type and Quantity
STM-64
10GE LAN / WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
10TA2 10 OTU2f 100GNote 1
FC1000
FC800
Hybrid transmission of the
aforesaid services
bandwidth.
Version: D 151
card in the system.
152 Version: D
6 Card
Version: D 153
Table 6-57 The 10TA2 Card Panel

Working status ON or OFF indicates the abnormal working status;
ACT

Red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED

The 1st optical service signals to client
OUT1 / IN1 to interface to the side devices.
connector: the LC-type
OUT10 / IN10 10th optical IN is for receiving service
connector.
interface signals from client side
devices.

Optical module type -
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4

Minimum side mode
dB 30 - -

dBm -1 2 4
point S power

dBm -6 -1 0
power

Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T G.691 mask compliant
154 Version: D
6 Card
Receiver type - PIN APD

dBm -14 -17 -24
Receiver at 10-12)
dBm 0 0 -7
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
10TA2 368×30
Power Consumption
10TA2 92
6.2.12 The TA3 Card
The card number of the TA3 card is 2.170.897.
6.2.12.1 Function
The TA3 card receives one optical signal such as STM-256 / OTU3 / OTU3e1 from
the client side; after the O/E conversion, it maps the signal into the electrical signal
using the mapping mode defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709, and finally sends it to the
cross-connect card for cross-connect grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The TA3 card performs the following functions:
Version: D 155


See Table 6-61 for the TA3 card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-61 The TA3 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Backplane
Card Name Interface Quantity Service Type
Bandwidth
STM-256
TA3 1 OTU3 40G
OTU3e1
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.12.4 Panel
Figure 6-14 illustrates the TA3 card panel.
156 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-14 The TA3 Card Panel
See Table 6-62 for the TA3 card’s access service type and quantity.
Version: D 157
Table 6-62 Descriptions of the TA3 Card Panel

status.
ACT
system.

major alarm).
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor
LED
alarm).
alarms.
client side equipment.
OUT / IN Optical interface connector: the LC-type
IN is for receiving service
connector.
signals from the client
side equipment.
6.2.12.5 Specifications of the TA3 Card
Table 6-63 Optical Interface Specifications of the TA3 Card
Application code – VRZ2000-3R2

Optical line code – NRZ
Transmit- Minimum side mode suppression

dB 35
ter at ratio
reference Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
point S Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
158 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-63 Optical Interface Specifications of the TA3 Card (Continued)

Receiver -12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 3
at
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
reference
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at R
Table 6-64 Mechanical Parameters of the TA3 Card
TA3 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-65 Power Consumption of the TA3 Card
TA3 40
6.2.13 The ETA3 Card
The card number of the ETA3 card is 2.200.532.
6.2.13.1 Function
The ETA3 card receives one optical signal such as STM-256 / OTU3 / 40GE /
OTU3e1 from the client side; after the O/E conversion, it maps the signal into one
electrical signal using the mapping mode defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709, and finally
sends it to the cross-connect card through the backplane for cross-connect
grooming. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The ETA3 card performs the following functions:
Version: D 159
4 Supports the performance monitoring of data services.
u Error correction coding: Supports both FEC and super FEC encoding and
decoding schemes.
u Loopback: Supports the local and remote loopback of signals at the client side


See Table 6-66 for the ETA3 card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-66 The ETA3 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity

Quantity Bandwidth
STM-256
OTU3
ETA3 1 40G
OTU3e1
40 GE
bandwidth.
card in the system.
160 Version: D
6 Card
6.2.13.4 Panel
Figure 6-15 illustrates the ETA3 card panel.
Figure 6-15 The ETA3 Card Panel
Version: D 161
Table 6-67 Description of the ETA3 Card Panel

status.
Working indicator ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status;
ACT
LED generally, ON indicates the poor communication
system.
OFF indicates no alarm or all alarms are filtered on

the card.
Alarm indicator major alarm).
UA/NUA
LED Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor
alarm).
alarms.
OUT is for transmitting service
signals to the client side
The optical
equipment.
OUT / IN Optical interface interface type:
40GBASE-LR4
equipment.
6.2.13.5 Specifications of the ETA3 Card
Table 6-68 Optical Interface Specifications of the ETA3 Card
Optical module type – CS41-2D1

Target distance km 10
Operating LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5

wave- LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5
length LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5
range LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5
162 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-68 Optical Interface Specifications of the ETA3 Card (Continued)
Source type – SMF

dB 30
ratio
Transmit- Maximum mean launched power
dBm 2.3
ter at (each lane)
reference Minimum mean launched power
point S dBm -7
(each lane)

959.1 mask
-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -11.5
Receiver
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3
at
Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
reference
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -26
measured at R
Table 6-69 Mechanical Parameters of the ETA3 Card
ETA3 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-70 Power Consumption of the ETA3 Card
ETA3 35
6.2.14 The TA4 Card
The card number of the TA4 card is 2.200.450.
Version: D 163
6.2.14.1 Function
The TA4 card receives one optical signal such as 100GE / OTU4 from the client
side; after the O/E conversion, it maps the signal into the electrical signal using the
mapping mode defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709, and finally sends it to the cross-
connect card through the backplane for cross-connect grooming. The card also
fulfills the reverse process.
The TA4 card performs the following functions:
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Monitors OTN performance and alarms.

remotely through the network management system.

The TA4 card’s service type and the quantity are shown in Table 6-71.
Table 6-71 The TA4 Card’s Service Type and Quantity
Backplane
Card Interface Quantity Service Type
Bandwidth
100GE
TA4 1 100GNote 1
OTU4
bandwidth.
164 Version: D
6 Card
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application of the TA4 card in the
system.
The TA4 card panel is shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 The TA4 Card Panel
Version: D 165
Table 6-72 The TA4 Card Panel

ACT
indicator LED generally, ON indicates poor communication between

Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED

service signals to client
side devices.
OUT / IN Optical interface connector: the LC-type
connector.
signals from client side
devices.
6.2.14.5 Specification of the TA4 Card
Table 6-73 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the TA4 Card
100GBASE-
Optical interface type – 100GBASE-LR4 4I1-9D1F
ER4
Single-channel signal rate Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339
Multiplexed signal rate Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736
λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59
Transmitter central λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09
nm
Transmitter wavelength range λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63
at reference λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19
point S Single-channel mean
-2.7 to
launched power dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -2.5 to +2.9 -0.6 to +4.5
+2.9
(OMA)
166 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-73 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the TA4 Card (Continued)
Single-channel eye
–
pattern
X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3
0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4
Single-channel eye
dB ≥4 ≥8 ≥4
pattern extinction ratio
Single-channel
Receiver at receiver minimum dBm ≤-8.6(OMA) ≤-21.4(OMA) ≤ -10.5
reference sensitivity
point R Single-channel
dBm 4.5 4.5 4.5
minimum overload
Table 6-74 Mechanical Parameters of the TA4 Card
Card Panel Dimensions (H ×W) (mm)
TA4 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-75 Power Consumption of the TA4 Card
TA4 119
6.2.15 The TGX Card
The TGX card number is 2.170.889.
Version: D 167
6.2.15.1 Function
The TGX card performs the O / E conversion of eight GE optical signals from the
client side, then aggregates them into 1/2 electrical signal after the Layer 2
switching, and transmits the signal to the cross-connect card for grooming. The card
also fulfills the reverse process.
The TGX card performs the following functions:
u Layer 2 switching function
4 Supports ACL-based permission controls to classify the ingress service

flow; supports traffic management based on the port and packet label and
other characteristic information.
4 Supports the VLAN / MPLS label imposition, swapping and disposition.
4 Supports the MPLS VPWS and VPLS; supports 256 VPWSs and eight
VPLSs. One VPWS supports 10 service flows and one VPLS supports up
to eight LAN port member groups and 64 ELAN port member groups.
4 Supports the static unicast and static multicast functions.
u Supports the GE ADM function.
u OAM function: Realizes the OAM functions on the TMS / TMP / TMC layer;
detects the network connection status among any NE nodes, any channels,
any service flows; supports the ITU-T Rec. G.8114; supports the generation
and termination of the CV message, LB message, TST message, CSF
message and LCK message in the TMP/TMC layer; generates the
corresponding alarm, for example, the AIS alarm will be generated for
terminating the FDI message.
u Laser shutdown: The laser at the GE optical interface can be turned on or off
u Loopback: Supports the loopback of GE optical signals and the Ethernet link.
and maintain.
168 Version: D
6 Card

See Table 6-76 for the TGX card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-76 Access Service Type and Quantity of the TGX Card
TGX 8 GE 20G Note 1

bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.2.15.4 Panel
Figure 6-17 illustrates the TGX card panel.
Version: D 169
Figure 6-17 The TGX Card Panel
170 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-77 Description of the TGX Card Panel

Working ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally,
ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED

equipment.
6.2.15.5 Specifications of the TGX Card
Table 6-78 Optical Interface Specifications of the TGX Card

nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range

power
at reference
point S dBm -8 -5 0
power

Receiver at
reference dBm -20 -23 -23
10-12)
point R
Version: D 171
Table 6-78 Optical Interface Specifications of the TGX Card (Continued)

dBm -3 -3 -3
10-12)
Table 6-79 Mechanical Parameters of the TGX Card
TGX 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-80 Power Consumption of the TGX Card
TGX 50
6.2.16 The 8EF Card
The 8EF card number is 2.200.365.
6.2.16.1 Function
The 8EF card receives eight 1GFC / 2GFC optical signals from the client side for O/
E conversion, sends the electrical signals into the FC-BB-3-GFPT protocol
processing module in the card, performs the E/O conversion for the processed
signals, and finally outputs the optical signals in the 1GFC / 2GFC mode. The card
also fulfills the reverse process. The 8EF card solves problem in distance extension
of FC services, and prevents the data bandwidth from reducing in the long-haul
transmission of FC services.
The 8EF card performs the following functions:
172 Version: D
6 Card
u FC service long-haul transmission function: The card protects the data

bandwidth from decreasing in the long-haul FC service transmission by
participating the BB (buffer-to-buffer) flow control.
4 At the 1GFC rate, the transmission distance of a single port can be

extended to 3000 km and the bandwidth utilization rate is higher than 80%.
4 At the 2GFC rate, the transmission distance of a single port can be

extended to 1500 km and the bandwidth utilization rate is higher than 80%.
u FC service statistics: The card supports statistics for the Rx / Tx bytes of the FC
service, Rx / Tx packet count and the errored packet count.
and maintain.
u Remote upgrade of card software: Performs remote software upgrade function

The 8EF card’s access service type and quality are shown in Table 6-81.
Table 6-81 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 8EF Card
Client Side Interface Service Side Interface

Quantity Quantity
8EF 8 1GFC / 2GFC 8
Note:
At the service side, the 8EF card must be used together with the service
interface card that supports 1GFC / 2GFC in the system. The 8EF card
alone cannot perform the OTU function in the WDM system.
Figure 6-18 shows the application and position in the system of the 8EF card (FC
Service Distance Extension Card) .
Version: D 173
Figure 6-18 Application and Positioning of the 8EF Card in the System
Note:
Due to the restrictions of the FC service buffer-to-buffer flow control

protocol, when the FC signals are transmitted to a certain distance, the
effective throughput of data will decrease rapidly. Therefore, the FC
distance extension is necessary.
6.2.16.4 Panel Description
Figure 6-19 illustrates the 8EF card panel.
174 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-19 The 8EF Card Panel
Version: D 175
Table 6-82 Description of the 8EF Card Panel

ACT
indicator LED ON indicates poor communication between the card and the

Alarm indicator Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
UA/NUA

The 1st to the service signals to the client
OUT1/IN1
8th client side side equipment.
to
optical IN is for receiving service
OUT8/IN8
interfaces signals from the client side
equipment.
TX is for transmitting service
connector.
The 1st to the signals to the tributary
TX1/RX1 to 8th service side interface card.
TX8/RX8 optical RX is for receiving service
interfaces signals from the tributary
interface card.
6.2.16.5 Specifications of the 8EF card
Table 6-83 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G


Transmitter nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
at reference
point S
176 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-83 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card (Continued)
Minimum side mode

dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio

dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power


dBm -18 -27 -28
dBm 0 -9 -9
point R 10-12)
dB -27 -27 -27
Table 6-84 Mechanical Parameters of the 8EF Card
8EF 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-85 Power Consumption of the 8EF Card
8EF 50
6.3 Cross-connect Card
The following introduces the functions, application in the system, panel description
and card specifications of the cross-connect card.
The MXCU card number is 2.200.446. The SXCU card number is 2.200.459.
Version: D 177
6.3.1 Function
The cross-connect card of the OTH subrack (3030066) consists of the MXCU card
(master cross-connect card) and the SXCU card (slave cross-connect card). The
MXCU card and SXCU card on the front side of the subrack make up the active
cross-connect card; while the MXCU card and SXCU card on the rear side of the
subrack make up the standby cross-connect card. See Figure 6-20 for the
application of the cross-connect card.
Figure 6-20 The Active / Standby Cross-connect Card on the OTH Subrack
The MXCU / SXCU card has the following functions:
u Implements cross-connect of 6.48T services.
u Implements the cross-connect between aggregate cards, between aggregate

card and tributary card, and between tributary cards.
u Handles the alarms and APS bytes from each aggregate card to perform the
protection function.
178 Version: D
6 Card
u Supports 1+1 protection—performs switching of active and standby cross-

connect cards automatically or via the network management system.
u Supports the 1+1, 1:1 and m:n protection, and supports the protection with
shared path.
u Provides high reliability and stability. Monitors the working status of the local
card and the mate card, so that the active and standby cross-connect cards can
be switched automatically in case of fault.
6.3.2 Application in the System
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application of the TA4 card in the
system.
6.3.3 The Panel Description
See Table 6-86 for the MXCU / SXCU card panel.
Version: D 179
Table 6-86 The Cross-connect Card Panel
The MXCU card The SXCU card
180 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-87 describes the MXCU / SXCU card panel.
Table 6-87 Description for the MXCU / SXCU Card Panel
Blinking quickly indicates normal working status;

Blinking slowly indicates standby status;
Working status
ACT ON or OFF indicates that the card is operating
indicator LED
abnormally; ON usually indicates a communication
interruption between the card and the OTNM2000.

Red indicates an urgent alarm or a major alarm (critical
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm and major alarm).
LED
Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (or a minor alarm).
Blinking indicates that a command of switching the active

Control and standby cards has been delivered to the card.
CTRL command ON indicates that a command of electrical layer switching
indicator LED has been delivered to the card. The LED will remain ON
until the command is cleared.
Valid only for the activated cross-connect card (the card
Card activation in active status): when the standby card is normal,
SW
button pressing the active card’s SW button would deactivate
the active card.
6.3.4 Specifications of the MXCU / SXCU Cards
Table 6-88 Mechanical Parameters of the MXCU / SXCU Cards
MXCU 635×32
SXCU 635×32
Power Consumption
Table 6-89 Power Consumption of the MXCU / SXCU Cards
MXCU 120
SXCU 120
Version: D 181
6.4 Line Interface Card
The following introduces the functions, service access capabilities, application in the
system, panels and specifications of the line interface cards.
6.4.1 The LMS2E Card
The LMS2E card has two types according to different optical modules on the line
side. The number of the LMS2E card is 2.170.801 / 2.170.832.
Card Name Card Number

LMS2E (non-tunable wavelength) 2.170.801
LMS2E (tunable wavelength) 2.170.832
6.4.1.1 Function
The LMS2E card receives electrical signals from the cross-connect card,
aggregates the signals and outputs one OTU2 signal of DWDM standard compliant
wavelength to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card
for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The LMS2E card has the following functions and features:
u OTN functions:
4 Uses ITU-T Rec. G.709 compliant frame format and overhead processing;
provides the standard OTN interface at the WDM side, which also
complies with WDM related standards.
4 Users can implement the OTN overhead configuration through the network
management system. Supports the PM, SM, and TCMi configuration
functions on the OTU2 layer.
u Wavelength tunability: Optional, provided as required by the users. The card

uses the optical module with tunable wavelength to adjust the optical signal’s
wavelengths on the WDM side in the range of the 192 wavelengths in Band C.
182 Version: D
6 Card
u ESC function: Supports the ESC function and can multiplex the supervisory
signals into the service channels for transmission.
decoding schemes.
flexibly through the network management system to facilitate testing, operation
and maintenance.


the wavelength, receiver type and modulation mode.
See Table 6-90 for the LMS2E card’s service type and quantity.
Table 6-90 The LMS2E Card’s Service Type and Quantity
WDM Side Optical WDM Side Optical Signal

Card Backplane Bandwidth
Interface Quantity Type
LMS2E 10G Note 1 1 OTU2

bandwidth.
card in the system.
Version: D 183
6.4.1.4 Panel
The LMS2E card panel is shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 The LMS2E Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the LMS2E card panel are described in
Table 6-91.
184 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-91 Description of the LMS2E Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
TX is for transmitting the optical signals with
specified wavelengths, generally connected
with interfaces 01 to 48 on the OMU and the
The optical
VMU series of cards, or with interfaces A1
interface
to A8 on the optical add / drop multiplexing
WDM side connector:
TX / RX card.
optical interface the LC-
RX is for receiving the optical signals with
type
connector.
with interfaces 01 to 48 on the ODU series
of cards, or with interfaces D1 to D8 on the
optical add / drop multiplexing card.
6.4.1.5 Specifications of the LMS2E Card
Table 6-92 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS2E Card
Source type and modulation format – DFB/MZ

Maximum width at -20 dB nm 0.3
Transmit- Minimum side mode suppression

dB 35
ter at ratio
reference Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
point S Minimum mean launched power dBm -2
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10
Version: D 185
Table 6-92 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS2E Card (Continued)

691 mask
-12
Receiver Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -17 (PIN)
at Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)
reference Maximum reflectance of receiver,
point R dB -27
measured at R
Table 6-93 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS2E Card
LMS2E 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-94 Power Consumption of the LMS2E Card
LMS2E 32
6.4.2 The 2LMS2E Card
The 2LMS2E card number is 2.200.088.
6.4.2.1 Function
The 2LMS2E card receives electrical signals from the electrical cross-connect card,
aggregates the signals and outputs two OTU2 / OTU2e signals of DWDM standard
compliant wavelength to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop
multiplexing card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 2LMS2E card has the following functions and features:
u OTN functions:
186 Version: D
6 Card
functions at the ODU2 / OTU2 layer.

wavelengths on the WDM side in the C-band.
decoding schemes.
and maintenance.


See Table 6-95 for the 2LMS2E card’s access service type and quantity.
Version: D 187
Table 6-95 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2LMS2E Card
Backplane WDM Side Interface WDM Side Optical Signal

Card Name
Bandwidth Quantity Type
OTU2
2LMS2E 20G Note 1 2
OTU2e
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.2.4 Panel
The 2LMS2E card panel is shown in Figure 6-22.
188 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-22 The 2LMS2E Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the 2LMS2E card panel are described in
Table 6-96.
Version: D 189
Table 6-96 Description of the 2LMS2E Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
TX is for transmitting the
optical signals with
specified wavelengths,
generally connected with
interfaces 01 to 48 on the
OMU and the VMU series
of cards, or with interfaces
The 1st and the
A1 to A8 on the optical add
2nd optical The optical interface
TX1 / RX1 / drop multiplexing card.
interfaces on connector: the LC-type
TX2 / RX2 RX is for receiving the
the wavelength connector.
optical signals with
division side
specified wavelengths,
generally connected with
interfaces 01 to 48 on the
ODU series of cards, or
with interfaces D1 to D8 on
the optical add / drop
multiplexing card.
6.4.2.5 Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card
Table 6-97 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card

190 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-97 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card (Continued)

dB 35
Transmit- ratio
ter at Maximum mean launched power dBm 3

reference Minimum mean launched power dBm -2
point S
691 mask
-12
point R dB -27
measured at R
Table 6-98 Mechanical Parameters of the 2LMS2E Card
2LMS2E 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-99 Power Consumption of the 2LMS2E Card
2LMS2E 50
6.4.3 The 4LXA2 Card
The card number of the 4LXA2 card is 2.200.772.
The 4LXA2 card is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
Version: D 191
6.4.3.1 Function
The card receives eight electrical signals from the electrical cross-connect card,
aggregates or converts the signals and outputs four OTU2e signals of DWDM
standard compliant wavelength to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add /
drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
The 4LXA2 card performs the following functions:
u Aggregates eight 10GE LAN services to one 10GE LAN service at the
backplane side and maps to the OTU2e synchronously.
u OTN functions:
management system.
u Layer 2 switching:
4 Supports the Ethernet data service switching function.
4 Supports the traffic management based on the port and packet label and
other characteristic information.
4 Supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN label processing.
4 Supports the static unicast and static multicast functions.
4 Supports the Ethernet data stream classification and various Qos policies.
4 Supports Ethernet OAM, including fault, performance and diagnosis.
u Performance collection and alarm monitoring:
4 Supports the SM, PM and TCMi overhead monitoring of the OTN

equipment.
4 Supports the PCS error and performance statics monitoring of the data
service.
192 Version: D
6 Card
u Tunable wavelength: Optional, provided upon request . The card uses the
optical module with tunable wavelength to adjust the optical signal’s
wavelengths on the wavelength division side in the range of the 192
wavelengths in C-band.
u ESC function: multiplexes the supervisory signals into the service channels for
transmission.
u Error correction coding: supports both FEC and super FEC encoding /
decoding schemes.
u Clock: supports the physical layer clock extraction and processing.
maintenance.
u Remote upgrade of card software: performs remote software upgrade function


The 4LXA2 card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
Table 6-100 The 4LXA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Backplane WDM Side Interface WDM Side Optical Signal

Card Name
Bandwidth Quantity Type
4LXA2 80G 4 OTU2e

bandwidth.
Version: D 193
card in the system.
6.4.3.4 Panel
Figure 6-23 illustrates the 4LXA2 card panel.
194 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-23 The 4LXA2 Card Panel
Version: D 195
Table 6-101 Descriptions of the 4LXA2 Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
TX is for outputting the optical
signals with specified wavelengths,
generally connected with interfaces
01 to 48 on the OMU and the VMU
series of cards, or with interfaces A1 The optical
The 1st to 4th to A8 on the optical add / drop interface
TX1 / RX1 to
optical multiplexing card. connector: the
TX4 / RX4
interfaces RX is for receiving the optical signals LC-type
with specified wavelengths, generally connector.
connected with interfaces 01 to 48 on
the ODU series of cards, or with
interfaces D1 to D8 on the optical
add / drop multiplexing card.
6.4.3.5 Specifications of the 4LXA2 Card
Table 6-102 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LXA2 Card
Source type and modulation format – DFB/MZ DFB/MZ

800 (wavelength tunable 800 (wavelength untunable
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm
module) module)
Maximum width at -20 dB nm 0.3 0.3

Transmitter Minimum side mode
dB 30 30
at reference suppression ratio
point S Maximum mean launched
dBm 2 2
power
196 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-102 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LXA2 Card (Continued)

dBm -3 -3
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 (Filter off) 10 (Filter off)
Transmit signal eye Compliant with the ITU-T Compliant with the ITU-T
–
pattern G.691 mask G.691 mask
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
≤ 10-12)

dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
Receiver at 10-12)
reference Maximum optical path
dB 2 2
point R penalty
receiver, measured at dB -27 -27
reference point R
Table 6-103 Mechanical Parameters of the 4LXA2 Card
4LXA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-104 Power Consumption of the 4LXA2 Card
4LXA2 120
6.4.4 The 2LA2 Card
The 2LA2 card number is 2.170.878.
Version: D 197
6.4.4.1 Function
The 2LA2 card receives electrical signals from the electrical cross-connect card,
and outputs two OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signals of DWDM standard compliant
wavelength to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexing card
for WDM after mapping and the O / E conversion. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The 2LA2 card has the following functions and features:
u OTN functions:
management system.

wavelengths on the WDM side in the C-band.
decoding schemes.
u Loopback: Supports the local / remote loopback of signals at the WDM side


198 Version: D
6 Card
See Table 6-105 for the 2LA2 card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-105 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2LA2 Card
Backplane WDM Side Interface

Card Name WDM Side Signal Type
Bandwidth Quantity
OTU2
Note 1
2LA2 20G 2 OTU2e
OTU2f
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.4.4 Panel
Figure 6-24 illustrates the 2LA2 card panel.
Version: D 199
Figure 6-24 The 2LA2 Card Panel
200 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-106 Description of the 2LA2 Card Panel

ACT
LED generally, ON indicates the poor communication between

card.
alarm).
TX is for transmitting the optical

The 1st and the 2nd
to A8 on the optical add / drop interface
TX1 / RX1 optical interfaces on
multiplexing card. connector: the
TX2 / RX2 the wavelength
RX is for receiving the optical signals LC-type
division side
with specified wavelengths, generally connector.
interfaces D1 to D8 on the optical add
/ drop multiplexing card.
6.4.4.5 Specifications of the 2LA2 Card
Table 6-107 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card
Source type and modulation

– DFB/MZ DFB/MZ
format
800 (wavelength 800 (wavelength
tunable module) untunable module)
Transmit- Maximum width at

nm 0.3 0.3
ter at -20 dB
reference Minimum side mode
dB 30 30
Version: D 201
Table 6-107 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card (Continued)
Maximum mean
dBm 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 10 (Filter off) 10 (Filter off)
ratio
Transmit signal eye Compliant with the Compliant with the
–
pattern ITU-T G.691 mask ITU-T G.691 mask
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
Receiver dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
at
Maximum optical
reference dB 2 2
path penalty
point R
Maximum reflectance
of receiver, measured dB -27 -27
at R
Table 6-108 Mechanical Parameters of the 2LA2 Card
2LA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-109 Power Consumption of the 2LA2 Card
2LA2 47
6.4.5 The 4LA2 Card
The card number of the 4LA2 card is 2.170.878.
202 Version: D
6 Card
6.4.5.1 Function
The 4LA2 card receives electrical signals from the cross-connect card, aggregates
the signals and outputs four OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signals of DWDM standard
multiplexer card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
management system. Supports the PM, SM, and TCMi functions at the
ODU2 / OTU2 layer.

decoding schemes.


Version: D 203
Table 6-110 The 4LA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Backplane WDM Side Optical WDM Side Optical

Card Name
Bandwidth Interface Quantity Signal Type
OTU2
4LA2 40G 4 OTU2e
OTU2f
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.5.4 Panel
204 Version: D
6 Card
Version: D 205
Table 6-111 Descriptions of the 4LA2 Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
TX is for transmitting the optical signals
with specified wavelengths, generally
the OMU and the VMU series of cards,
The optical
or with interfaces A1 to A8 on the optical
The 1st to 4th interface
TX1 / RX1 to add / drop multiplexing card.
optical connector: the
TX4 / RX4 RX is for receiving the optical signals
interfaces LC-type
connector.
interfaces D1 to D8 on the optical add /
drop multiplexing card.

– DFB/MZ DFB/MZ
format

nm 0.3 0.3
ter at -20 dB
dB 30 30
206 Version: D
6 Card
Maximum mean
dBm 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
–
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
(BER ≤ 10-12)
at
Maximum optical
reference dB 2 2
path penalty
point R
Maximum reflectance
at R
4LA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
4LA2 52.7
6.4.6 The 4TEL2 Card
The card number of the 4TEL2 card is 2.170.962.
The 4TEL2 card is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
Version: D 207
6.4.6.1 Function
The 4TEL2 card receives electrical signals from the cross-connect card, aggregates
the signals and outputs four OTU2 / OTU2e signals to the optical multiplexer card or
the optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The 4TEL2 card has the following functions and features:
u OTN functions:
management system.

decoding schemes.
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Monitors OTN performance and alarms;

monitors the performance and alarms of client signals.
u Loopback: Supports the local / remote loopback of signals at the WDM side
optical interface and the backplane side.

208 Version: D
6 Card

The 4TEL2 card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
Table 6-115 The 4TEL2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity
Backplane WDM Side Interface WDM Side Optical

Card Name
Bandwidth Quantity Signal Type
OTU2
4TEL2 40G 4
OTU2e
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.6.4 Panel
Figure 6-26 illustrates the 4TEL2 card panel.
Version: D 209
Figure 6-26 The 4TEL2 Card Panel
210 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-116 Descriptions of the 4TEL2 Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA major alarm).
LED
alarms.
TX is for transmitting the optical
The 1st to 4th to A8 on the optical add / drop interface
TX1 / RX1 to
optical multiplexing card. connector: the
TX4 / RX4
interfaces RX is for receiving the optical signals LC-type
with specified wavelengths, connector.
01 to 48 on the ODU series of cards,
or with interfaces D1 to D8 on the
6.4.6.5 Specifications of the 4TEL2 Card
Table 6-117 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEL2 Card

– DFB/MZ DFB/MZ
format
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600

nm 0.4 0.4
ter at -20 dB
dB 30 30
Version: D 211
Table 6-117 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4TEL2 Card (Continued)
Maximum mean
dBm 2 8
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -1 3
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
–
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
(BER ≤ 10-12)
at
Maximum optical
reference dB 2 2
path penalty
point R
Maximum reflectance
at reference point R
Table 6-118 Mechanical Parameters of the 4TEL2 Card
4TEL2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-119 Power Consumption of the 4TEL2 Card
4TEL2 55.83
6.4.7 The 8LA2 Card
The card number of the 8LA2 card is 2.170.880.
212 Version: D
6 Card
6.4.7.1 Function
The 8LA2 card receives electrical signals from the cross-connect card, aggregates
the signals and outputs eight OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signals of DWDM standard
u OTN functions:
management system. Supports the PM, SM, and TCMi functions at the
ODU2 / OTU2 layer.

decoding schemes.


Version: D 213
Table 6-120 The 8LA2 Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity

Card Name
OTU2
8LA2 80G 8
OTU2e
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.7.4 Panel
214 Version: D
6 Card
Version: D 215
Table 6-121 Descriptions of the 8LA2 Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
TX is for transmitting the optical signals with
with interfaces 01 to 48 on the OMU and the The
VMU series of cards, or with interfaces A1 optical
The 1st to 8th to A8 on the optical add / drop multiplexing interface
TX1 / RX1 to
optical card. connector:
TX8 / RX8
interfaces RX is for receiving the optical signals with the LC-
specified wavelengths, generally connected type
with interfaces 01 to 48 on the ODU series connector.
of cards, or with interfaces D1 to D8on the

– DFB/MZ DFB/MZ
format
Maximum width at
nm 0.3 0.3
Transmit- -20 dB
ter at Minimum side mode
dB 30 30
reference suppression ratio
point S Maximum mean
dBm 3 3
launched power
216 Version: D
6 Card
Minimum mean
dBm -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
–
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
(BER ≤ 10-12)
at
Maximum optical path
reference dB 2 2
penalty
point R
Maximum reflectance
at R
8LA2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
8LA2 91
The LMS3E card can be classified into four types as the slots occupied and optical
modules used vary. It is applicable for the FONST 4000 / 5000.
Card Name Optical Module Modulation Type Card Number

LMS3E (double-slot) DPSK 2.170.881
LMS3E (double-slot) DQPSK 2.200.183
Version: D 217
Card Name Optical Module Modulation Type Card Number
LMS3E (single-slot) DPSK 2.200.874
LMS3E (single-slot) DQPSK 2.200.902
6.4.8.1 Function
aggregates the signals and outputs one OTU3 / OTU3e1 signal of DWDM standard
u OTN functions:
4 Users can configure the OTN overheads via the network management
system. The supported configuration functions include the following items:
the PM and TCMi configuration at the ODU2 layer, the ODTU23 layer, and
the ODU3 / OTU3 layer; the SM configuration at the ODU3 / OTU3 layer.
u Supports single-channel dispersion compensation and pre-amplification: The

built-in TDCM and OPA modules in the card can perform precise dispersion
compensation and pre-amplification for a single channel. Both the dispersion
compensation value and the amplification gain can be configured via the

decoding schemes.
218 Version: D
6 Card
and maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the local and remote end loopback of signals at the WDM
side and the backplane side.


See Table 6-125 for the LMS3E card’s access service type and quantity.
Table 6-125 The LMS3E Card’s Access Service Type and Quantity

Card Name
OTU3
LMS3E 40G 1
OTU3e1
bandwidth.
card in the system.
6.4.8.4 Panel
Version: D 219
Note:
The LMS3E card can occupy one or two slots.
220 Version: D
6 Card
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the LMS3E card are described in
Table 6-126.
Table 6-126 Descriptions of the LMS3E Card Panel

ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED

connected with interfaces 01 to 48 on the
OMU and the VMU series of cards, or with
The optical
interfaces A1 to A8 on the optical add /
interface
WDM side drop multiplexing card.
TX / RX connector: the
optical interface RX is for receiving the optical signals with
LC-type
specified wavelengths, generally
connector.
ODU series of cards, or with interfaces D1
to D8 on the optical add / drop
multiplexing card.
6.4.8.5 Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Table 6-127 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Channel spacing GHz 50 50

Optical line code – sRZ-DQPSK sDPSK
Transmit- Maximum central

GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
ter at frequency deviation
reference Maximum -20dB
nm NA NA
point S spectrum width
Version: D 221
Table 6-127 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) (Continued)
Minimum side mode

dB 35 35
suppression ratio
Maximum mean
dBm 5 5
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -10 -5
launched power
Transmit signal eye

– TBD TBD
pattern
Minimum extinction
dB NA NA
ratio
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -14 -14
of the receiver Note 1
Receiver Minimum overload of
dBm 0 0
at the receiver
reference Maximum reflectance
dB -27 -27
point R of the receiver
Receiving range of
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
the receiver Note 2
Note 1: The integrated optical pre-amplifier of the receiver.
Note 2: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver. The receiver is required to work within
the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.
The built-in OPA module in the Rx direction at the WDM side of the LMS3E card is a
single-wavelength optical amplification module suitable for 40G optical transport
network. The module uses a pump laser with TEC refrigerator. Its output power can
be equalized within the range of 0 to 10 dBm. Table 6-128 and Table 6-129 show
its specific specifications.
Table 6-128 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Optical wavelength range (C-band

nm 1528 to 1568
48-channel)
Input power range dBm -30 to 0

Note 1
Output optical power range dBm 0 to 10
Gain dB ≥ 25
NF (noise figure) dB 5.5 / 7.5
Threshold for Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24
222 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-128 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) (Continued)
Threshold for Tx-LOS alarm dBm -3 to -2

Input optical power threshold at
dBm -25 to -24
pump OFF
Note 1: The optical output power includes the signal power and the ASE power. Make sure that
the output optical power is 10 dBm when the input power is larger than -25 dBm. In the
APC working mode, the optical power can be adjusted within the range via the
parameter setting.
Table 6-129 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Average chromatic dispersion
ps/nm ±20
accuracy
Insertion loss dB 4
Table 6-130 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
LMS3E (double-slot) 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-131 Power Consumption of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
LMS3E (double-slot) 98
6.4.8.6 Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)
Table 6-132 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)

Version: D 223
Table 6-132 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) (Continued)
Maximum central
GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
frequency deviation
Maximum -20dB
nm NA NA
spectrum width
Minimum side mode

dB 35 35
Transmit- suppression ratio
ter at Maximum mean
dBm 5 5
reference launched power
point S Minimum mean
dBm -10 -5
launched power
Transmit signal eye

– TBD TBD
pattern
Minimum extinction
dB NA NA
ratio
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -14 -14
of the receiver Note 1
dBm 0 0
at the receiver
dB -27 -27
Receiving range of
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
the receiver Note 2
Note 2: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver. The receiver is required to work within
the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.
The built-in OPA module in the Rx direction at the WDM side of the LMS3E card is a
Table 6-133 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)

nm 1528 to 1568
48-channel)
224 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-133 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) (Continued)
Output optical power range Note 1 dBm 0 to 10

Gain dB ≥ 25
Input optical power threshold at
dBm -25 to -24
pump OFF
parameter setting.
Table 6-134 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)

Average chromatic dispersion
ps/nm ±20
accuracy
Insertion loss dB 4
Table 6-135 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)
LMS3E (single-slot) 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-136 Power Consumption of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)
LMS3E (single-slot) 85
The card number of the LMS4E card is 2.200.451.
Version: D 225
6.4.9.1 Function
aggregates the signals and outputs one OTU4 signal of DWDM standard compliant
wavelength to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card
for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
functions at the ODUk / OTUk layer.

decoding schemes.
and maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports the local and remote end loopback of signals at the WDM
side and the backplane side.

226 Version: D
6 Card

The LMS4E card’s service type and the quantity are shown in Table 6-137.
Table 6-137 The LMS4E Card’s Service Access Capacity

Card Note 1
LMS4E 100 G 1 OTU4

bandwidth.
card in the system.
Version: D 227
The interfaces and LEDs on the LMS4E card panel are described in Table 6-138.
228 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-138 The LMS4E Card Panel

Working status ON or OFF indicates the abnormal working status; generally,
ACT

Alarm indicator Red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major alarm).
UA / NUA
LED Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).

OMU and the VMU series of cards, or with
The optical
Wavelength interfaces A1 to A8 on the optical add /
interface
division side drop multiplexer card.
TX / RX connector: the
optical RX is for receiving the optical signals with
LC-type
interface specified wavelengths, generally
connector.
ODU series of cards, or with interfaces D1
to D8 on the optical add / drop multiplexer
card.
6.4.9.5 Specification of the LMS4E Card
Table 6-139 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the LMS4E Card
Channel spacing GHz 50

Optical line code - Coherent PM-QPSK
Transmission rate Gbit/s 127.156
Nominal central frequency range THz 191.3 to 196.05
Maximum central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5
Transmitter
Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.5
at reference
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
point S
Version: D 229
Table 6-139 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the LMS4E Card
(Continued)
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm ≤ -18

Minimum overload of the receiver dBm ≥0
Receiver at
Maximum reflectance of receiver dB ≤ -27
reference Note 1
Receiving range of the receiver nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
point R
Differential group delay tolerance value ps 105 (0.5 dB OSNR penalty)
Note 1: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver. The receiver is required to work within the range that
corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.
Table 6-140 Mechanical Parameters of the LMS4E Card
LMS4E 368×60
Power Consumption
Table 6-141 Power Consumption of the LMS4E Card
LMS4E 185
6.5 Optical Transponder Card
The following introduces the functions, service access capabilities, application in the
system, panels and specifications of the optical transponder cards.
6.5.1 The MST2 Card
The MST2 card number is 2.200.795.
230 Version: D
6 Card
6.5.1.1 Function
The MST2 card receives eight optical signals (low rate signals, such as STM-1 / 4 /
16, OTU1, FE, GE, 1GFC, 2GFC; the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s),
performs the O/E conversion and aggregates into one OTU2 signal of DWDM
standard compliant wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the wavelength
division side optical interface to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop
The MST2 card performs the following functions:
u OTN functions:
provides the standard OTN interface on the wavelength division side,
which also complies with WDM related standards.
management system.
u Tunable wavelength: Optional, provided as needed by the users. The card uses
the optical module with tunable wavelength to adjust the optical signal’s
wavelengths on the wavelength division side in the C-band.
u Error correction coding: Supports both FEC and super FEC coding / decoding
modes.
4 Supports the SDH B1 and J0 bytes overhead monitoring.
4 Supports the performance and alarm monitoring of the OTN overhead.
4 Supports the performance monitoring of small rate services, such as GE /

FC services.
and maintenance. Supports the laser shutdown function of the client side
interfaces.
Version: D 231
u Loopback: Supports near end and remote end loopback of signals at client side
and wavelength division side optical interfaces.
u Pluggable optical module: Uses the pluggable SFP / XFP optical module on the
client side optical interfaces and the wavelength division side optical interfaces
to facilitate operation and maintenance.


interfaces on the client side and wavelength side.
4 Information about optical interfaces on the client side includes the module
type, application code, transmission distance, supported rate, wavelength
window, receiver type, etc.
4 Information about optical interfaces on the wavelength division side

includes the optical type, wavelength, receiver type and modulation format.
See Table 6-142 for the MST2 card’s access service type and quantity.
232 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-142 Access Service Type and Quantity of the MST2 Card
Client Side WDM Side

Card Note 1
Interface Interface Note 2
Abbreviation Signal Type Signal Type
Quantity Quantity
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
FE
GE
OTU1
MST2 8 1 OTU2
1GFC
2GFC
Hybrid
transmission of
the aforesaid
services
Note 1: The client side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the
client side device.
Note 2: The WDM side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the
optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card.
card in the system.
6.5.1.4 Panel
See Figure 6-30 for the MST2 card panel.
Version: D 233
Figure 6-30 The MST2 Card Panel
234 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-143 Description of the MST2 Card Panel

Working
ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status; generally, ON
ACT indicator
indicates the poor communication between the card and the
LED
OFF indicates no alarm or all alarms are filtered on the card.

Alarm
Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major alarm).
UA/NUA indicator
LED
The 1st to
OUT is for transmitting service signals to the
OUT1 / IN1 the 8th
to OUT8 / client side
IN is for receiving service signals from the
IN8 optical
interfaces The optical
TX is for transmitting wavelength-specific interface
optical signals to the optical multiplexer card connector: the LC-
WDM side or the optical add / drop multiplexing card. type connector.
TX/RX optical RX is for receiving wavelength-specific
interface optical signals from the optical demultiplexer
card or the optical add / drop multiplexing
card.
6.5.1.5 Specifications of the MST2 Card
Table 6-144 Client Side Interface Specifications of the MST2 Card (STM-16 / OTU1 Service)
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G


Transmitter nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
at reference
point S
Version: D 235
Table 6-144 Client Side Interface Specifications of the MST2 Card (STM-16 / OTU1 Service)
(Continued)
Minimum side mode

dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio

dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power


dBm -18 -27 -28
≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
reference dBm 0 -9 -9
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-145 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (GE Service)
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

SX LX EX ZX
Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 0.55 10 40 80
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1275 to 1500 to
nm 770 to 860
range 1355 1350 1580
Transmitter dBm 0 -3 0 5
power
at reference
point S dBm -9.5 -8 -5 0
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 9 9 9


Receiver at dBm -17 -20 -23 -23
10-12)
reference
point R dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
10-12)
236 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-146 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
Compliant with the G.691
mask
-12

point R dB -27
measured at reference point R
Table 6-147 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card
MST2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-148 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card
MST2 40
6.5.2 The OTU2S Card
The number of the OTU2S card is 2.018.141 / 2.018.146 / 2.200.914. The card
number 2.200.914 refers to the OTU2S (XFP) card, whose client side and WDM
side both use the XFP optical module.
Version: D 237
6.5.2.1 Function
The card receives one optical signal (STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / 10GFC /
OTU2) from the client side, performs the O/E conversion and converts it into one
OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signal of DWDM standard compliant wavelength; outputs
the converted signal via the WDM side optical interface to the optical multiplexer
card or optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also fulfills the
reverse process.
The OTU2S card performs the following functions:
u OTN functions:
management system.

decoding schemes.
u Loopback: Supports remote end loopback of signals at client side and WDM
side optical interfaces.
238 Version: D
6 Card


interfaces on the client side and WDM side can be obtained via the EMS.
type, application code, transmission distance, support rate, wavelength
window, receiver type.
4 Information about optical interfaces on the WDM side includes the optical
type, wavelength, receiver type and modulation format.
The OTU2S card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
Table 6-149 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2S Card
Client Side WDM Side WDM Side

Note 1
Client Side Optical Note 2
Card Name Interface Interface Optical Signal
Signal Type
Quantity Quantity Type
STM-64
10GE LAN OTU2
OTU2S 1 10GE WAN 1 OTU2e
10GFC OTU2f
OTU2
Note 2: The wavelength division side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is
connected to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card.
card in the system.
Version: D 239
The OTU2S card panel is shown in Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 The OTU2S Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OTU2S card panel are described in
Table 6-150.
240 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-150 Description of the OTU2S Card Panel

Working ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status; generally,
ACT
indicator LED ON indicates the poor communication between the card and the

Alarm indicator Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
UA/NUA

Client side signals to the client side equipment.
OUT/IN
optical interface IN is for receiving service signals
from the client side equipment.
TX is for transmitting wavelength-

specific optical signals to the optical
multiplexer card or the optical add /
Wavelength connector.
TX/RX division side
RX is for receiving wavelength-
optical interface
specific optical signals from the
optical demultiplexer card or the
6.5.2.5 Specifications of the OTU2S Card

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
range

dB 30 – –

dBm -1 2 4
power
Version: D 241
Table 6-151 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S Card (Continued)

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-152 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S Card

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
691 mask
-12

point R dB -27
Table 6-153 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card
OTU2S 368 × 30
OTU2S (XFP) 368 × 30
242 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-154 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card
OTU2S 25
OTU2S (XFP) 16
6.5.3 The 2OTU2S Card
The 2OTU2S card number is 2.200.915.
6.5.3.1 Function
The card receives two optical signals (STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / 10GFC /
OTU2) from the client side, performs the O/E conversion and aggregates them into
the OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signal of DWDM standard compliant wavelength;
outputs the converted signal via the WDM side optical interface to the optical
multiplexer card or optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also
The 2OTU2S card performs the following functions:
u OTN functions:
management system.

Version: D 243
decoding schemes.
u Loopback: Supports local and remote end loopback of signals at client side and
WDM side optical interfaces.


The 2OTU2S card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
244 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-155 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 2OTU2S Card
Client Side Client Side WDM Side

Note 1
WDM Side Optical
Card Name Interface Optical Signal Interface Note 2
Signal Type
Quantity Type Quantity
STM-64
10GE LAN OTU2
2OTU2S 2 10GE WAN 2 OTU2e
10GFC OTU2f
OTU2
card in the system.
6.5.3.4 Panel
See Figure 6-32 for the 2OTU2S card panel.
Version: D 245
Figure 6-32 The 2OTU2S Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the 2OTU2S card panel are described in
Table 6-156.
246 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-156 Description of the 2OTU2S Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
UA/NUA
indicator LED alarm).

Client side signals to the client side
OUT1 / IN1
optical equipment.
OUT2 / IN2
interface IN is for receiving service signals
TX is for transmitting
wavelength-specific optical The optical interface
signals to the optical multiplexer connector: the LC-type
card or the optical add / drop connector.
WDM side
TX1 / RX1 multiplexing card.
optical
TX2 / RX2 RX is for receiving wavelength-
interface
optical add / drop multiplexing
card.
6.5.3.5 Specifications of the 2OTU2S Card
Table 6-157 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S Card


nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
at reference range
point S Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1.0 0.4 0.4
Version: D 247
Table 6-157 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S Card (Continued)
Minimum side mode

dB 30 – –
suppression ratio

dBm -1 2 4
power

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-158 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S Card

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
691 mask
Receiver Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)

-12
at Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R dB -27
248 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-159 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card
2OTU2S 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-160 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card
2OTU2S 36
6.5.4 The 4OTU2S Card
The card number of the 4OTU2S card is 2018154.
Applicable to the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.
6.5.4.1 Function
The card receives four optical signals (STM-64 / 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / OTU2e /
OTU2) from the client side, performs the O/E conversion and converts them into
four OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f signals of DWDM standard compliant wavelength;
outputs the converted signals via the WDM side optical interface to the optical
multiplexer card or optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also
The 4OTU2S card performs the following functions:
u OTN functions:
management system.
Version: D 249

decoding schemes.
u Loopback: Supports remote loopback of signals at client side and WDM side
optical interfaces.


The 4OTU2S card’s service access capacity, including the service type and the
quantity, is shown in Table 6-161.
250 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-161 Access Service Type and Quantity of the 4OTU2S Card
Client Side WDM Side WDM Side

Client Side Optical Note 2
Card Name Interface Note Interface Optical Signal
1 Signal Type
Quantity Quantity Type
STM-64
10GE LAN
10GE WAN OTU2
4OTU2S 4 4
10GFC OTU2e
OTU2
OTU2e
client side device.
card in the system.
The 4OTU2S card panel is shown in Figure 6-33.
Version: D 251
Figure 6-33 The 4OTU2S Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the 4OTU2S card panel are described in
Table 6-162.
252 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-162 The 4OTU2S Card Panel

Working status If the indicator LED is ON or OFF, the card is working
ACT
indicator LED abnormally; ON indicates a communication interruption
exists between the card and the OTNM2000.
Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a
Alarm
UA / NUA major alarm).
indicator LED
Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (a minor alarm).
OUT1 / IN1 OUT is for transmitting service

Client side
OUT2 / IN2 signals to client side devices.
optical
OUT3 / IN3 IN is for receiving service signals
interface
OUT4 / IN4 from client side devices.
TX is for transmitting
wavelength-specific optical
signals to the optical multiplexing
TX1 / RX1 card or the optical add / drop
WDM side connector.
TX2 / RX2 multiplexing card.
optical
TX3 / RX3 RX is for receiving wavelength-
interface
TX4 / RX4 specific optical signals from the
optical demultiplexing card or the
optical add / drop multiplexing
card.
6.5.4.5 Specification of the 4OTU2S Card
Table 6-163 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 4OTU2S Card

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Transmitter range
at reference Maximum width at -20 dB nm 1.0 0.4 0.4
point S Minimum side mode
dB 30 – –
suppression ratio
Version: D 253
Table 6-163 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the 4OTU2S Card (Continued)

dBm -1 2 4
power

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-164 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the 4OTU2S Card

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
691 mask
Receiver Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)

point R dB -27
254 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-165 Mechanical Parameters of the 4OTU2S Card
4OTU2S 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-166 Power Consumption of the 4OTU2S Card
4OTU2S 81
6.5.5 The OTU2E Card
The OTU2E card has two types according to different optical modules on the line
side. The number of the OTU2E card is 2.854.033 / 2.854.034.

OTU2E (non-tunable wavelength) 2.854.033
OTU2E (tunable wavelength) 2.854.034
6.5.5.1 Function
The card receives four optical signals (STM-16 / OTU1), performs the O/E
conversion and aggregates into one OTU2 signal of DWDM standard compliant
wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the WDM side optical interface to the
optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse
process.
The OTU2E card performs the following functions:
u OTN functions:
Version: D 255
management system.

decoding schemes.
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Supports overhead monitoring of SDH B1

and J0 bytes; supports monitoring of OTN performance and alarms.
u Loopback: Supports remote loopback of signals at client side and WDM side
optical interfaces.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces use SFP optical modules,


The OTU2E card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
256 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-167 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2E Card
Client Side
Client Side Interface Note 1 WDM Side Interface Note 2 WDM Side Optical
Card Optical Signal
Quantity Quantity Signal Type
Type
STM-16
OTU2E 4 1 OTU2
OTU1
Note 1: The client side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the client side device.
Note 2: The WDM side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the optical multiplexer card
or the optical add / drop multiplexer card.
card in the system.
6.5.5.4 Panel
See Figure 6-34 for the OTU2E card panel.
Version: D 257
Figure 6-34 The OTU2E Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OTU2E card panel are described in
Table 6-168.
258 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-168 Description of the OTU2E Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
UA/NUA
LED alarm).
The 1st to the TX is for transmitting service signals

OUT1 / IN1 to 4th client side to client side devices.
OUT4 / IN4 optical RX is for receiving service signals
interfaces from client side devices.
The optical
interface
connector: the
Wavelength multiplexer card or the optical add /
LC-type
division side drop multiplexing card.
TX / RX connector.
optical RX is for receiving wavelength-
interface specific optical signals from the
6.5.5.5 Specifications of the OTU2E Card
Table 6-169 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E Card
155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G 155M-2.67G



nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
at reference range
point S Source type – SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB
Version: D 259
Table 6-169 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E Card (Continued)

Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio

dBm 0 3 3
power

dBm -5 -2 -2
power


dBm -18 -27 -28
10-12)
Receiver at
reference dBm 0 -9 -9
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-170 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E Card

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
691 mask
-12
-12
at Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 (PIN)
point R dB -27
260 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-171 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card
OTU2E 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-172 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card
OTU2E 33
6.5.6 The OTU2F Card
The OTU2F card has two types according to different optical modules on the line
side. The number of the OTU2F card is 2.018.152 / 2.018.153.

OTU2F (non-tunable wavelength) 2.018.152
OTU2F (tunable wavelength) 2.018.153
6.5.6.1 Function
The card performs decapsulation and UFEC / RSFEC decoding of the optical
signals (OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f) from the line side and performs the digital wrapper
and Ultra-FEC encoding to convert the signal into the OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f (10.7
Gbit/s) optical signal of DWDM standard compliant wavelength and outputs to the
optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The
card performs the regeneration of the OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f services without
changing the frame structure and necessary overhead bytes of service signals
during the process, so as to guarantee the transparent transmission of the service.
u OTN functions:
Version: D 261
management system.

u Error correction coding: Supports both FEC and super FEC coding / decoding
modes (I.4 and I.7 defined in G.975 are supported.)
and maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports local and remote end loopback of signals at WDM side
optical interfaces.
u Optical module: Uses the 300PIN MSA module.


interfaces on the WDM side can be obtained through the network management
system. Information about the optical interfaces on the WDM side includes the
wavelength and wavelength tunability, the receiver type and the modulation
mode.
The OTU2F card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
262 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-173 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU2F Card
West WDM Side

West WDM Side East WDM Side East WDM Side
Card Name Interface Note 1
Optical Signal Type Interface Quantity Optical Signal Type
Quantity
OTU2 OTU2
OTU2F 1 OTU2e 1 OTU2e
OTU2f OTU2f
Note 1: The wavelength division side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the optical
multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card.
See Figure 6-35 for the application and positioning of the card in the system.
Figure 6-35 Positioning of the OTU2F Card in the System
See Figure 6-36 for the OTU2F card panel.
Version: D 263
Figure 6-36 The OTU2F Card Panel
264 Version: D
6 Card
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the OTU2F card are described in
Table 6-174.
Table 6-174 Description of the OTU2F Card Panel

ACT

Alarm Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
UA/NUA
indicator LED Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
TX_E: Transmits optical signals with

specific wavelengths to the optical
TX_ division east drop multiplexing card
E/RX_E side optical RX_E: Receives optical signals with
interface specific wavelengths from the optical
demultiplexer card or the optical add /
TX_W: Transmits optical signals with
connector.
specific wavelengths to the optical
TX_ division west drop multiplexing card.
W/RX_W side optical RX_W: Receives optical signals with
interface specific wavelengths from the optical
6.5.6.5 Specifications of the OTU2F Card
Table 6-175 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2F Card

Version: D 265
Table 6-175 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2F Card (Continued)

dB 35
Transmit- ratio

point S
691 mask
-12

point R dB -27
Table 6-176 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card
OTU2F 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-177 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card
OTU2F 29
The OTU3S card has two types according to different optical modules on the line
side. The number of the OTU3S card is 2.018.151/2.200.180.
266 Version: D
6 Card

OTU3S (DPSK modulation is used in the line side optical
2.018.151
module, tunable wavelength)
OTU3S (DQPSK modulation is used in the line side optical

2.200.180
6.5.7.1 Function
The card receives one optical signal (STM-256 / OTU3 / OTU3e1), performs the O/E
conversion and converts into the OTU3 / OTU3e1 signal of DWDM standard
compliant wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the WDM side optical
interface to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add/drop multiplexing card for
WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
management system.


decoding schemes.
Version: D 267


4 Information about optical interfaces on the WDM side includes wavelength

tunability, wavelength, receiver type and modulation format.

Card Client Side Interface Note 1 WDM Side Interface Note 2
Optical Signal Optical Signal
Name Quantity Quantity
Type Type
STM-256 OTU3
OTU3S 1 OTU3 1 OTU3e1
OTU3e1
Note 1: The client side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the client side equipment.
268 Version: D
6 Card
card in the system.
6.5.7.4 Panel
See Figure 6-37 for the OTU3S card panel.
Version: D 269
Table 6-179.
270 Version: D
6 Card

ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
OUT is for transmitting service signals to

Client side the client side equipment.
OUT / IN
optical interface IN is for receiving service signals from
the client side equipment.
TX is for transmitting wavelength-specific The optical

optical signals to the optical multiplexer interface connector:
card or the optical add / drop multiplexing the LC-type
Wavelength
card. connector.
TX / RX division side
RX is for receiving wavelength-specific
optical interface
optical signals from the optical

Fiber type – G.652
Transmit- Maximum width at -20 dB nm –

ter at Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35
reference ratio
point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Version: D 271

-12
Receiver Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 3
at Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
reference Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27

Maximum central frequency
GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
deviation
Maximum -20dB spectrum width nm NA NA
Transmit-
ter at dB 35 35
ratio
reference
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
point S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5
Transmit signal eye pattern – TBD TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA
Minimum sensitivity of the
dBm -14 -14
receiver Note 1
Receiver
Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0
at
reference Maximum reflectance of the
dB -27 -27
point R receiver
Receiving range of the receiver
Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568

Note 2: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver should correspond to the transmitting
wavelength.
272 Version: D
6 Card
The built-in OPA module in the Rx direction at the WDM side of the OTU3S card is a
be equalized within the range of 0 to 10 dBm. Table 6-182 shows its specific
specifications.
Table 6-182 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the OTU3S Card
Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568

Note 2
Gain dB ≥ 25
NF (noise figure) – 5.5 / 7.5
Input optical power threshold at pump OFF dBm -25 to -24
parameter setting.
Note 2: For the signal power gain, the larger gain the better. However, make sure that the gain
should be no less than 20 dB.
Table 6-183 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card

Average chromatic dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20
Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3S 368 × 60
Version: D 273
Power Consumption
OTU3S 81 (DPSK) / 91 (DQPSK)
6.5.8 The OTU3S Card (Coherent)
The card number of the OTU3S card (coherent) is 2.151.211.
6.5.8.1 Function
The OTU3S card receives one optical signal (STM-256 / OTU3 / OTU3e1) form the
client side, performs the O/E conversion and converts it into the OTU3 / OTU3e1
signal of DWDM standard compliant wavelength; outputs the converted signal via
the WDM side optical interface to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add/drop
u OTN functions:
management system.

u Error correction coding: Supports super FEC (defined in I.7 of ITU-T Rec. G.975)
encoding and decoding modes.
274 Version: D
6 Card
u Performance and alarm monitoring: Supports overhead monitoring of SDH B1

and J0 bytes; supports monitoring of OTN performance and alarms.


The OTU3S card (coherent)’s service access capacity, including the service type
and quantity, is shown in Table 6-186.
Table 6-186 Access Service and Quantity of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

Card Note 1
Client Side Signal WDM Side Interface Note
Interface 2 Signal
Name Type Quantity
Quantity Type
OTU3- STM-256
1 1 OTU3
S OTU3
Version: D 275
card in the system.
6.5.8.4 Panel
See Figure 6-38 for the OTU3S (coherent) card panel.
276 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-38 The OTU3S Card (Coherent) Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the OTU3S (coherent) card are
described in Table 6-187.
Version: D 277
Table 6-187 Descriptions on the OTU3S Card (Coherent) Panel

ACT
LED generally, ON indicates the poor communication between the

Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED

Client side optical signals to the client side equipment.
OUT / IN
interface IN is for receiving service signals

connector: the LC-
Wavelength type connector.
optical interface
6.5.8.5 Specifications of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
Interface Specifications
Table 6-188 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

Fiber type – G.652
Transmit- Maximum width at -20 dB nm –

ter at Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35
reference ratio
point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
278 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-188 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
(Continued)

-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -6
Receiver Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3

at Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
reference Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
Table 6-189 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

Optical line code – PM-DQPSK
GHz ±2.5
deviation
Maximum -20dB spectrum width nm 0.2
Transmit-
ter at dB 35
ratio
reference
point S
Transmit signal eye pattern – TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA
dBm -15
receiver Note 1
Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0
Receiver Maximum reflectance of the
dB -27
at receiver
reference Receiving range of the receiver
Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568
point R
Differential group delay tolerance
ps 100
value
Note 1: An optical pre-amplifier is integrated in the receiver.
Note 2: The receiver is required to work within the range that corresponds to the transmitted
wavelength.
Version: D 279
Table 6-190 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S (Coherent) Card
OTU3S (coherent) 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-191 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
OTU3S (Coherent) 108
The OTU3E card has two types according to different optical modules. The number
of the OTU3E card is 2.854.038 / 2.200.184.

OTU3E (DPSK modulation is used in the line side optical
2.854.038
OTU3E (DQPSK modulation is used in the line side optical

2.200.184
6.5.9.1 Function
The card receives four optical signals (10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64 / 10GFC /
8GFC / OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f) from the client side, performs the O/E conversion
and aggregates into the OTU3 / OTU3e1 signals of DWDM standard compliant
wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the WDM side optical interface to the
optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexing card for WDM. The
card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
280 Version: D
6 Card
4 Users can configure the OTN overheads via the network management
system. The supported configuration functions include the following items:
the PM and TCMi configuration at the ODU2 layer, the ODTU23 layer, and
the ODU3 layer, the SM configuration at the OTU3 layer.


decoding schemes.
wavelength division side optical interfaces.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces at the client side use the XFP
optical module, which is small, pluggable, and easy to operate and maintain.


Version: D 281

Table 6-192 Access Service Type and Quantity of the OTU3E Card
Client Side Client Side WDM Side WDM Side

Note 1 Note 2
Card Name Interface Optical Signal Interface Optical Signal
Quantity Type Quantity Type
STM-64
OTU2
OTU2e
OTU3
OTU2f
OTU3E 4 1 OTU3e1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
10GFC
8GFC
card in the system.
6.5.9.4 Panel
282 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-193.
Version: D 283

ACT

Alarm
UA/NUA alarm).
indicator LED
The 1st to the OUT is for transmitting service

OUT1 / IN1 to 4th client side signals to the client side equipment.
OUT4 / IN4 optical IN is for receiving service signals
interfaces from the client side equipment.
TX is for transmitting wavelength- The optical

specific optical signals to the optical interface connector:
Wavelength multiplexer card or the optical add / the LC-type
division side drop multiplexing card. connector.
TX / RX

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Transmitter range
dB 30 – –
suppression ratio
284 Version: D
6 Card

dBm -1 2 4
power

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R

Maximum central
GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
frequency deviation
Maximum -20dB
nm NA NA
spectrum width
Minimum side mode

dB 35 35
Transmit- suppression ratio
ter at Maximum mean
dBm 5 5
reference launched power
point S Minimum mean
dBm -10 -5
launched power
Transmit signal eye

– TBD TBD
pattern
Minimum extinction
dB NA NA
ratio
Version: D 285
Table 6-195 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Continued)
Minimum sensitivity of
dBm -14 -14
the receiver Note 1
dBm 0 0
at the receiver
dB -27 -27
Receiving range of
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
the receiver Note 2
wavelength.
The built-in OPA module in the Rx direction at the WDM side of the OTU3E card is a
Table 6-196 Specifications of the Built-in PA of the OTU3E Card
Optical wavelength range (C-band 48-

nm 1528 to 1568
channel)

Note 2
Gain dB ≥ 25
parameter setting.
286 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-197 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card

Average chromatic dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20
Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3E 368 × 60
Power Consumption
OTU3E 75 (DPSK) / 85 (DQPSK)
6.5.10 The OTU3E Card (Coherent)
The card number of the OTU3E card (coherent) is 2.200.935.
6.5.10.1 Function
The OTU3E card receives four optical signals (10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64 /
10GFC / 8GFC / OTU2 / OTU2e / OTU2f) from the client side, performs the O / E
conversion and aggregates into the OTU3 / OTU3e1 signals of DWDM standard
compliant wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the WDM side optical
interface to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexing card for
WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
Version: D 287
provides the standard OTN interface on the WDM side, which also
management system.
u Tunable wavelength: Optional, provided upon request . The card uses the
optical module with tunable wavelength to adjust the optical signal’s
wavelengths on the WDM side in the range of the 192 wavelengths in C-band.
u Error correction coding: Supports both FEC and super FEC encoding /
decoding modes.
4 Supports the SDH B1 and J0 bytes overhead monitoring.
maintenance.
u Loopback: Supports near end and remote end loopback of signals at client side
and wavelength division side optical interfaces.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces on the client side use the XFP


interfaces on the client side and wavelength side.
type, application code, transmission distance, supported rate, wavelength
4 Information about optical interfaces on the wavelength division side

includes the optical type, wavelength, receiver type and modulation format.
288 Version: D
6 Card
The OTU3S card (coherent)’s service access capacity, including the service type
and quantity, is shown in Table 6-200.
Table 6-200 Access Service and Quantity of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)
Card Client Side Interface Note 1 Client Side WDM Side Interface Note 2 WDM Side
Name Quantity Signal Type Quantity Signal Type
STM-64
OTU2
OTU2e
OTU2f OTU3
OTU3E 4 1
10GE LAN OTU3e1
10GE WAN
10GFC
8GFC
Note 1: The client side optical interface refers to the optical interface that is connected to the client side equipment.
card in the system.
6.5.10.4 Panel
See Figure 6-40 for the OTU3E (coherent) card panel.
Version: D 289
Figure 6-40 The OTU3E Card (Coherent) Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OTU3E (coherent) panel are described in
Table 6-201.
290 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-201 Descriptions on the OTU3E Card (Coherent) Panel

ACT

Alarm
UA/NUA alarm).
indicator LED
The 1st to the OUT is for outputting service signals

OUT1 / IN1 to 4th client side to the client side equipment.
OUT4 / IN4 optical IN is for inputting service signals
interfaces from the client side equipment.
TX is for outputting wavelength- The optical

TX / RX
6.5.10.5 Specifications of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
Interface Specifications
Table 6-202 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Transmitter range
dB 30 – –
suppression ratio
Version: D 291
Table 6-202 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
(Continued)

dBm -1 2 4
power

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R
Table 6-203 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

Optical line code – PM-DQPSK
GHz ±2.5
deviation
Maximum -20dB spectrum width nm 0.2
Transmit-
ter at dB 35
ratio
reference
point S
Transmit signal eye pattern – TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver
Note 1 dBm -20
Receiver Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0

at Maximum reflectance of the
dB -27
reference receiver
point R Receiving range of the receiver
Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568
292 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-203 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interface on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
(Continued)

ps 100
value
Note 1: An optical pre-amplifier is integrated in the receiver.
Note 2: The receiver is required to work within the range that corresponds to the transmitted
wavelength.
Table 6-204 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E (Coherent) Card
OTU3E (coherent) 368 × 90
Power Consumption
Table 6-205 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)
OTU3E (Coherent) 98
The OTU3F card has three types according to different optical modules on the line
side. The number of the OTU3F card is 2.018.150 / 2.200.181 / 2.200.589
respectively.

OTU3F (DPSK modulation is used in the optical module on both sides
2.018.150
of the line side, tunable wavelength)
OTU3F (DQPSK modulation is used in the optical module on both

2.200.181
sides of the line side, tunable wavelength)
OTU3F (DPSK / DQPSK modulation is used respectively in the optical

module on both sides of the line side; the mother board uses the DPSK 2.200.589
modulation, tunable wavelength)
Version: D 293
6.5.11.1 Function
The OTU3F card receives the OTU3 / OTU3e1 optical signals from the line side to
perform the O / E conversion. After being processed by the OTU3 overhead
insertion and the FEC decoding, these signals are converted into the OTU3 /
OTU3e1 optical signals of DWDM standard compliant wavelength. Finally, the
OTU3F card sends the signal to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop
multiplexing card for WDM. The OTU3F card performs the regeneration of the OTU3
/ OTU3e1 services and improves the quantity of transmitting signals.
u OTN functions:
management system.

u Error correction coding: Supports both FEC and super FEC.
u Loopback: Supports local and remote end loopback of signals at WDM side
optical interfaces.


mode.
294 Version: D
6 Card
The OTU3F card’s access service type and quantity are shown in Table 6-206.
West WDM Side West WDM Side East WDM Side East WDM
Note 1
Card Name Interface Optical Signal Interface Side Optical
Quantity Type Quantity Signal Type
OTU3 OTU3
OTU3F 1 1
OTU3e1 OTU3e1
Version: D 295
The interfaces and LEDs on the OTU3F card panel are described in Table 6-207.
296 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-207 The OTU3F Card Panel

Working
ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating status; generally, ON
ACT indicator
indicates the poor communication between the card and the network
LED
management system.

Alarm
UA/- Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
indicator
NUA Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
LED
TX1 is for transmitting optical signals

with specific wavelengths to the
optical multiplexer card or optical add
Optical
TX1/R- / drop multiplexing card.
interfaces at
X1 RX1 is for receiving optical signals
WDM side 1
with specific wavelengths from the
TX2 is for transmitting optical signals
connector.
with specific wavelengths to the
optical multiplexer card or optical add
Optical
TX2/R- / drop multiplexer card.
interfaces at
X2 RX2 is for receiving optical signals
WDM side 2
with specific wavelengths from the
optical add / drop multiplexer card.
Note 1: The interfaces MO and MI are internal connected interfaces. Users need to connect the
interfaces MO and MI with fiber jumpers on the panel.

Version: D 297

GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
deviation
Maximum -20dB spectrum width nm NA NA
Transmit-
ter at dB 35 35
ratio
reference
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
point S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5
Transmit signal eye pattern – TBD TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA
dBm -14 -14
receiver Note 1
Receiver
Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0
at
reference Maximum reflectance of the
dB -27 -27
point R receiver
Receiving range of the receiver
Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568

wavelength.
The built-in PA module on the wavelength division side in the receiving direction of
the card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to the 40G
optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric Cooling),
the module can adjust its output power in the range of 0 to 10 dBm. See
Table 6-209 for specific specifications.
Table 6-209 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card

Note 2
Gain dB ≥ 25
298 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-209 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card (Continued)

parameter setting.
OTU3F (2.018.150) 368 × 90

OTU3F (2.200.589) 368 × 90
OTU3F (2.200.181) 368 × 90
Power Consumption
OTU3F (2.018.150) 88
OTU3F (2.200.589) 93
OTU3F (2.200.181) 98
The OTU4S card number is 2.200.307.
Version: D 299
6.5.12.1 Function
The card receives one optical signal (100GE / OTU4) from the client side, performs
the O / E conversion, mapping, framing and FEC encoding, and converts it into the
OTU4 signal of DWDM standard compliant wavelength. It outputs the converted
signal via the WDM side optical interface to the optical multiplexing card or the
optical add / drop multiplexing card for wavelength division multiplexing. The card
also fulfills the reverse process.
The OTU4S card has the following functions and features:
u OTN functions:
management system.
u Coherent reception: The receiver of the WDM side optical module performs the
coherent reception by mixing the local oscillator optical source and the input
optical signal so as to better protect the signal against various transmission
impairment.
u Electronic chromatic dispersion compensation and polarization mode

dispersion compensation: the built-in processing chip of the WDM side optical
module performs precise self-adaptive compensation for the chromatic
dispersion and polarization mode dispersion.

u Error correction coding: the FEC technology at the WDM side uses the soft-
decision low-density parity check (SD-LDPC) scheme with the overhead ratio
of 13% and the coding gain bigger than 11dB.
300 Version: D
6 Card




Note 1 Note 2
100GE
OTU4S 1 1 OTU4
OTU4
card in the system.
Version: D 301
6.5.12.4 Panel
See Figure 6-43 for the OTU4S card panel.
Table 6-213.
302 Version: D
6 Card

ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED

Client side signals to the client side equipment.
OUT / IN
optical interface IN is for receiving service signals

Wavelength connector.
optical interface
100G-
4I1-
Optical interface type – 100GBASE-LR4 BASE- 4I1-9C1F
9D1F
ER4
Single-channel signal rate Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339
Multiplexed signal rate Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736
λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59
Transmitter
Central wavelength range λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09
at reference nm
of transmitter λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63
point S
λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19
Version: D 303
Mean launched power of -2.7 to -2.5 to

dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -0.6 to +4.5
single channel (OMA) +2.9 +2.9
Eye pattern of single

–
channel
X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3
0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4
Extinction ratio of eye

dB ≥4 ≥8 ≥4 ≥8
pattern of single channel
Minimum sensitivity of the ≤ -21.4

Receiver at dBm ≤ -8.6 (OMA) ≤ -10.5 ≤ -23.2
single-channel receiver (OMA)
reference
Minimum overload of single
point R dBm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
channel

Optical line code – Coherent PM-QPSK
GHz ±2.5
Transmit- deviation
ter at Maximum -20dB spectrum width nm 0.5

reference Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35
point S ratio
304 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-215 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S Card (Continued)

dBm ≤ -18
receiver
dB ≤ -27
at receiver
Note 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
point R
ps 105 (0.5 dB OSNR cost)
value
Note 1: The receivable wavelength of the receiver should correspond to the transmitted
wavelength.
OTU4S 368 × 60
Power Consumption
OTU4S 160
The OTU4E card number is 2.200.537.
Version: D 305
6.5.13.1 Function
The card receives ten optical signals (STM-64 / OTU2 / 10GE LAN / OTU2e),
performs the O/E conversion and aggregates into the OTU4 signal of DWDM
standard compliant wavelength; outputs the converted signal via the WDM side
optical interface to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexing
card for WDM. The card also fulfills the reverse process.
u OTN functions:
management system.

decoding schemes.
wavelength division side optical interfaces.
u Pluggable optical module: The optical interfaces at the client side use the SFP+

306 Version: D
6 Card


Table 6-218 The OTU4E Card’s Service Type and Quantity

Note 1 Note 2
Card Interface Optical Signal Interface Optical Signal
STM-64
OTU2 OTU4
OTU4E 10 1
OTU2e
10GE LAN
The card converges ten STM64/OTU2/10GE LAN/OTU2E signals into one 100G
OTN signal and sends it to the line card in the OTN system. The card acts as an
independent OTU. See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and
positioning of the card in the system.
6.5.13.4 Panel
Version: D 307
Table 6-219.
308 Version: D
6 Card

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or major
UA/NUA
LED alarm).
The 1st to the TX is for transmitting service

OUT1 / IN1 to 10th client side signals to client side devices.
OUT10 / IN10 optical RX is for receiving service signals
interfaces from client side devices.
TX is for transmitting wavelength- The optical
TX/RX

nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Transmitter range
dB 30 – –
suppression ratio
Version: D 309

dBm -1 2 4
power

dBm -6 -1 0
power


dBm -14 -17 -24
≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
10-12)
point R
reference point R

GHz ±2.5
Transmit- deviation

dB 35
point S ratio
dBm ≤ -18
receiver
Receiver Minimum overload of the receiver dBm ≥0
at Maximum reflectance of the
dB ≤ -27
reference receiver
point R Receiving range of the receiver
Note 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
310 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-221 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4E Card (Continued)

value
wavelength.
OTU4E 368 × 60
Power Consumption
OTU4E 200
The OTU4F card number is 2.200.536.
6.5.14.1 Function
The card receives the OTU4 optical signal from the line side, performs O / E
conversion, overhead extraction and FEC encoding of the signal to convert it into
the OTU4 optical signal with DWDM standard compliant wavelength, and finally
outputs it to the optical multiplexer card or the optical add / drop multiplexer card for
wavelength division multiplexing. The card performs the regeneration of the OTU4
services and improves the quality of transmitted signals.
u OTN functions:
Version: D 311
management system.

u Error correction coding: Supports the super FEC coding mode.
u Loopback: Supports external loopback of signals at the WDM side optical

interfaces.


mode.
The OTU4F card’s service access capacity, including the service type and quantity,
312 Version: D
6 Card
West WDM Side West WDM Side East WDM Side East WDM Side
Note 1
OTU4F 1 OTU4 1 OTU4

6.5.14.4 Panel
Version: D 313
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OTU4F card panel are described in
Table 6-225.
314 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-225 Description of the OTU4F Card Panel

ACT
indicator LED ON indicates the poor communication between the card and

Alarm
UA/NUA alarm).
indicator LED
TX is for transmitting wavelength-specific

optical signals to the optical multiplexer
card or the optical add / drop multiplexing The optical
TX1 / RX1 WDM side
card. interface
to TX1 / optical
RX is for receiving wavelength-specific connector: the LC-
RX2 interface
optical signals from the optical type connector.

GHz ±2.5
Transmit- deviation

dB 35
point S ratio
Version: D 315

dBm ≤ -18
receiver
dB ≤ -27
at receiver
Note 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
point R
value
wavelength.
OTU4F 368 × 90
Power Consumption
OTU4F 250
6.6 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
The following introduces the functions, application in the system, working principles,
panels and specifications of the optical multiplexer / demultiplexer cards.
316 Version: D
6 Card
6.6.1 System Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture
The optical multiplexer / demultiplexer card is mainly used to multiplex or

demultiplex optical signals with different wavelengths. Before probing into the
specific functions of each optical multiplexer / demultiplexer card, it is necessary for
you to know the multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture of the system.
Figure 6-47 shows the unidirectional multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture of a

96-channel system. At the local end, the CE-band and the CO-band optical
multiplexer cards multiplex the 48 channels of CE-band and CO-band signals,
respectively, with a channel spacing of 100GHz. Next, the ITL50 card further
multiplexes the two multiplexed signals to output one 96-channel multiplexed signal
with a channel spacing of 50GHz. Then, after amplified by the OA card, the signal is
multiplexed with the local supervisory signal by the OSCAD card and transmitted to
the opposite end.
At the opposite end, the OSCAD card demultiplexes the main path signal and the
local supervisory signal. The supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for
processing. The main path signal is a 96-channel CE-band and CO-band multiplexed
signal with a channel spacing of 50GHz. It is amplified by the PA card and
demultiplexed into a CO-band signal and a CE-band signal by the ITL50 card. These
two signals are respectively sent to the CE-band and the CO-band demultiplexer
cards and further demultiplexed.
Figure 6-47 System Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture
Version: D 317
6.6.2 The OMU Series of Cards
The OMU series of cards include the OMU2 / 4 / 8, OMU40_O, OMU40_E,

OMU48_O and OMU_48_E cards.
They are applicable for the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.

OMU2 / 4 / 8 2.166.239 / 2.166.237 / 2.166.250
OMU48_O 2.166.244
OMU48_E 2.166.231
OMU40_O 2.166.245
OMU40_E 2.166.232
6.6.2.1 Function
Table 6-229 lists the OMU series of cards and the functions that they fulfill.
Table 6-229 The OMU Series of Cards and Functions
Wavelength
Series Card Name Function Band
Spacing
OMU48_O Multiplex 48 wavelength-specific CO

optical signals into a multi-
OMU48_E CE
wavelength signal.
100 GHz
OMU40_O Multiplex 40 wavelength-specific CO
optical signals into a multi-
OMU40_E CE
wavelength signal.
Multiplexes two single-wavelength /

OMU series OMU2 wavelength-group optical signals
into one multi-wavelength signal.
Multiplexes four single-wavelength /

OMU4 wavelength-group optical signals C -
into a multi-wavelength signal.
Multiplexes eight single-wavelength

OMU8 / wavelength-group optical signals
into a multi-wavelength signal.
318 Version: D
6 Card
card in the system.
6.6.2.3 Working Principle
The OMU series multiplexer cards supported by the FONST 5000 include the
OMU2, OMU4, OMU8, OMU40, and the OMU48 cards. The following introduces
their working principles using the OMU48 card as an example. Figure 6-48
illustrates the OMU48 card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-48 Composition and Signal Flow of the OMU48 Card
The optical interfaces 01 to 48 receive one single-wavelength optical signal each

and send them to the multiplexer. Then the multiplexer multiplexes the 48 single-
wavelength optical signals into one signal, and outputs the multiplexed signal via
the OUT optical interface.
The functions of each module in the figure are described as below:
u Optical module
Version: D 319
4 Multiplexes 48 input single-wavelength optical signals into one optical

signal.
4 The splitter splits light from the main path for power detection.
4 Monitors and controls the multiplexer’s operating temperature in real time.
u Communication and control module
4 Operates and controls the card.
4 Configures the card and reports faults.
4 Collects each module’s alarms and performance events, working status,

and power voltage detection information.
u Power supply module
Converts the DC power supply provided by the backplane into the power
supply needed by the modules of the card.
6.6.2.4 Panel
Figure 6-49 illustrates the panels of the OMU series of cards.
320 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-49 The OMU Series of Card Panels
As users can see from Figure 6-49:
u The panel of the OMU 2 / 4 / 8 card is half as wide as that of the OMU 40 / 48
card; that is, the OMU 2 / 4 / 8 card occupies one slot while the OMU 40 / 48
card occupies two slots.
u A clear working band and wavelength table is labeled on the panel of the OMU
40 / 48 card. For example, OMU48-E in the figure indicates that the card works
at the CE band.
Version: D 321
u Table 6-230 gives a description of the interfaces and indicator LEDs on the
panels of the OMU series of cards.
Table 6-230 Description of the OMU Series of Card Panels

Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally,
ACT
LED ON indicates poor communication between the card and

UA/NUA Alarm indicator LED alarm).
Inputs the 1st and the 2nd signals; usually connected to

Input ports for the 1st
IN1, IN2 the interfaces D1 to D8 on the WSSD card in other
and the 2nd signals.
OMU2 directions.
Output port for the Outputs the multiplexed signals; usually connected to the
OUT
multiplexed signal IN port of the OA card.
Input ports for the 1st Inputs the 1st to the 4th signals; usually connected to the
IN1 to IN4
to the 4th signals interfaces D1 to D8 on the WSSD card in other directions.
OMU4
OUT
Input ports for the 1st Inputs the 1st to the 8th signals; usually connected to the
IN1 to IN8
to the 8th signals interfaces D1 to D8 on the WSSD card in other directions.
OMU8
OUT
Input ports for the 1st Respectively inputs the 1st to the 40th single-wavelength
01 to 40 to the 40th single- signals; usually connected to the TX port of the line
wavelength signals interface card or the optical transponder card.
OMU40
Outputs the multiplexed signal; usually connected to the IN
Output interface for
OUT port on the OA card or to the A1 to A8 ports on the optical
the multiplexed signal
Input ports for the 1st Respectively inputs the 1st to the 48th single-wavelength
01 to 48 to the 48th single- signals; usually connected to the TX port of the line
wavelength signals interface card or the optical transponder card.
OMU48
Outputs the multiplexed signal; usually connected to the IN
OUT port on the OA card or to the A1 to A8 ports on the optical
the multiplexed signal
322 Version: D
6 Card
6.6.2.5 Specifications of the OMU Series of Cards
Table 6-231 Specifications of the OMU Series of Cards

OMU2 ≤ 3.8
OMU4 ≤7
Insertion loss OMU8 dB ≤ 11
OMU40 ≤ 6.5
OMU48 ≤ 6.5
Insertion loss difference dB ≤ 1.5
Adjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 25
Nonadjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 30
Integrated cross interference dB ≥ 23
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5
-1 dB width nm ≥ 0.4
-20 dB width nm ≤ 1.2
Central wavelength shift nm ±0.05
Table 6-232 Mechanical Parameters of the OMU Series of Cards
OMU8 368 × 30
OMU4 368 × 30
OMU2 368 × 30
OMU40 368 × 60
OMU48 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-233 Power Consumption of the OMU Series of Cards
OMU48_E 15
OMU40_E 15
OMU48_O 15
Version: D 323
Table 6-233 Power Consumption of the OMU Series of Cards (Continued)
OMU40_O 15
OMU2 2
OMU8 2
OMU4 2
6.6.3 The VMU Series of Cards
The VMU series of cards include the VMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O, and
VMU40_E cards.
They are applicable for the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.

VMU48_O 2.166.248
VMU48_E 2.166.235
VMU40_O 2.166.249
VMU40_E 2.166.236
6.6.3.1 Function
Table 6-234 lists the VMU series of cards and the functions they fulfill. Like the
OMU series of cards, the VMU series of cards multiplex signals. Besides, the VMU
series of cards can implement automatic equalization and pre-emphasis of optical
power for optical channels and therefore they should be selected when these
functions are required.
Table 6-234 The VMU Series of Cards and Functions
Wave-
Series Card Name Function Band length
Spacing
VMU48_O Multiplexes 48 wavelength-specific CO

optical signals into a multiple-
VMU series wavelength signal. 100 GHz
VMU48_E CE
Performs channel power
equalization.
324 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-234 The VMU Series of Cards and Functions (Continued)
Wave-
Series Card Name Function Band length
Spacing
VMU40_O Multiplexes 40 wavelength-specific CO

optical signals into a multiple-
wavelength signal.
VMU40_E CE
Performs channel power
equalization.
card in the system.
The VMU series multiplexer cards supported by the FONST 5000 include the
VMU40 card and the VMU48 card. The following introduces their working principles
using the VMU48 card as an example. Figure 6-50 illustrates the VMU48 card’s
composition and signal flow.
Version: D 325
Figure 6-50 Composition and Signal Flow of the VMU48 Card
The optical interfaces 01 to 48 receive a single-wavelength optical signal each. Next,

the VOA equalizes each signal’s optical power and inputs them into the multiplexer.
Then the multiplexer multiplexes the 48 single-wavelength optical signals into one
signal, and outputs the multiplexed signal via the OUT optical interface.
The functions of each module in the figure are as below:
u Optical module
4 Equalizes optical power for each single-wavelength optical signal before

they are multiplexed.
4 Multiplexes the 48 input single-wavelength optical signals into one optical

signal.
4 Monitors and controls the multiplexer’s operating temperature in real time.
4 Operates and controls the whole card.
326 Version: D
6 Card

Figure 6-51 illustrates the panels of the VMU series of cards.
Version: D 327
Figure 6-51 The VMU Series of Card Panels
328 Version: D
6 Card
On the panel of each VMU card, the working band and wavelength table for the card
are clearly marked. For example, in the figure, VMU48-E indicates that the card
works in the CE band; and the wavelength table of the 48 input single-wavelength
signals is provided on the upper part of the panel.
Table 6-235 gives a description of the interfaces and LEDs on the panels of the
VMU series of cards.
Table 6-235 Description of the VMU Series of Card Panels

ACT
LED generally, ON indicates poor communication between the

Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
UA/NUA Alarm indicator LED Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
alarms.
Respectively inputs the 1st
to the 48th single-
Input ports for the
wavelength signals;
1st to the 48th
01 to 48 usually connected to the
single-wavelength
TX port of the line interface
signals
card or the optical The optical interface
transponder card. connector: the LC-type
Outputs the multiplexed connector.
signal; usually connected
to the IN port on the OA
OUT the multiplexed
card or to the A1 to A8
signal
ports on the optical add /
Version: D 329
6.6.3.5 Specifications of the VMU Series of Cards
Table 6-236 Specifications of the VMU Series of Cards

Insertion loss dB ≤ 7.5Note 1
Ripple dB ≤ 0.75
VOA attenuation range dB 0 to 10
VOA response time ms ≤ 10
VOA attenuation accuracy dB ±0.8
Power-off attenuation value dB ≥ 10
Note 1: This is the test value when the attenuation value of VOA is set to 0 dB. The factory
default of the attenuation value for each channel is 0 dB. In practical applications, the
value can be adjusted according to engineering requirements.
Table 6-237 Mechanical Parameters of the VMU Series of Cards
VMU48 / 40 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-238 Power Consumption of the VMU Series of Cards
VMU48_E 40
VMU40_E 40
330 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-238 Power Consumption of the VMU Series of Cards (Continued)
VMU48_O 40
VMU40_O 40
6.6.4 The ODU Series of Cards
The ODU series of cards include the ODU2 / 4 / 8, ODU8T, ODU48_O, ODU48_E,
ODU40_O and ODU40_E cards.

ODU2 / 4 / 8 2.166.240 / 2.166.238 / 2.166.251
ODU8T Note 1 2.201.652
ODU48_O 2.166.246
ODU48_E 2.166.233
ODU40_O 2.166.234
ODU40_E 2.166.247
Note 1: The ODU8T card is used together with the WSS8MR card for fiber cut monitoring inside
the rack. For further information, please see The WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card.
6.6.4.1 Function
Table 6-239 lists the ODU series of cards and the functions they fulfill.
Table 6-239 Functions of the ODU Series of Cards
Wave-
Operating
Series Card Name Function length
Band
Spacing
ODU48_O Demultiplexes a multiple- CO

wavelength optical signal into 48
ODU series 100 GHZ
ODU48_E wavelength-specific optical CE
signals.
Version: D 331
Table 6-239 Functions of the ODU Series of Cards (Continued)
Wave-
Operating
Series Card Name Function length
Band
Spacing
ODU40_O Demultiplexes a multiple- CO

wavelength optical signal into 40
ODU40_E wavelength-specific optical CE
signals.
Demultiplexes one multi-

wavelength signal into two optical
ODU2 signals, each of which contains
the same wavelength information
(only splits the signal).

wavelength signal into four optical
signals, with each of the
ODU4 C –
demultiplexed signal contains the
same wavelength information
(only splits the signal).

wavelength signal into eight
ODU8 optical signals, each of which
contains the same wavelength
information (only splits the signal).
card in the system.
The ODU series demultiplexer cards supported by the FONST 5000 include the
ODU2 card, the ODU4 card, the ODU8 card, the ODU40 card, and the ODU48 card.
The following presents their working principle using the ODU48 card as an example.
Figure 6-52 illustrates the ODU48 card’s composition and signal flow.
332 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-52 Composition and Signal Flow of the ODU48 Card
The IN optical interface receives one multiplexed optical signal and sends it to the
demultiplexer. Then the demultiplexer demultiplexes the signal into 48 single-
wavelength optical signals, and outputs the demultiplexed signals via the optical
interfaces 01 to 48.
The functions of each module in the signal flow diagram for the ODU48 card are
described as below:
u Optical module
4 Demultiplexes the input one multiplexed optical signal into 48 single-

wavelength optical signals.
u Temperature control module
Monitors and controls the multiplexer’s operating temperature in real time.
Version: D 333

6.6.4.4 Panel
Figure 6-53 illustrates the panels of the ODU series of cards.
Figure 6-53 The ODU Series of Card Panels
334 Version: D
6 Card
u The panel of the ODU 2 / 4 / 8 card is half as wide as that of the ODU 40 / 48
card; that is, the ODU 2 / 4 / 8 card occupies one slot and the ODU 40 / 48 card
occupies two slots.
u A clear working band and wavelength table is labeled on the panel of the ODU
40 / 48 card. For example, ODU48-E in Figure 6-53 indicates that the card
works at the CE band; and the wavelength table for the signal of the
corresponding 48 single-wavelength output interfaces is on the top of the panel.
Table 6-240 gives a description of the interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panels
of the ODU series of cards.
Table 6-240 Description of the ODU Series of Card Panels
Blinking quickly indicates the normal

operating status.
ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating
status; generally, ON indicates poor

filtered.
(minor alarm).
Solid orange indicates both urgent and
non-urgent alarms.
Respectively outputs the 1st and the 2nd

OUT1, Output ports for the 1st signals; usually connected to the ports A1
OUT2 and the 2nd signals to A8 on the WSSM card in other
ODU2 directions.
Inputs the signal to be demultiplexed;
Input interface for the
IN usually connected to the OUT port on the
multiplexed signal
PA card.
Respectively outputs the 1st to the 4th
OUT1 Output ports for the 1st signals; usually connected to the ports A1
ODU4
to OUT4 to the 4th signals to A8 on the WSSM card in other
directions.
Version: D 335
Table 6-240 Description of the ODU Series of Card Panels (Continued)

multiplexed signal
PA card.
OUT1 Output ports for the 1st signals; usually connected to the ports A1
to OUT8 to the 8th signals to A8 on the WSSM card in other
ODU8 directions.
multiplexed signal
PA card.
signals; usually connected to the RX port of
01 to 40 to the 40th single-
the line interface card or the optical
wavelength signals
transponder card.
ODU40
Inputs the signals to be demultiplexed;
Input interface for the usually connected to the OUT port of the
IN
multiplexed signal PA card or to the D1 to D8 ports of the
WSS8D card.
channels of signals; usually connected to
01 to 48 to the 48th single-
the RX port of the line interface card or the
wavelength signals
optical transponder card.
ODU48
Inputs the signals to be demultiplexed;
Input interface for the usually connected to the OUT port of the
IN
multiplexed signal PA card or to the D1 to D8 ports of the
WSS8D card.
6.6.4.5 Specifications of the ODU Series of Cards
Table 6-241 Specifications of the ODU Series of Cards

ODU2 ≤ 3.8
ODU4 ≤7
Insertion loss dB
ODU8 ≤ 11
ODU40 ≤ 6.5
336 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-241 Specifications of the ODU Series of Cards (Continued)
ODU48 ≤ 6.5
Table 6-242 Mechanical Parameters of the ODU Series of Cards
ODU2 368 × 30
ODU4 368 × 30
ODU8 368 × 30
ODU40 368 × 60
ODU48 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-243 Power Consumption of the ODU Series of Cards
ODU48_E 15
ODU40_E 15
ODU48_O 15
ODU40_O 15
ODU8 2
ODU4 2
ODU2 2
Version: D 337
6.6.5 The WDM2 Card
The WDM2 card number is 2.200.815.
6.6.5.1 Function
The WDM2 card cooperates with the OTDR8 card to achieve the multiplexing /
demultiplexing of the 1625 nm testing optical signal and the main optical signals.
u In the Tx direction, the card multiplexes the main optical signals (1550nm signal
and 1510nm signal) from the OSCAD card and the 1625nm signal from the
OTDR8 card and sends the multiplexed signal to the optical line.
u In the Rx direction, the card split the 1625nm OTDR testing optical signal with
the main optical signal.
338 Version: D
6 Card
Note 1: The OTDR8 card supports testing eight line fibers. This figure indicates the application for
four fibers.
Figure 6-54 Positioning of the OTDR8 Card and WDM2 Card in the System
Figure 6-55 illustrates the WDM2 card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-55 Composition and Signal Flow of the WDM2 Card
Version: D 339
u In the Tx direction
The MAIN_I interface receives the main optical signals (includes the 1550 nm
signal and the 1510 nm signal) from the OSCAD card. The OTDR_I interface
receives the 1625 nm testing signal from the OTDR8 card.
Two signals are outputted via the LINE_O interface to the optical fiber line after
multiplexing.
u In the Rx direction
The WDM2 card receives optical fiber line signals via the LINE_I interface and
demultiplexes main optical signals and OTDR test signals.
The OTDR_O interface outputs the OTDR test signal and the MAIN_O
interface outputs the main optical signal.
See Figure 6-56 for the WDM2 card panel.
340 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-56 The WDM2 Card Panel
The indicator LEDs and interfaces on the panel of the WDM2 card are described in
Table 6-244.
Version: D 341
Table 6-244 Description of the WDM2 Card Panel
Input interface for

Receives the line signal from the
LINE_I the line optical
equipment at the far end
signal
Output interface
Outputs signal (1550 nm, 1510 nm and
LINE_O for the line optical
1625 nm multiplexed signal) to the line
signal
Input interface for Receives the main optical signal The optical
MAIN_I the main channel (including the 1550 nm signal and the interface
signal 1510 nm signal) from the OSCAD card connector: the
Output interface Outputs the main optical signal LC-type
MAIN_O for the main (including the 1550 nm signal and the connector.
channel signal 1510 nm signal) to the OSCAD card
Input interface for Receives the 1625 nm signal from the

OTDR_I
the OTDR signal OTDR8 card
Output interface
Sends the 1625 nm signal to the
OTDR_O for the OTDR
OTDR8 card
signal
6.6.5.5 Specifications of the WDM2 Card
Table 6-245 Specifications of the WDM2 Card
Operating wavelength nm 1550 / 1625

Wavelength Passband nm 1625±28
Range Reflex bandwidth nm 1500 to 1568
Transmission channel dB ≤1
Insertion loss
Reflection channel dB ≤ 0.8
Transmission channel dB ≥ 40
Isolation
Reflection channel dB ≥ 22
Flatness dB 0.35
Insertion loss thermal stability dB/℃ ≤ 0.007
Direction dB ≥ 50
Return loss dB ≥ 45
342 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-245 Specifications of the WDM2 Card (Continued)
PMD ps ≤ 0.10
Bearer optical power mW ≤ 300
Table 6-246 Mechanical Parameters of the WDM2 Card
WDM2 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-247 Power Consumption of the WDM2 Card
WDM2 0
6.6.6 The ITL50 Card
The ITL50 card number is 2.166.241.
6.6.6.1 Function
The ITL50 card is used to multiplex and demultiplex the signals in the CE band and
the CO band, i.e., implement the bidirectional conversion between the 100 GHz and
the 50 GHz channel spacing modes.
When configuring the FONST 5000 as an 80-channel or a 96-channel system,

users need to use the ITL50 card to convert between the 100 GHz and the 50 GHz
channel spacing modes. For the application of the ITL50 card, see System
Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture.
Version: D 343
Figure 6-57 illustrates the ITL50 card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-57 Composition and Signal Flow of the ITL50 Card
Two signals with a channel spacing of 100GHz from the CO-band and CE-band
multiplexer card are input via the ODD_I and the EVEN_I optical interfaces;
adjust the optical power difference value of two multiplexed signals via manual
variable attenuator, and multiplexed into one CO+CE-band signal with a channel
spacing of 50GHz by the comb filter. The multiplexed signal is output via the
MO_O optical interface.
The signal with a channel spacing of 50GHz from the optical amplifier card is
input via the MO_I interface. The signal is split into CO-band and CE-band
signals with a channel spacing of 100GHz by the comb filter. Then the signals
are output via the ODD_O and the EVEN_O optical interfaces.
6.6.6.4 Panel
The ITL50 card panel is shown in Figure 6-58.
344 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-58 The ITL50 Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the ITL50 card panel are described in
Table 6-248.
Version: D 345
Table 6-248 Description of the ITL50 Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major
UA/NUA
LED alarm).
Adjust the knob with a small flat screwdriver for fine

ATT knob for tuning of the optical power of the input signal on the
CE the input CE- EVEN_I interface.
band signal The clockwise turning decreases the attenuation and the
counter-clockwise turning increases the attenuation.
Adjust the knob with a small flat screwdriver for fine

ATT knob for tuning of the optical power of the input signal on the
CO the input CO- ODD_I interface.
band signal The clockwise turning decreases the attenuation and the
counter-clockwise turning increases the attenuation.
The multiplexed output signal is from the signal at the

Output interface
MO_I interface via demultiplexing.
EVEN_O for the CE-band
Generally, this interface is connected to the IN interface
signal
in the CE-band optical demultiplexer card.
Input interface
Generally, this interface is connected to the OUT
EVEN_I for the CE-band
interface of the CE-band optical multiplexer card.
signal
The output signal is from the signal at the MO_I interface

Output interface
via demultiplexing.
ODD_O for the CO-band
Generally, this interface is connected to the IN interface
signal
of the CO-band optical demultiplexer card.
Input interface
Generally, this interface is connected to the OUT
ODD_I for the CO-band
interface in the CO-band optical multiplexer card.
signal
346 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-248 Description of the ITL50 Card Panel (Continued)
Output interface
for the The multiplexed output signal is from the signals at the
MO_O
multiplexed EVEN_I and the ODD_I interfaces via multiplexing.
signal
Input interface
for the Generally, the input signal is from the PA card or the
MO_I
multiplexed WSS card.
signal
6.6.6.5 Specifications of the ITL50 Card
Table 6-249 Specifications of the ITL50 Card
Wavelength range at C-band nm 1528 to 1568

Input optical power range dBm ≤ 27
Input signal wavelength spacing GHZ 50
Output signal wavelength spacing GHZ 100
Multiplexing direction dB ≤4
Insertion loss
Demultiplexing direction dB ≤3
Optical return loss dB 40
Direction dB ≥ 55
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Maximum insertion loss difference between
dB ≤1
channels
PMD Ps ≤ 0.5
-1dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.1
Device PMD Ps ≤ 0.5
Version: D 347
Table 6-250 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card
ITL50 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-251 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card
ITL50 1
6.6.7 The OSCAD Card
The OSCAD card number is 2.166.243.
6.6.7.1 Function
Main functions of the OSCAD card are as follows:
u Basic functions: Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path optical signal
(1550nm) and the optical supervisory channel signal (1510nm).
u Online monitoring: Provides monitoring interfaces for the input and output line
signals. These interfaces are connected to the spectrum analyzer or the OPM
card, so that the input and output line signals’ spectrum performance can be
monitored without traffic interruption.
card in the system.
348 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-59 illustrates the OSCAD card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-59 Composition and Signal Flow of the OSCAD Card
The 1550nm main path signal from the OA card is input via the MAIN-A
interface and the 1510nm supervisory signal from the EOSC / OSC card is
input via the OSC_A interface.
The two signals are multiplexed by the 1510 / 1550 multiplexer and sent to the
splitter 1. The splitter splits the main optical signal and optical supervisory
signal via the LINE-O interface and the MON_O interface respectively.
The line signal is input to the splitter 2 on the card via the LINE-I interface. The
splitter splits the main optical signal and the optical supervisory signal.
The optical supervisory signal is output to the MON-I interface for spectrum
detection and monitoring. The main optical signal is sent to the 1510 / 1550
demultiplexer, demultiplexed into the main channel signal and the supervisory
signal, and outputted via the MAIN-D and the OSC-D interfaces respectively.
The panel desciption of the OSCAD card is shown in Figure 6-60.
Version: D 349
Figure 6-60 The OSCAD Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the card panel are described in Table 6-252.
350 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-252 Description of the OSCAD Card Panel
Working Blinking quickly indicates the normal operating status.

ACT
indicator LED ON or OFF indicates abnormal working status.

Solid red indicates a critical alarm or a major alarm.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm).
LED
alarms.
Input interface
Receives the line signal from the
LINE_I for the line
equipment at the far end
optical signal
The multiplexed output signal is the signal

Monitoring on the LINE_I interface via splitting. The
MON_I interface for the interface can be connected to the
input line signal spectrum analyzer or the OPM card for
monitoring the input line signal.
The output OSC signal is formed by

Output splitting the signal input from the LINE_I
OSC_D interface for the interface. The interface is connected with
OSC signal the WRX interface or the ERX interface on
the OSC card.
The optical
Output The multiplexed output signal is the signal
interface
interface for the input on the LINE_I interface via splitting.
MAIN_D connector:
main path Generally the interface is connected to the
the LC-type
signal IN interface on the PA card.
connector.
Output Outputs the signal to the line. The output
interface for the signal is formed by coupling the signals
LINE_O
line optical from the OSC_A and the MAIN_A
signal interfaces.
The multiplexed output signal is the signal
Monitoring
on the LINE_O interface via splitting. The
interface for the
MON_O interface can be connected to the
output line
spectrum analyzer or the OPM card for
signal
monitoring the output line signal.
Receives the OSC signal from the OSC

Input interface
card. The interface is connected to the
OSC_A for the OSC
WTX interface or the ETX interface on the
signal
OSC card.
Version: D 351
Table 6-252 Description of the OSCAD Card Panel (Continued)
Receives the main channel signal from

Input interface
the OA card. Generally the interface is
MAIN_A for the main
connected to the OUT interface on the OA
path signal
card.
6.6.7.5 Specifications of the OSCAD Card
Table 6-253 Specifications of the OSCAD Card
Operating wavelength nm 1510 / 1550

Wavelength Passband nm 1500 to 1520
Range Reflex bandwidth nm 1528 to 1568
Transmission channel dB ≤ 1.0
Insertion loss
Reflection channel dB ≤ 0.6
Transmission channel dB ≥ 44
Isolation
Reflection channel dB ≥ 22
Flatness dB ≤ 0.5
Direction dB ≥ 50
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps ≤ 0.10
Bearer optical power mW ≤ 300
Table 6-254 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card
OSCAD 368 × 30
352 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-255 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card
OSCAD 1
6.6.8 The EOSAD Card
The code of the EOSAD card is 2.201.429.
6.6.8.1 Function
u Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path optical signal (1550nm) and the
optical supervisory channel signal. Use together with the BEOSC and WOSAD
cards.
u Performs the single fiber in bi-direction transmission for the 1588 signal.
Comparing with the original OSCAD card, the Tx and Rx of the OSC signal are
in the same optical fiber (single optical fiber in bi-direction). The asymmetric
problem of the Tx and Rx path will not occur when the OSC signal is used when
performing the 1588 time synchronization.
The positioning of the card in the system is the same as that of the OSCAD card
(See Positioning of Cards in the System). The specific application is slightly different.
The BEOSC, WOSAD and EOSAD card should be used together. The structure
among cards is shown in Figure 6-61.
Version: D 353
Figure 6-61 The Structure Diagram of the BEOSC, WOSAD, EOSAD Cards
Figure 6-62 illustrates the EOSAD card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-62 Composition and Signal Flow of the EOSAD Card
354 Version: D
6 Card
The EOSAD card outputs the 1550nm main optical channel signal and the OSC2
signal to the LINE_I interface on the WOSAD card in the opposite end station via
the LINE_O interface; meanwhile receives OSC1 signal from the opposite end
station. Below is the working principle.
u The 1550nm main optical channel signal is input via the MAIN_A interface from
the local OA card; the OSC2 signal from the BEOSC card is input via the
OSC_EA interface. The 1550nm main optical channel signal and the OSC2
signal are output to the WOSAD card in the opposite end station via the
LINE_O interface.
u The OSC1 signal from the opposite end station is input via the LINE_O
interface and output to the BEOSC card via the OSC_ED interface. The
1550nm main optical channel signal from the opposite end station is input via
the LINE_I interface and output to the local PA card via the MAIN_D interface.
6.6.8.4 Panel
The EOSAD card panel is shown in Figure 6-63.
Version: D 355
Figure 6-63 The EOSAD Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the EOSAD card are described in
Table 6-256.
356 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-256 Description of the EOSAD Card Panel

Working
ACT ON or OFF indicates abnormal working status and the
indicator LED
card is not monitored by the OTNM2000.

Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
Receives the 1550nm main optical

Input interface channel signal from the opposite end
LINE_I for the line equipment on the line side and connects
optical signal with the LINE_O interface on the opposite
WOSAD card.
Output
Outputs the 1550nm main optical channel
interface for the
MAIN_D signal and connects with the IN interface
main channel
on the PA card.
signal
Output The optical

Outputs OSC1 signal and connects with interface
OSC_ED interface for the
the ERX interface on the BEOSC card. connector:
OSC signal
the LC-type
Interface for the Inputs the OSC1 signal and outputs OSC2
connector.
signals in the and 1550nm main optical channel signals;
LINE_O
single fiber in connects with the LINE_I interface on the
bi-direction line opposite WOSAD card.
Input interface
Inputs OSC2 signal and connects with the
OSC_EA for the OSC
ERX interface on the BEOSC card.
signal
Input interface Inputs the 1550nm main channel signal.

MAIN_A for the main Generally the interface is connected with
channel signal the OUT interface on the OA card.
Version: D 357
6.6.8.5 Specifications of the EOSAD Card
Table 6-257 Specifications of the EOSAD Card
Operating wavelength nm 1484.5 to 1568

1550 nm optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568
OSC1 ≤ 1.8
dB
Insertion loss OSC2 ≤ 1.4
1550 ≤ 1.0
Flatness dB ≤ 0.5
Wavelength thermal stability nm/℃ ≤ 0.002
Direction dB ≥ 50
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) PS ≤ 0.15
Maximum optical power mW 300
Table 6-258 Mechanical Parameters of the EOSAD Card
EOSAD 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-259 Power Consumption of the EOSAD Card
EOSAD 1
6.6.9 The WOSAD Card
The WOSAD card number is 2201428.
358 Version: D
6 Card
6.6.9.1 Function
u Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path optical signal (1550nm) and the
optical supervisory channel signal. Use together with the BEOSC and EOSAD
cards.
u Performs the single fiber in bi-direction transmission for the 1588 signal.
Comparing with the original OSCAD card, the Tx and Rx of the OSC signal are
in the same optical fiber (single optical fiber in bi-direction). The asymmetric
problem of the Tx and Rx path will not occur when the OSC signal is used when
performing the 1588 time synchronization.
The positioning of the card in the system is the same as that of the OSCAD card
(See Positioning of Cards in the System). The specific application is slightly different.
The BEOSC, WOSAD and EOSAD card should be used together. The structure
among cards is shown in Figure 6-64.
Version: D 359
Figure 6-65 illustrates the WOSAD card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-65 Composition and Signal Flow of the WOSAD Card
The WOSAD card receives the 1550nm main optical channel signal and OSC2
signal from the EOSAD card in the opposite end station via the LINE_I interface;
meanwhile outputs the OSC1 signal to the opposite end station. Below is the
working principle.
u The 1550nm main optical channel signal and the OSC2 signal from the
opposite end station are input via the LINE_I interface. The main optical
channel signal is output to the local PA card via the MAIN_D interface; the
OSC2 signal is output to the BEOSC card via the OSC_WD interface.
u The OSC1 signal from the BEOSC card is input via the OSC_WA interface and
output to the EOSAD card in the opposite end station via the LINE_O interface.
u The 1550nm main optical channel signal from the local OA card is input via the
MAIN_A interface and is output to the EOSAD card in the opposite end station
via the LINE_O interface.
6.6.9.4 Panel
The WOSAD card panel is shown in Figure 6-66.
360 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-66 The WOSAD Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the WOSAD card are described
in Table 6-260.
Version: D 361
Table 6-260 Description of the WOSAD Card Panel

Working
ACT ON or OFF indicates abnormal working status and the
indicator LED
card is not monitored by the OTNM2000.

Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
Output Inputs the 1550nm main optical channel

interface for the signals to the line; connects with the
LINE_O
line optical LINE_I interface on the opposite EOSAD
signal card.
Input interface Inputs the 1550nm main channel signal.
MAIN_A for the main Generally the interface is connected with
channel signal the OUT interface on the OA card.
Input interface
Inputs OSC1 signal and connects with the
OSC_WA for the OSC The optical
WTX interface on the BEOSC card.
signal interface
Interface for the Outputs the OSC1 signal and inputs connector:
signals in the OSC2 and 1550nm main optical channel the LC-type
LINE_I
single fiber in signals; connects with the LINE_O connector.
bi-direction line interface on the opposite EOSAD card.
Output
Outputs OSC2 signal and connects with
OSC_WD interface for the
the WRX interface on the BEOSC card.
OSC signal
Output
Outputs the 1550nm main optical channel
interface for the
MAIN_D signal and connects with the IN interface
main channel
on the PA card.
signal
362 Version: D
6 Card
6.6.9.5 Specifications of the WOSAD Card
Table 6-261 Specifications of the WOSAD Card
Operating wavelength nm 1484.5 to 1568

1550 nm optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568
OSC1 ≤ 1.8
dB
Insertion loss OSC2 ≤ 1.4
1550 ≤ 1.0
Flatness dB ≤ 0.5
Wavelength thermal stability nm/℃ ≤ 0.002
Direction dB ≥ 50
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) PS ≤ 0.15
Maximum optical power mW 300
Table 6-262 Mechanical Parameters of the WOSAD Card
WOSAD 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-263 Power Consumption of the WOSAD Card
WOSAD 1
6.6.10 The BIDI Card
The code of the BIDI card is 2.201.314.
Version: D 363
6.6.10.1 Function
The BIDI card is used together with the OSCAD card to multiplex and demultiplex
the main optical channel signal (1550nm) and the OSC signal (1510nm) for
performing the single fiber in bi-direction transmission of the OSC signal
(transmitting the 1588 time synchronization signal), so as to solve the problem of Tx
and Rx asymmetric path when performing the 1588 time synchronization with the
OSC signal.
See Figure 6-67 for the application in the system.
Figure 6-67 Application of the BIDI Card in the System
Figure 6-68 illustrates the BIDI card’s composition and signal flow.
364 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-68 Composition and Signal Flow of the BIDI Card
The BIDI card transmits the OSC signal in single fiber in bi-direction via the
circulator, i.e., the OSC signals in the Tx and Rx ends are transmitted in one optical
fiber. The 1510nm signal from the OSC card is input via the OSC_A interface and
the 1510nm signal from the same line is output via the OSC_D interface.
6.6.10.4 Panel
The BIDI card panel is shown in Figure 6-69.
Version: D 365
Figure 6-69 The BIDI Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the BIDI card are described in
Table 6-264.
366 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-264 Description of the BIDI Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major
UA / NUA
LED alarm).
Input interface
for the local first
OSC_A1 card; connects with the WTX interface
OSC optical
or the ETX interface on the OSC card.
signal
Input interface
for the local
OSC_A2 card; connects with the WTX interface
second OSC
or the ETX interface on the OSC card.
optical signal
Output
Outputs OSC signal and connects with
interface for the
OSC_D1 the WRX interface or the ERX interface
local first OSC The optical
on the OSC card.
optical signal interface
Output connector: the
interface for the Outputs OSC signal and connects with LC-type
OSC_D2 local second the WRX interface or the ERX interface connector.
OSC optical on the OSC card.
signal
Inputs / outputs the signal to the

Bi-directional
OSCAD card; connects with the OSC_
COM1 signal interface
D or OSC_A interface on the OSCAD
in the first line
card.
Bi-directional Inputs / outputs the signal to the
signal interface OSCAD card; connects with the OSC_
COM2
in the second D or OSC_A interface on the OSCAD
line card.
Version: D 367
6.6.10.5 Specifications of the BIDI Card
Table 6-265 Specifications of the BIDI Card

1470nm to
dB ≤ 1.2
1525nm
1525nm to
Insertion loss dB ≤1
1565nm
1565nm to
dB ≤ 1.2
1610nm
1470nm to
dB ≥ 30
1525nm
1525nm to
Isolation dB ≥ 40
1565nm
1565nm to
dB ≥ 35
1610nm
Cross interference dB ≤ 50
Table 6-266 Mechanical Parameters of the BIDI Card
BIDI 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-267 Power Consumption of the BIDI Card
BIDI 1
368 Version: D
6 Card
6.7 Optical Add / Drop Multiplexing Card
The following describes the functions, applications in the system, working principles,
panels, and specifications of the optical add / drop multiplexing cards.
Card Name Function Channel Spacing
WSS4M Implements dynamic configurable multiplexing 50GHz

function for any wavelength to any port. The
WSS8M difference is that the two provide different add port 50GHz or 100GHz
quantities.
WSS4D Provides dynamic configurable dropping function and 50GHz

fixed adding function. The difference is the two
WSS8D 50GHz or 100GHz
provide different drop port quantities.
SOAD4 / Supports unidirectional adding / dropping of 4 /8

–
SOAD8 wavelengths.
Implements the WSS8M functions, supports dynamic

FWSS8M flexible grid and provides dynamic channel bandwidth 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
accommodation at a minimum of 12.5 GHz.
Has basically the same functions and principles with
FWSS20M the FWSS8M card, only differing in add port 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
quantities provided.
Implements the WSS8D functions, supports dynamic

FWSS8D flexible grid and provides dynamic channel bandwidth 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
accommodation at a minimum of 12.5 GHz.
FWSS20D the FWSS8D card, only differing in add port 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
quantities provided.
Adds eight 1310 optical receive modules based on

WSS8MR the WSS8M card, so as to ascertain whether fiber cut 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
occurs inside the rack.
Adds eight 1310 laser transmit modules based on the
WSS8DT WSS8D card, so as to ascertain whether fiber cut 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
occurs inside the rack.
Implements the WSS8M+WSS8D functions, supports
dynamic flexible grid and provides dynamic channel
WSS8T 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
bandwidth accommodation at a minimum of 12.5
GHz.
WSS20T the WSS8T card, only differing in port quantities 37.5 + n×12.5 (flex)
provided.
Version: D 369
6.7.1 The WSS8M Card / WSS4M Card
The WSS8M card and the WSS4M card basically perform the same functions based
on the same principle, only different in the adding port quantity and channel spacing.

WSS8M (100 GHz, 1×9) 2.159.067
WSS8M (50 GHz, 1×9) 2.159.075
WSS4M (50 GHz, 1×5) 2.159.070
6.7.1.1 Function
u Basic functions: Implements dynamic reconfigurable multiplexing of any

wavelength signal to any interface. The WSS8M card and the WSS4M card can
multiplex signals of any wavelength or wavelength group from 9 adding
interfaces and 5 adding interfaces respectively, and output the multiplexed
signal to the line. Both cards can cooperate with the demultiplexer cards to drop
the line input signals locally.
u Optical power equalization: Equalizes the optical power for each wavelength
via the network management system.
u Supports the wavelength channel spacing of 50 GHz or 100 GHz.
card in the system.
The following introduces the working principles of the optical add / drop multiplexing
cards using the WSS8M card as an example.
370 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-70 illustrates the WSS8M card’s composition and signal flow. The WSS4M
card’s composition and signal flow are basically the same as those of the WSS8M
card; only that the adding interfaces of the WSS4M card are MI and A1 to A4.
Figure 6-70 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8M Card
The multiplexed signal from the main channel is input via the LI interface. Next,
the signal is split into two signals by the 1:2 splitter. One signal is output via the
DROP interface. The other is further split into two signals by the 1:2 splitter.
These two signals are output via the EO and the MO interfaces, respectively. In
other words, the signals outputted from the MO, EO, and DROP interfaces
have the same wavelength as that of the signal input from the LI interface, only
different in power allocation.
The signals from the A1 to A8 and MI interfaces are coupled by the WSS
module and output via the LO interface. These signals can be either added
locally or in other line directions. Users can configure to input the signal of any
wavelength or wavelength group via the MI and A1 to A8 interfaces through the
See Figure 6-71 for the WSS8M and WSS4M card panels.
Version: D 371
Figure 6-71 The WSS8M and the WSS4M Card Panels
See Table 6-268 for the description of the WSS8M and WSS4M card panels.
372 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-268 Description of the WSS8M and WSS4M Card Panels

Working status ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status;
ACT
card and the EMS.
major alarm).
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (a minor
LED
alarm).
alarms.
Output interface Outputs the main optical channel signals.
LO for the line Generally, this interface is connected with the IN interface
signal on the OA card.
Input interface Inputs the main optical channel signals.
LI for the line Generally, this interface is connected with the OUT
signal interface on the PA card.
Cooperates with the ODU series of cards in local
Local dropping dropping.
DROP
interface Generally, the interface is connected with the IN interface
on the ODU series of cards.
External
EO dropping Extends and outputs the signal to other line directions.
interface
Inputs the single-wavelength or wavelength-group signal
to be multiplexed into the main path.
Eight adding
Note 1
A1 to A8 Generally the interface is connected to the TX interface
ports
on the line interface card or the optical transponder card,
or with the OUT interface on the OMU series of cards.
Input interface
for the
Generally the interface is used to cascade with other
multiplexed
cards.
MI signal (can also
Usually the interface is connected with the MO interface
be used as the
on another optical add / drop multiplexing card.
9th adding
interface)
Version: D 373
Table 6-268 Description of the WSS8M and WSS4M Card Panels (Continued)
Output interface Generally the interface is used to cascade with other

for the cards.
MO
multiplexed Usually the interface is connected with the MI interface
signal on another optical add / drop multiplexing card.
Note 1: The WSS4M have four add ports, which are A1 to A4.
6.7.1.5 Specifications of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card
Table 6-269 Specifications of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card
Specification Specification
Item Unit
(WSS8M) (WSS4M)
Channel spacing GHZ 50 / 100 50

Dimension – 1×9 1×5
Isolation dB ＞ 35 ＞ 35
An/MI→LO dB < 6.5 < 6.5
Note 1
Insertion loss LI→LO dB < 13 < 13
LI→DROP dB < 3.5 < 3.5
LI→MO/EO dB < 7.5 < 7.5
Optical return loss dB ＞ 40 ＞ 40
Attenuation range dB 0 to 28 0 to 28
Note 1: To measure the insertion loss (LI→LO), connect the MI and MO ports of the card using
an optical fiber.
Table 6-270 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card
WSS8M 368 × 60
WSS4M 368 × 60
374 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-271 Power Consumption of the WSS8M / WSS4M Card
WSS8M 11
WSS4M 11
6.7.2 The WSS8D Card / WSS4D Card
The WSS8M card and the WSS4M card basically perform the same functions based
on the same principle, only different in the dropping port quantity.

WSS8D (100 GHz, 1×9) 2.159.068
WSS8D (50 GHz, 1×9) 2.159.074
WSS4D (50 GHz, 1×5) 2.159.069
6.7.2.1 Function
u Basic functions: Implements dynamic reconfigurable dropping and fixed adding

wavelengths. The WSS8D card and the WSS4D card can demultiplex any
wavelength or wavelength group of the line signal and output it to any
designated port of the nine dropping ports and the five dropping ports
respectively. Both cards can cooperate with the multiplexer cards to multiplex
the signals from the local end and those from other line directions and output
the multiplexed signal to the line.
u Supports the wavelength channel spacing of 50 GHz.
card in the system.
Version: D 375
The following introduces the working principles of the WSS8D / WSS4D cards using
the WSS8D card as an example.
Figure 6-72 illustrates the WSS8D card’s composition and signal flow. The WSS4D
card’s composition and signal flow are basically the same as those of the WSS8D
card; except that the dropping interfaces of the WSS4D card are MO and D1 to D4.
Figure 6-72 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8D Card
The main channel signal is input via the LI interface. Then the single
wavelengths or wavelength groups to be terminated locally are outputted via
the interfaces MO and D1 to D8 according to the network management system
configuration. The ones not to be added or dropped locally are outputted via the
MO interface. You can configure to output any wavelength or wavelength group
via the MO and D1 to D8 interfaces through the network management system.
The signals from the MI and EI interfaces are coupled by the coupler into one
signal. Then the signal is further coupled by the coupler with the single-
wavelength or wavelength-group signal added locally via the ADD interface.
Then the coupled signal is output to the line via the LO interface.
6.7.2.4 Panel
Figure 6-73 illustrates the panel of the WSS8D card and the WSS4D card.
376 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-73 The WSS8D and the WSS4D Card Panels
The WSS8D card panel and the WSS4D card panel are described in Table 6-272.
Version: D 377
Table 6-272 Description of the WSS8D and the WSS4D Card Panels

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
Output interface Outputs the main channel signal.
LO for the line Generally the interface is connected with the IN interface
Input interface Inputs the main channel signal.
LI for the line Generally the interface is connected with the OUT
Cooperates with the OMU series of cards in local adding.
Local adding
ADD Generally the interface is connected to the OUT interface
interface
on the OMU series of cards.
External adding
EI Extends and inputs the signal from other line directions.
interface
Outputs the single-wavelength or wavelength-group
signal to be locally terminated or passed through.
Eight dropping
D1 to D8 Note 1 Generally the interface is connected to the RX interface
interfaces
or to the IN interface on the ODU series of cards.
Input interface Generally the interface is used to cascade with other
for the cards.
MI
multiplexed Usually the interface is connected with the MO interface
signal of another optical add / drop multiplexing card.
Output interface
for the
Generally the interface is used to cascade with other
multiplexed
cards.
MO signal (can also
Usually the interface is connected with the MI interface of
be used as the
another optical add / drop multiplexing card.
9th dropping
interface)
Note 1: The WSS4D card has four dropping interfaces: D1 to D4.
378 Version: D
6 Card
6.7.2.5 Specifications of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card
Table 6-273 Specifications of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card
Item Unit
(WSS8D) (WSS4D)
Channel spacing GHZ 50 / 100 50

Operating wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
Dimension – 1×9 1×5
Isolation dB ＞ 35 ＞ 35
LI→Dn/MO dB < 6.5 < 6.5
Insertion loss LI→LONote 1 dB < 13 < 13
MI/EI→LO dB < 7.5 < 7.5
ADD→LO dB < 3.5 < 3.5
an optical fiber.
Table 6-274 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card
WSS8D 368 × 60
WSS4D 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-275 Power Consumption of the WSS8D / WSS4D Card
WSS8D 11
WSS4D 11
Version: D 379
6.7.3 The SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card
The SOAD4 / SOAD8 card performs the function of unidirectional adding / dropping
of four / eight wavelength signals, and is used in the nodes where services are
added / dropped and are not likely to change frequently. Application of this card in
the system is shown in Figure 6-74.
Figure 6-74 Application of the SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card in the System
6.7.3.1 Function
u Basic function: Supports unidirectional adding / dropping of four wavelengths.
u Cascade port: Provides the cascade port for cascade with other SOAD4 /
SOAD8 cards to perform bidirectional adding / dropping of services.
u Wavelength query: Supports query of the wavelength assignment at the add /

drop port by checking the card’s status.
card in the system.
380 Version: D
6 Card
The following introduces the working principles of the SOAD8 / SOAD4 card, taking
the SOAD8 card as an example.
Figure 6-75 illustrates the SOAD8 card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-75 Composition and Signal Flow of the SOAD8 Card
The LI port receives the multiplexed signal from the opposite end station. The
OADM optical module then demultiplexes eight wavelength signals from the
multiplexed signal and outputs them via the DROP1 to DROP8 ports. The pass-
through wavelength signals not output from the DROP ports are output from the MO
port.
The MI port receives the signals from the MO ports of other SOAD8 cards. The eight
wavelength signals input from the ports ADD1 to ADD8 and the signal input from the
MI port are multiplexed by the OADM optical module and then output via the LO port.
Version: D 381
Note:
The power of the eight adding wavelength signals input from the ADD1 to
ADD8 ports can be equalized through an 8-port manual variable
attenuator. This can guarantee the optical power flatness of each
wavelength channel is within its appropriate range.
6.7.3.4 Panel
See Figure 6-76 for the SOAD4 / SOAD8 card panel.
382 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-76 The SOAD8 / SOAD4 Card Panel
See Table 6-276 for the SOAD4 / SOAD8 card panel.
Version: D 383
Table 6-276 Description of the SOAD4 / SOAD8 Card Panel
Blinking quickly indicates the normal

operating status.
Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating
ACT
LED status; generally, ON indicates poor
EMS.
filtered.
(minor alarm).
urgent alarms.
Used to equalize the power of the adding

signals.
Note 1
Manual variable
ATT1 to 8 Clockwise rotation: attenuation increases;
attenuator
counterclockwise rotation: attenuation
decreases.
Inputs the main channel signal.
Input interface for
LI Generally the interface is connected with the
the line signal
OUT interface on the PA card.
Outputs the main channel signal.
LO Generally the interface is connected with the
the line signal
IN interface on the OA card.
Usually connected with the MO port on other
MI Cascade input port
optical add / drop multiplexing cards.
Usually connected with the MI port on other

MO Cascade output port
optical add / drop multiplexing cards.
Used to input wavelength signals to be

ADD1 to 8 Note 2 Adding interface
added.
Used to output wavelength signals to be
DROP1 to 8 Note 3 Dropping interface
dropped.
Note 1: The SOAD4 card has four manual variable attenuators ATT1 to 4.
Note 2: The SOAD4 card has four adding interfaces ADD1 to 4.
Note 3: The SOAD4 card has four dropping interfaces DROP1 to 4.
384 Version: D
6 Card
6.7.3.5 Specifications of the SOAD8 Card
Table 6-277 Specifications of the SOAD8 Card
Channel spacing GHZ 100

Isolation dB ＞ 28
An→LO (n ≤ 8) dB <4
Insertion loss MI→LO dB <4

IN→Dn (n≤8) dB <4
LI→MO dB <4
Attenuation range dB 0 to 30
Table 6-278 Mechanical Parameters of the SOAD8 Card
SOAD8 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-279 Power Consumption of the SOAD8 Card
SOAD8 2
6.7.3.6 Specifications of the SOAD4 Card
Table 6-280 Specifications of the SOAD4 Card
Channel spacing GHZ 100

Isolation dB ＞ 28
Version: D 385
Table 6-280 Specifications of the SOAD4 Card (Continued)
An→LO (n ≤ 4) dB <4
Insertion loss MI→LO dB <4

IN→Dn (n≤4) dB <4
LI→MO dB <4
Table 6-281 Mechanical Parameters of the SOAD4 Card
SOAD4 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-282 Power Consumption of the SOAD4 Card
SOAD4 2
6.7.4 The FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card
The FWSS8M and the FWSS20M cards have basically the same functions and
principles, only differing in drop port quantities provided.

FWSS8M 2.201.749
FWSS20M 2.201.706
386 Version: D
6 Card
6.7.4.1 Function
u Basic functions: Implements dynamic reconfigurable multiplexing of any

wavelength signal to any interface. The FWSS8M / FWSS20M card can
multiplex signals of any wavelength or wavelength group from 9 / 20 add ports,
and output the multiplexed signal to the line. Both cards can cooperate with the
demultiplexer cards to drop the line input signals locally.
via the EMS.
u The WSS module can support fixed 50 GHz grid channel bandwidth and
dynamic flexible grid as well. It provides dynamic channel bandwidth
accommodation at a minimum of 12.5 GHz, so as to meet over 100 G rate
application, optimize bandwidth configuration and cater for future bandwidth
requirements.
card in the system.
6.7.4.3 Working Principles
The following introduces the working principles of the FWSS8M and the FWSS20M
cards.
FWSS8M
Figure 6-77 shows the composition and signal flow of the FWSS8M card.
Version: D 387
Figure 6-77 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS8M Card
The multiplexed signal of the main (optical) path accessed from the LI interface
is split into two signals by the 1:2 splitter. One is output from the DROP
interface, and the other is further split into two by the 1:2 splitter. The two
signals are output via the EO and MO interfaces. To sum up, the signals output
from the MO, EO and DROP interfaces have the same wavelengths, only
varying in power distribution.
The signals from the A1 to A8 and MI interfaces are coupled via the WSS
module and output from the LO interface. These signals can be those added
locally or from other line directions. The signal of any wavelength or wavelength
group can be input via the A1 to A8 and MI interfaces through the OTNM2000.
FWSS20M
Figure 6-78 shows the composition and signal flow of the FWSS20M card.
388 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-78 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS20M Card
The signals from the A1 to A20 interfaces are coupled via the WSS module and
output from the LO interface. These signals can be those added locally or from other
line directions. The signal of any wavelength or wavelength group can be input via
the A1 to A20 interfaces through the OTNM2000.
See Figure 6-79 for the FWSS8M and FWSS20M card panels.
Version: D 389
Figure 6-79 The FWSS8M and FWSS20M Card Panels
See Table 6-283 for the description of the FWSS8M and FWSS20M card panels.
390 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-283 Description of the FWSS8M and FWSS20M Card Panels

ACT
card and the OTNM2000.
major alarm).
Alarm indicator
LED
alarm).
alarms.
Cooperates with the ODU series of cards in local
Local dropping dropping.
DROP
interface Generally, the interface is connected with the IN interface
on the ODU series of cards.
External
EO dropping Extends and outputs the signal to other line directions.
interface
Eight adding Inputs the single-wavelength or wavelength-group signal
A1 to A8
interfaces to be multiplexed into the main path.
Generally the interface is connected to the TX interface
20 adding
A1 to A20 on the line interface card or the optical transponder card,
interfaces
for the cards.
MI

for the cards.
MO
Version: D 391
6.7.4.5 Specifications of the FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card
Table 6-284 Specifications of the FWSS8M Card
Channel spacing GHZ 37.5 + n × 12.5 (flex)

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB ＞ 25
An/MI→LO dB < 6.5
Note 1
Insertion loss LI→LO dB < 13
LI→DROP dB < 3.5
LI→MO/EO dB < 7.5
Optical return loss dB ＞ 40
an optical fiber.
Table 6-285 Specifications of the FWSS20M Card

Dimension – 1 × 20
Isolation dB ＞ 25
Insertion loss A1 to A20→LO dB 2 to 6.5
Table 6-286 Mechanical Parameters of the FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card
FWSS8M 368 × 60
FWSS20M 368 × 60
392 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-287 Power Consumption of the FWSS8M / FWSS20M Card
FWSS8M 65
FWSS20M 65
6.7.5 The FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card
The FWSS8D and the FWSS20D cards have basically the same functions and

FWSS8D 2.201.750
FWSS20D 2.201.707
6.7.5.1 Function
u Basic functions: Implements dynamic configurable dropping function and fixed

adding function. The WSS8D / WSS20D card can output any wavelength or
wavelength group of the line signal to any designated port among the 9 / 20
drop ports. Both cards can cooperate with the multiplexer cards to multiplex the
signals from the local end and those from other line directions and output the
multiplexed signal to the line.
via the EMS.
u The WSS module can support fixed 50 GHz grid channel bandwidth and
dynamic flexible grid as well. It provides dynamic channel bandwidth
accommodation at a minimum of 12.5 GHz, so as to meet over 100 G rate
application, optimize bandwidth configuration and cater for future bandwidth
requirements.
Version: D 393
card in the system.
The following introduces the working principles of the FWSS8D and the FWSS20D
cards.
FWSS8D
Figure 6-80 shows the composition and signal flow of the FWSS8D card.
Note 1: The WSS module supports dynamic flexible grid and provides dynamic channel
bandwidth accommodation at a minimum of 12.5 GHz.
Figure 6-80 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS8D Card
The main channel signal is input via the LI interface. Then the single
wavelengths or wavelength groups to be terminated locally are output via the
interfaces D1 to D8 according to the EMS configuration. The ones not to be
added or dropped locally are output via the MO interface. The WSS module
supports outputting any wavelength or wavelength group via the MO and D1 to
D8 interfaces through the EMS.
394 Version: D
6 Card
The signals from the MI and EI interfaces are coupled by the coupler into one
signal. Then the signal is further coupled by the coupler with the single-
wavelength or wavelength-group signal added locally via the ADD interface.
Then the coupled signal is output to the line via the LO interface.
FWSS20D
Figure 6-81 shows the composition and signal flow of the FWSS20D card.
Figure 6-81 Composition and Signal Flow of the FWSS20D Card
The main channel signal is input via the LI interface. Then the single wavelengths or
wavelength groups to be terminated locally are output via the interfaces D1 to D20
according to the EMS configuration. The WSS module supports outputting any
wavelength or wavelength group via the D1 to D20 interfaces through the EMS.
See Figure 6-82 for the FWSS8D and FWSS20D card panels.
Version: D 395
Figure 6-82 The FWSS8D and FWSS20D Card Panels
See Table 6-288 for the description of the FWSS8D and FWSS20D card panels.
396 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-288 Description of the FWSS8D and FWSS20D Card Panels

ACT
major alarm).
Alarm indicator
LED
alarm).
alarms.
LO for the line Generally, this interface is connected with the IN
signal interface on the OA card.
Cooperates with the OMU series of cards in local adding.
Local adding
ADD This port is usually connected with the OUT port on the
port
OMU series of cards.
External adding
EI Extends and inputs the signal from other line directions.
interface
Eight dropping Outputs the single-wavelength or wavelength-group
D1 to D8
interfaces signal to be locally terminated or passed through.
Generally the interface is connected to the RX interface
20 dropping
D1 to D20 on the line interface card or the optical transponder card,
interfaces
for the cards.
MI

for the cards.
MO
Version: D 397
6.7.5.5 Specifications of the FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card
Table 6-289 Specifications of the FWSS8D Card

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB ＞ 25
LI→Dn/MO dB < 6.5
Note 1
LI→LO dB < 13
Insertion loss
MI/EI→LO dB < 7.5
ADD→LO dB < 3.5
an optical fiber.
Table 6-290 Specifications of the FWSS20D Card

Dimension – 1 × 20
Isolation dB ＞ 25
Insertion loss LI→D1 to D20 dB 2 to 6.5
Table 6-291 Mechanical Parameters of the FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card
FWSS8D 368 × 60
FWSS20D 368 × 60
398 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-292 Power Consumption of the FWSS8D / FWSS20D Card
FWSS8D 65
FWSS20D 65
6.7.6 The WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card
The WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T card adds the module transmitting and receiving
the 1310 nm optical signals based on the WSS8M / WSS8D / ODU8 card, so as to
ascertain whether fiber cut occurs inside the cabinet.

WSS8MR (flex, 1×9) 2201649
WSS8DT (flex, 1×9) 2201648
ODU8T 2201652
6.7.6.1 Function
The WSS8MR, WSS8DT and ODU8T cards can monitor fiber cut inside the rack via
the 1310 nm Tx / Rx optical module, in addition to the basic functions of the WSS8M,
WSS8D and ODU8 cards.
The fiber cut monitoring model inside the rack is WSS8MR + WSS8DT and
WSS8MR + ODU8T.
WSS8MR
Provides eight ports that can add any C or C+ band wavelength. Any wavelength or
wavelength group of C or C+ band input locally can be multiplexed after certain
attenuation and then output via one port. The adding and attenuation of the
WSS8MR wavelength can be configured through the EMS. Together with the
tunable wavelength laser, the dynamic configuration based on wavelength adding
and automatic equalization of the OADM equipment can be achieved.
Version: D 399
The 1310 nm Rx optical module embedded in the card can receive the mixed optical
signals of 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths from the WSS8DT / ODU8T card and
split the 1310 nm and 1550 nm optical signals. The power of the 1310 nm optical
signals can be monitored to ensure fiber cut monitoring inside the rack. The 1550
nm optical signals can be transmitted to the built-in WSS module for wavelength
adding.
WSS8DT
Any wavelength or wavelength group of C or C+ band can be dropped to any port of

D1 to D8 or passed transparently through MO after certain attenuation without
manual plugging / unplugging of fiber. The dropping and attenuation of the WSS8DT
wavelength can be configured through the EMS to perform the dynamic
configuration based on wavelength dropping and automatic equalization of the
OADM equipment.
The 1310 nm transmit module embedded in the card can transmit the laser's optical
signal. The optical signal is then coupled with the 1510 nm dropping wavelength
from the WSS module and transmitted to the corresponding WSS multiplexer card.
ODU8T
The multiplexed optical signal is split evenly into eight optical signals to output. The
eight 1310 nm transmit optical module embedded in the card are mixed with the
1510 nm wavelength and then sent to the WSS8MR card for monitoring fiber cut
inside the rack.
card in the system.
WSS8MR
Figure 6-83 shows the composition and signal flow of the WSS8MR card.
400 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-83 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8MR Card
The mixed signals of 1550 nm and 1310 nm from A1 to A8 are split into eight 1550
nm signals and eight 1310 nm signals by the splitter.
u The eight 1550 nm signals and the signals input from the MI interface are
coupled via the WSS module and output from the LO interface. These signals
can be those added locally or from other line directions. The signal of any
wavelength or wavelength group can be input via the A1 to A8 and MI
interfaces through the OTNM2000.
u The receive module can monitor the power of the eight 1310 nm signals for
fiber cut monitoring inside the subrack.
WSS8DT
Figure 6-84 shows the composition and signal flow of the WSS8DT card.
Version: D 401
Figure 6-84 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8DT Card
u The main channel signal is input via the LI interface. Then the single
wavelengths or wavelength groups to be terminated locally are output as eight
1550 nm signals according to the EMS configuration. The ones not to be added
or dropped locally are output via the MO interface. The WSS module supports
outputting any wavelength or wavelength group via the MO and eight 1550 nm
signal interfaces through the EMS configuration.
u The transmit module transmits eight 1310 nm signals and eight 1550 nm
signals via the coupler through the D1 to D8 interfaces.
ODU8T
Figure 6-85 shows the composition and signal flow of the ODU8T card.
402 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-85 Composition and Signal Flow of the ODU8T Card
u Optical module
4 One multiplexed input optical signal is demultiplexed into eight 1550 nm

single-wavelength optical signals.
4 The splitter splits signals from the main optical path for power monitoring.
u Transmit module
Outputs eight 1310 nm wavelength optical signals.
u Coupler
Couples eight 1310 nm and eight 1550 optical signals and outputs via the
OUT1 to OUT8 interfaces.
u Temperature control module
Monitors and controls the multiplexer’s operating temperature in real time.
u Communication control module
4 Operates and controls the entire card.
Version: D 403

See Figure 6-86 for the WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T card panels.
404 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-86 The WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T Card Panels
See Table 6-293 for the description of the WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T card
panels.
Version: D 405
Table 6-293 Description of the WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T Card Panels

ACT
major alarm).
Alarm indicator
LED
alarm).
alarms.
Eight adding
A1 to A8 Generally the interface is connected to the TX interface
interfaces
Outputs the single-wavelength or wavelength-group
signal to be locally terminated or passed through.
Eight dropping
D1 to D8 Generally the interface is connected to the RX interface
interfaces
for the cards.
MI

for the cards.
MO
406 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-293 Description of the WSS8DT, WSS8MR and ODU8T Card Panels (Continued)
Output ports for Respectively outputs the 1st to the 8th signals; usually
OUT1
the 1st to the 8th connected to the ports A1 to A8 on the WSSM card in
to OUT8
signals other directions.
Input interface
for the Inputs the signal to be demultiplexed; usually connected
IN
multiplexed to the OUT port on the PA card.
signal
6.7.6.5 Specifications of the WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card
Table 6-294 Specifications of the WSS8MR Card
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1350 and 1528 to 1568

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB ＞ 35
Insertion loss MI→LO dB < 6.5
Detection accuracy of optical power (1310
dB ±1.0
nm receive module)
Table 6-295 Specifications of the WSS8DT Card
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1350 and 1528 to 1568

Dimension – 1×9
Isolation dB ＞ 35
Insertion loss LI→MO dB < 6.5
Version: D 407
Table 6-295 Specifications of the WSS8DT Card (Continued)
Detection -10 to +40℃ dB ±1.0

accuracy of +40 to +50℃ dB ±2.0
optical power
(1310 nm +50 to +60℃ dB ±3.0
transmit module)
Table 6-296 Specifications of the ODU8T Card

Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1350 and 1528 to 1568
Insertion loss dB ≤ 11
-1 dB spectrum width nm ≥ 0.4
-20 dB spectrum width nm ≤ 1.2
Detection -10 to +40℃ dB ±1.0
accuracy of +40 to +50℃ dB ±2.0
optical power
(1310 nm +50 to +60℃ dB ±3.0
transmit module)
Table 6-297 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card
WSS8MR 368 × 60
WSS8DT 368 × 60
ODU8T 368 × 30
408 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-298 Power Consumption of the WSS8MR / WSS8DT / ODU8T Card
WSS8MR 80
WSS8DT 80
ODU8T 15
6.7.7 The WSS8T / WSS20T Card
The WSS8T and the WSS20T cards have basically the same functions and

WSS8T 2.201.819
WSS20T 2.201.818
6.7.7.1 Function
The functions of the WSS8T / WSS20T card are basically the same with those of the
FWSS8M / FWSS20M card and FWSS8D / FWSS20D card. The only difference is
that the Tx and Rx are combined in the same module in the WSS8T / WSS20T card.
card in the system.
The following introduces the working principles of the WSS8T / WSS20T card using
the WSS8T card as an example.
Version: D 409
Figure 6-87 illustrates the composition and signal flow of the WSS8T card. The
composition and signal flow of the WSS20T card are basically the same with those
of the WSS8T card, only differing in the port quantities.
Figure 6-87 Composition and Signal Flow of the WSS8T Card
The signal from the LI interface is demultiplexed via the WSS module and
output via the D1 to D9 interfaces. The reverse process is fulfilled at the same
time. The signal of any wavelength or wavelength group can be input via the D1
to D9 interfaces through the OTNM2000.
The signals from the A1 to A9 interfaces are coupled via the WSS module and
output via the LO interface. The reverse process is fulfilled at the same time.
The signal of any wavelength or wavelength group can be input via the A1 to
A9 interfaces through the OTNM2000.
See Figure 6-88 for the WSS8T and WSS20T card panels.
410 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-88 The WSS8T and WSS20T Card Panels
See Table 6-299 for the description of the WSS8T and WSS20T card panels.
Version: D 411
Table 6-299 Description of the WSS8T and WSS20T Card Panels

ACT
major alarm).
Alarm indicator
LED
alarm).
alarms.
9 adding
A1 to A9 interfaces
Generally the interface is connected to the TX interface
A1 to A20 20 adding
interfaces
Outputs single wavelength signal or wavelength group to
9 dropping
the line interface card.
D1 to D9 interfaces
Generally the interface is connected to the RX interface
D1 to D20 20 dropping
interfaces
or to the IN interface on the OMU series of cards.
6.7.7.5 Specifications of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card
Table 6-300 Specifications of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card
Item Unit
(WSS8T) (WSS20T)
Channel spacing GHZ 50 50

Operating wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
Dimension – 1×9 1 × 20
412 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-300 Specifications of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card (Continued)
Item Unit
(WSS8T) (WSS20T)
Port isolation dB ＞ 25 ＞ 25
LI→Dn dB <7 <7
Insertion loss
An→LO dB <7 <7
Table 6-301 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card
WSS8T 368 × 60
WSS20T 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-302 Power Consumption of the WSS8T / WSS20T Card
WSS8T 65
WSS20T 65
6.8 Optical Amplification Card
panels and specifications of the optical amplification cards of the FONST 5000.
6.8.1 The OA, PA and HOA Cards
The OA, PA and HOA cards mainly amplify the line signal’s optical power, so as to
compensate the attenuation caused by devices or the line, prolong the optical
signal’s transmission distance or improve the receiver’s sensitivity. Cards with
different gains and saturation output can be provided according to different project
requirements.
Version: D 413
The cards are applicable for the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000.

OA (single slot) 2.802.118
OA (double slot) 2.802.119
PA 2.802.117
HOA 2.802.122
6.8.1.1 Function
The optical amplification cards mainly amplify the line signal’s optical power, so as
to compensate the attenuation caused by devices or the line, prolong the optical
signal’s transmission distance or improve the receiver’s sensitivity. These cards
implement some common functions as follows:
u Basic functions: Amplifies the line signal’s optical power. The card can amplify
the optical signals in each channel within the C-band and support transmission
in different span sections without electronic regeneration.
u Input optical power equalization: Users can equalize the EDFA input optical
power using the built-in EVOA module in the card, so as to make the EDFA
work in the gain locked area and the output optical power match the expected
value preconfigured in the EMS.
u Eye protection function: The OA / HOA, PA, and OSC / EOSC cards cooperate
to implement this function. When the PA card and the OSC / EOSC card at the
opposite end both detect an LOS alarm, they return an APR command to the
local end. On receiving the command, the OA / HOA card at the local end
immediately activates the eye protection function and reduces the output power
to a safe range so as to prevent the strong light from hurting eyes of operators.
u Online optical performance monitoring: Provides the online monitoring interface

for outputting a small amount of light to the spectrum analyzer or the OPM card,
so as to monitor the multiplexed optical signal’s spectrum performance without
traffic interruption.
u Laser shutdown: Users can turn on or off the laser using the EMS flexibly, or
simply press down the CUT button on the card panel to turn off the laser for
easy testing, operation and maintenance.
414 Version: D
6 Card
The differences between the OA card, the PA card and the HOA card include the
different EDFA modules they use and their different application scenarios, as listed
in Table 6-303. Cards with different gains and saturation output can be provided
according to different project requirements.
Table 6-303 Functions of the OA / PA / HOA Card
Application Saturated Output

Card Typical Gain (dB)
Scenario (dBm)
Generally used at the 21 18, 23, 25, 27

OA
Tx end of the line. 24 18, 23, 25, 27
Generally used at the
HOA 27 18, 23, 25, 27
Tx end of the line.
Generally used at the
PA 14 14, 25
Rx end of the line.
See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and positioning of the OA
/ PA / HOA card in the system.
The OA card, PA card and HOA card work with basically the same principles.
Figure 6-89 illustrates the component parts and signal flow of each card.
Figure 6-89 Composition and Signal Flow of the OA / PA / HOA Card
u EVOA module
Version: D 415
4 The signal to be amplified is input to the EVOA module via the IN port.
Next the BMU module calculates the optical power value that needs to be
attenuated by the EVOA module according to the signal’s current optical
power value and the pre-set value in the network management system and
then writes the value into the EVOA module.
4 The EVOA module makes equalization based on the result so that the
optical power value output from the VGA module can reach the pre-set
value in the network management system.
u EDFA module
The optical signals are transmitted from the EVOA module to the EDFA module.
After being amplified, 99% of the optical signals are output from the OUT port,
while 1% of them are output from the MON port for online performance
monitoring.
u BMU module
4 The BMU module also monitors the EDFA module’s working status,
including the pump source’s drive current, the refrigerator’s cooling current,
the pump source’s tube core temperature, the input optical power, and the
output optical power. Each performance item has a normal range. If the
range is exceeded, the BMU module will generate urgent or non-urgent
alarm information to light this card’s alarm indicator LED and report various
performance and alarm values to the network management system.
4 In addition, the BMU module acts as an agent which executes the laser
shutdown and the eye protection commands committed by the network
management system.
6.8.1.4 Panel
See Figure 6-90 for the panels of the OA, PA, and HOA cards.
416 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-90 The OA / PA / HOA Card Panel
The definitions of the indicator LEDs and interfaces on the panels of the OA card,
the PA card and the HOA card are the same; see Table 6-304 for details.
Version: D 417
Table 6-304 Description of the OA / PA / HOA Card Panel

Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally, ON
ACT
LED indicates poor communication between the card and the

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
Laser shutdown Pressing down the button will turn off the card’s laser;
CUT
button releasing the button will turn on the laser.
The port can be connected with the

spectrum analyzer or the OPM card to
Monitoring port for
MON monitor the spectrum of the output signal.
the output signal
The output power ratio between this
interface and the OUT interface is 1:99.
Monitoring port for
PMON the pump output
monitor the spectrum of the pump output
optical signal
signal.
Inputs the optical signal to be amplified. The optical

For the OA card, the port is usually interface
Input interface for connected with the OUT port on the OMU connector: the
IN the main optical or VMU series of cards. LC-type
path For the PA card, the port is usually connector.
connected with the MAIN_D port on the
OSCAD card.
Outputs the amplified optical signal.
For the OA card, the port is usually
Output interface connected with the MAIN_A port on the
OUT for the main OSCAD card.
optical path For the PA card, the port is usually
connected with the IN port on the ODU
series of cards.
418 Version: D
6 Card
6.8.1.5 Specifications of the OA / PA / HOA Cards
Table 6-305 Specifications of the OA Card
Item Unit Specification Remark

Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –
Saturated output optical power dBm 21 24 –

18, 20, 23, 25, 18, 20, 23, 25,
Target gain dB –
27, 30, 33 27, 30, 33
Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5 25°C
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5
–
Dynamic gain variation (DGV) dB/dB ≤3
Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –
Output power with no input power dBm 6±0.5 –

Input power monitoring range dBm -25 to 3
Output power monitoring range dBm -10 to 22
Split ratio at the output power
– 1% 0.5%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least
–
two channels with output power of dB ≤3
no less than 7 dBm)
Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated output
dB 0.5
optical power
EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
Table 6-306 Specifications of the PA Card

Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –
Saturated output optical power dBm 14 13 –

Target gain dB 10, 14, 17, 20 25 –
Gain flatness dB ≤1 25°C
Valid noise figure dB ≤ 5.5
–
Dynamic gain variation (DGV) dB/dB ≤3
Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –
Version: D 419
Table 6-306 Specifications of the PA Card (Continued)

Output power with no input power dBm -16 to -12 –
Input power monitoring range dBm -33 to 0
Output power monitoring range dBm -15 to 15
– 1%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least
–
two channels with output power of dB ≤3
no less than 7 dBm)

Error range of saturated output
dB 0.5
optical power
EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
Table 6-307 Specifications of the HOA Card

Input optical power range dBm -20 to 2
Saturated output optical power dBm 27
Target gain dB 24
Maximum noise figure (NF) dB ≤6
Dynamic gain tilt (DGT) dB/dB ≤3
Gain tilt dB 0
Polarization dependent gain (DG) variation dB ≤ 0.3
Pump leakage at output dBm ≤ -30
Pump leakage at input dBm ≤ -30
Output power upon reporting of pump OFF dBm ≤ -45
Optical input return loss at EDFA shutdown dB ≥ 40
Optical output return loss at EDFA shutdown dB ≥ 40
Output power (APR) dB 8
Output power with no input power dBm 6
Error range of saturated output optical power dB 0.5
420 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-307 Specifications of the HOA Card (Continued)
Split ratio of the output power monitoring

– 0.5%
interface
3 dB add and drop us 300
Gain lock set-up time 9 dB add and drop us 500
Transient gain 3 dB add and drop dB 0.7
overshoot and 9 dB add and drop dB 0.9

undershoot 15 dB add and drop dB 1.5
Transient gain error dB 1
Table 6-308 Mechanical Parameters of the OA / PA / HOA Card
OA 368 × 30
OA 368 × 60
PA 368 × 30
HOA 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-309 Power Consumption of the OA / PA / HOA Card
OA 20
PA 11
HOA 60
6.8.2 The VGA Card
The VGA card has basically the same functions as the traditional amplification card.
It adds the gain adjustment function, that is, it can provide different gain and
saturation output upon the project demand.
Applicable to the FONST 3000 / 4000 / 5000. The card number is 2201752.
Version: D 421
6.8.2.1 Function
Similar to the traditional amplification card, the VGA card adds the gain adjustment
function based on line demands.
The VGA card can be divided into four types based on different gain ranges: 16dB
to 21dB, 20dB to 25dB, 24dB to 29dB, and 28dB to 33dB. Besides, the card can be
divided into two types based on the maximum output optical power: 21 dBm and 24
dBm.
VGA card in the system.
Figure 6-91 shows the composition and signal flow of the VGA card.
Figure 6-91 Composition and Signal Flow of the VGA Card
u EVOA module
4 The to-be-amplified signal is input to the EVOA module via the VIN port.
power value and the pre-set value in the EMS and then writes the value
into the EVOA module.
422 Version: D
6 Card
optical power value output from the VGA module can match the pre-set
value in the EMS.
4 The attenuated signal from the VOUT interface goes to the IN interface of
the EDFA module via manual optical jumper.
u EDFA module
The optical signals are transmitted from the EVOA module to the EDFA module.
After being amplified, 99% of the optical signals are output from the OUT port,
while 1% of them are output from the MON port for online performance
monitoring.
u BMU module
4 The BMU module also monitors the EDFA module’s working status,
the pump source’s die temperature, the input optical power, and the output
optical power. Each performance item has a normal range. If the
performance value is beyond the normal range, the BMU module will
generate an urgent or non-urgent alarm to illustrate this card’s alarm
indicator LED and report the corresponding performance and alarm to the
EMS.
4 In addition, the BMU module acts as an agent which executes the laser
shutdown and the eye protection commands committed by the EMS.
See the VGA card panel in Figure 6-92.
Version: D 423
Figure 6-92 The VGA Card Panel
The definitions of the indicator LEDs and interfaces on the VGA card panel are the
same. For details, see Table 6-310.
424 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-310 Description of the VGA Card Panel

Working status ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally, ON
ACT
indicator LED indicates poor communication between the card and the
OTNM2000.
Solid red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major
Alarm indicator
NUA alarm).
LED
Laser shutdown Pressing down the button will turn off the card’s laser;
CUT
button releasing the button will turn on the laser.

Monitoring port for
MON monitor the spectrum of the output signal.
the output signal
The output power ratio between this
interface and the OUT interface is 1:99.
VOA output optical
The port is usually connected with the
IN to EDFA input The optical
VOUT interface.
interface interface
Output interface Outputs the amplified optical signal. connector: the
OUT for the main The port is usually connected with the LC-type
optical path MAIN_A port on the OSCAD card. connector.
Input interface for Inputs the optical signal to be amplified.
VIN the main optical The port is usually connected with the
path MAIN_D port on the OSCAD card.
Output interface
The port is usually connected with the IN
VOUT for main optical
interface.
signal via VOA
6.8.2.5 Specifications of the VGA Card
Table 6-311 Common Specifications of the VGA Card
Parameter Unit Specification
Optical wavelength range (C-band 48-channel) nm 1528 to 1568

Nominal output signal optical power (POUT) dBm 21, 24
Saturated output signal optical power dB POUT+0.5
Version: D 425
Table 6-311 Common Specifications of the VGA Card (Continued)
Gain flatness Note 1 dB 1.0 to 1.5

Gain slope Note 2 dB -2 to 0
Note 3
Gain adjustment accuracy – ±0.5
Power monitoring accuracy Note 4 dB ±0.3
Inherent insertion loss of VOA dB 0.8
Power-off state of VOA – Bright
Split ratio of the output power monitoring interface – 1%

Output power at pump OFF report Note 5 dBm -45
Note 6
Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5/8±0.5/
Mode 1 dBm +6±0.5
LOSS mode Note 7
Mode 2 dBm Laser off
Dynamic gain tilter (DGT) dB/dB 3
Polarization dependent gain (PDG) variation dB 0.3
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) – 0.3
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps 0.5
Pump leakage at output dBm -30
Pump leakage at input dBm -30
Optical input return loss at EDFA shutdown dB 40
Optical output return loss at EDFA shutdown dB 40
Gain lock set-up time 9 dB add and drop us
Note 8 600
Transient gain 3 dB add and drop dB 0.8
overshoot and 9 dB add and drop dB 1.2

Note 9
undershoot 15 dB add and drop dB 1.5
Transient gain error dB 1
Saturated output power
W 35 (room temperature)
Total power = 21 dBm
consumption Saturated output power
W 45 (room temperature)
= 24 dBm
426 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-311 Common Specifications of the VGA Card (Continued)
Gain lock Note 10 – Supported
Note 1: At total air temperature (TAT), GF ≤ 1.5. If Title = 0, GF ≤ 1.

Note 2: A gain slope ranging from -2 to 0 should be adjusted. The default value is -1.
Note 3: It is the gain adjustment accuracy at total air temperature within a full range of input
optical power.
Note 4: It is the power monitoring accuracy at total air temperature within a full range of input
optical power.
Note 5: The report pump-off power. The actual output power is not required when the input
optical power is large.
Note 6: The APR power is tunable.
Note 7: Two modes are provided for selection.
Note 8: Under mean gain of all channels, VOA locked state and input wave form rising (falling)
time as 100 us, it is the time needed by gain locked at a nominal gain with a deviation
of ±5%.
Note 9: It is the same as Note 8.
Note 10:It is the default value.
Table 6-312 VGFA481521-11
Total input optical power range dBm -30 to +6

Total output optical power range dBm -15 to 21
Note 1
Input no light alarm threshold dBm -33
Gain adjustment range dB 15 to 25
G = 15 dB 9.2
G = 16 dB 8.0
G = 17 dB 7.2
G = 18 dB 6.5
NF Note 2
G = 19 – 6.2
G = 20 – 5.8
21 ≤ G ≤ 23 dB 5.5
24 ≤ G ≤ 25 dB 5.2
Note 1: The default value is used. This value is also configurable.
Note 2: It is the value when the total input power is larger than or equal to -22 dBm. Not
required when the total input power is less than -22 dBm.
Version: D 427
Table 6-313 VGFA482221-11
Total input optical power range dBm -37 to -1

Note 1
Input no light alarm threshold dBm -40
G = 22 dB 6.3
G = 23 dB 5.9
G = 24 dB 5.6
G = 25 dB 5.4
NF Note 2
G = 26 – 5.3
G = 27 – 5.2
G = 28 – 5.1
29 ≤ G ≤ 32 dB 5.0
Table 6-314 VGFA482821-11
Total input optical power range dBm -37 to -7

Input no light alarm threshold Note 1 dBm -40
G = 28 dB 5.5
G = 29 dB 5.4
Note 2
NF G = 30 dB 5.3
G = 31 dB 5.2
32 ≤ G ≤ 38 dB 5.0
Table 6-315 Mechanical Parameters of the VGA Card
VGA 368 × 30
428 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-316 Power Consumption of the VGA Card
VGA 65
6.8.3 The MSA Card
The MSA card number is 2.200.038.
6.8.3.1 Function
u Main functions: Performs power amplification and dispersion compensation for

the optical signals in each channel within the C band so that the amplified and
compensated optical signals could have better power and dispersion
performance suitable for long-haul transmission.
4 The MSA card uses the VGA (Variable Gain Amplifier) module that can
amplify the line signal optical power and compensate the line and device
loss. The VGA module is a dual amplifier with intermediate access that
acts similarly as the PA card plus the OA card.
4 A DCM can be applied between the amplifiers at two levels of the VGA
module to perform the dispersion compensation for line optical signals.
4 The module can compensate different intermediate stage insertion loss

automatically according to different gains.
u Input optical power equalization: The user can equalize the VGA input optical
power using the built-in EVOA module in the card, so as to make the VGA work
in the gain locked area and the output optical power matches the expected
value preset in the network management system.
Version: D 429
u Eye protection function: The MSA card and the OSC / EOSC cards cooperate
to implement this function. When the amplification card and the OSC / EOSC
card at the opposite end detect a LOS alarm, they return an APR command to
the local end. On receiving the command, the MSA card at the local end
immediately starts the eye protection function and reduces the output power
below 0dBm lest the strong light should hurt one’s eyes.

for outputting a small quantity of light to the spectrum analyzer or the OPM card,
u Remote upgrade of card software function: The card software can be upgraded
remotely through the network management system.
u Laser shutdown: Users can turn on or off the laser using the network
management system flexibly, or simply press down the CUT button on the card
panel to turn off the laser. This facilitates testing, operations, and maintenance.
The MSA card can perform two levels of power amplification of line optical signals.
And the card can also access the DCM for dispersion compensation of the line
optical signals. The MSA card is suitable for OLA and OTM stations, and its
applications in the system are shown in Figure 6-93 and Figure 6-94.
u At OLA stations, the MSA card can work together with the PA + OA cards or
with another MSA card.
Figure 6-93 The Application Scenario of the MSA Card at an OLA Station
430 Version: D
6 Card
u The MSA card can also be used at OTM stations (end stations).
Figure 6-94 The Application Scenario of the MSA Card at an OTM Station
Note:
The OSC cards in Figure 6-93 and Figure 6-94 can be replaced with the
EOSC cards if necessary.
Figure 6-95 illustrates the MSA card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-95 Composition and Signal Flow of the MSA Card
Version: D 431
u EVOA module
4 The signal to be amplified is input to the EVOA module via the IN port.
power value and the pre-set value in the network management system and
then writes the value into the EVOA module.
optical power value output from the VGA module could reach the pre-set
value in the network management system.
u VGA module
4 The optical signals are transmitted from the EVOA module to the VGA
module. After being amplified, 99% of the optical signals are output from
the MOUT port, while 1% of them are output from the MMON port for
online performance monitoring.
4 The optical signals that are processed in the DCM module for dispersion
compensation are input into the VGA module via the MIN port. After the
level-2 amplification, 99% of the optical signals are transmitted from the
OUT port, while 1% of them are output from the OMON port for online
performance monitoring.
u BMU module
4 The BMU module also monitors the VGA module’s working status,
the pump source’s tube core temperature, the input optical power, and the
output optical power. Each performance item has a normal range. If the
range is exceeded, the BMU module will generate urgent or non-urgent
alarm information to light this card’s alarm indicator LED and report various
performance and alarm values to the network management system.
4 In addition, the BMU module acts as an agent, which executes the laser
shutdown and the eye protection commands committed by the network
management system.
The MSA card panel is shown in Figure 6-96.
432 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-96 The MSA Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the MSA card panel are described in Table 6-317.
Version: D 433
Table 6-317 Description of the MSA Card Panel

status.
ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating
status; generally, ON indicates the poor
communication between the card and the network
management system.

the card.
or major alarm).
Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor
alarm).
alarms.
Pressing down the button will turn off the card’s
CUT Laser shutdown button
laser; releasing the button will turn on the laser.
The port can be connected with the spectrum

Monitoring port for the analyzer or the OPM card to monitor the spectrum
OMON output signal of level-2 of the output signal. The output power ratio
VGA amplifier between this interface and the OUT interface is
1:99.
The port can be connected with the spectrum
Monitoring port for the analyzer or the OPM card to monitor the spectrum
MMON output signal of level-1 of the output signal. The output power ratio
VGA amplifier between this interface and the MOUT interface is
1:99.
Outputs the optical signals after level-2
Optical interface for the amplification.
OUT output signal of level-2 The port is usually connected with the MAIN_A
VGA amplifier port on the OSCAD card or the IN port on the ODU
card.
Outputs the optical signals after level-1
Optical interface for the
amplification.
MOUT output signal of level-1
The port is usually connected with the IN port of
VGA amplifier
the DCM.
434 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-317 Description of the MSA Card Panel (Continued)
Optical interface for the Inputs the optical signals for level-2 amplification.
MIN input signal of level-2 The port is usually connected with the OUT port of
VGA amplifier the DCM.
Inputs the optical signals for amplification.
Optical interface for the
The port is usually connected with the OUT port on
IN input signal of level-1
the OMU and VMU card or the MAIN_D port on the
VGA amplifier
OSCAD card.
6.8.3.5 Specifications of the MSA Card
Table 6-318 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 21 dBm)
Item Unit VGA-16/21-8-21 VGA-20/25-9-21 VGA-24/29-10-21 VGA-28/33-11-21

Optical
wavelength
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
range (C-band
48-channel)
Gain flatness dB <1 <1 <1 <1

Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 9.1 ≤ 7.2 ≤6 ≤ 5.4
Dynamic gain
dB/dB ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5
variation (DGV)
Output power
dBm -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5
(APR)
Output power
with no input dBm +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5
power
Input power
dBm -32 to 5 -32 to 1 -32 to -3 -32 to -7
monitoring range
Output power
dBm -16 to 21 -12 to 21 -8 to 21 -4 to 21
monitoring range
Split ratio at the

output power – 1% 1% 1% 1%
monitoring port
Power
monitoring dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
accuracy
Version: D 435
Table 6-318 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 21 dBm) (Continued)

Optical power
overshoot (at
least two
channels with dB ≤3 ≤3 ≤3 ≤3
output power of
no less than 7
dBm)
Nominal gain
dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
error range
Error range of
saturated output dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
optical power
Table 6-319 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 24 dBm)

Optical
wavelength
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
range (C-band
48-channel)
Gain flatness dB <1 <1 <1 <1

Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 9.1 ≤ 7.2 ≤6 ≤ 5.4
Dynamic gain
dB/dB ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5
variation (DGV)
Output power
dBm -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5
(APR)
Output power
with no input dBm +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5
power
Input power
dBm -32 to 8 -32 to 4 -32 to 0 -32 to -4
monitoring range
Output power
dBm -16 to 24 -12 to 24 -8 to 24 -4 to 24
monitoring range
Split ratio at the

output power – 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%
monitoring port
Power
monitoring dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
accuracy
436 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-319 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturation Output of 24 dBm) (Continued)

Optical power
overshoot (at
least two
channels with dB ≤3 ≤3 ≤3 ≤3
output power of
no less than 7
dBm)
Nominal gain
dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
error range
Error range of
saturated output dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
optical power
Table 6-320 Mechanical Parameters of the MSA Card
MSA 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-321 Power Consumption of the MSA Card
MSA 45
6.8.4 The RAU_B / RAU_F Card
The RAU card number is 2.802.120.
Version: D 437
6.8.4.1 Function
u Basic functions: Generates the pump light with multiple wavelengths and high
power, so as to provide energy for amplifying optical signals in transmission
fibers; and performs online distributed optical signal amplification for a long
distance, with wide bandwidth and low noise.

for outputting a small quantity of light to the spectrum analyzer or the OPM card,
The two cards are mainly used to improve the optical signal to noise ratio of the
transmission line and increase the Q-value margin of the system. Generally, the
RAU_B card is needed only; however, if the RAU_B card fails to meet the
attenuation compensation requirement due to the excessive attenuation of the line,
the RAU_F card can be used in addition. The application of the two cards is shown
in Figure 6-97.
Figure 6-97 Application of the RAU Card in the System
Figure 6-98 and Figure 6-99 illustrate the RAU_B and RAU_F cards’ composition
and signal flow.
438 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-98 Composition and Signal Flow of the RAU_B Card
Figure 6-99 Composition and Signal Flow of the RAU_F Card
u Pump module
The pump module generates the pump light and transmits the light to the line
side via the IN port (RAU_B) or the OUT port (RAU_F).
The input optical signal is received via the IN port and sent to the splitter
through the coupler. The splitter splits a small quantity of light and outputs it via
the MON port to the OPM card or the test instrument for online optical signal
performance monitoring; and outputs the rest light via the OUT interface.
u BMU module
Version: D 439
The BMU module monitors the EDFA module’s working status, including the
pump source’s drive current, the refrigerator’s cooling current, the pump
source’s tube core temperature, the input optical power, and the output optical
power. Each performance item has a normal range. If the range is exceeded,
the BMU module will generate critical or non-critical alarm information to light
this card’s alarm indicator LEDs and report various performance events and
alarms to the network management system.
In addition, the BMU module acts as an agent and executes the laser shutdown
and the eye protection commands committed by the network management
system.
6.8.4.4 Panel
See Figure 6-100 for the RAU card panel.
440 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-100 The RAU_B and the RAU_F Card Panels
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the RAU_B / RAU_F card panel are described
in Table 6-322.
Version: D 441
Table 6-322 Description of the RAU_B and the RAU_F Card Panels

ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
Pressing down the button will turn off the card’s pump
Pump laser
laser; that is, the reverse / forward pump light output by
CUT shutdown
the IN port / OUT port will be turned off. Releasing the
button
button will turn on the pump laser.
The port can be connected with the spectrum analyzer or

Monitoring port
the OPM card to monitor the spectrum of the main path
MON for the output
output signal. The output signal power ratio between this
signal
port and the OUT port is 1:99.
Monitoring port
for the pump
PMON the OPM card to monitor the spectrum of the pump output
output optical
signal.
signal
Input port for

the main path /
IN output port for Inputs the optical signal to be amplified.
the reverse
pump light
Output port for

the main path /
OUT output port for Outputs the amplified optical signal.
the reverse
pump light
442 Version: D
6 Card
6.8.4.5 Specifications of the RAU_B / RAU_F Card
Table 6-323 Specifications of the RAU Cards

nm 1528 to 1568 –
48-channel)
Gain flatness dB ≤2 G.652 optical fiber
Quantity of pump wavelengths – ≤4 –

Distributed typical gain dB 12 G.652 optical fiber
Valid noise figure is an

abstract mathematics
concept of equivalent
noise coefficient. The
signal is amplified when
being transmitted
Valid noise figure dB ≤0
through the optical fiber.
The noise coefficient can
be smaller than the limit
of the EFGA amplifier or
even be a negative
value.
The total optical power of
four pump lights can be
obtained from the
Total pump optical power mW 650
formula 10lg
(650mW/1mW), or
presented as 28.1 dBm.
Polarization dependent gain (DG) dB 0.2

Polarization mode dispersion
PS 0.2
(PMD)
–
Insertion loss dB ≤1
– 2.5%
monitoring port
Version: D 443
Table 6-324 Mechanical Parameters of the RAU_B / RAU_F Card
RAU_B / RAU_F 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-325 Power Consumption of the RAU_B / RAU_F Card
RAU_B / RAU_F 80
6.8.5 The ROA Card
The ROA card number is 2.802.123.
6.8.5.1 Function
u Basic functions: Generates the pump light with multiple wavelengths and high
power to provide the energy for amplifying optical signals in transmission fibers;
and performs online distributed optical signal amplification for a long distance
with wide bandwidth and low noise.
u Online performance monitoring function: Includes pump output power

monitoring and control, pump laser bias current monitoring, TEC temperature
monitoring, case temperature monitoring, manual and automatic pump switch-
on and off function; provides alarms on pump current, pump temperature, case
temperature of remote-pump gain module and manual switch-on and off of the
pump, etc.
u Supports remote upgrade of the card software.
444 Version: D
6 Card
The ROA card and RGU are major parts of the remote pump subsystem. This
system is applied in outlying areas such as islands, seabed, snow-capped
mountains and forest areas without power-supply and monitoring conditions to
function as the optical regenerator with super-long span.
The application of the system is shown in Figure 6-101 and Figure 6-102. The ROA
card is usually placed inside the terminal equipment and the RGU unit (laid in the
optical cable connection box) on the outdoor optical cable line. The reverse pump
light, produced by the ROA card, is sent to the RGU via the optical cable line and
provides pump energy for the gain medium inside the RGU, so as to achieve the
purpose of optical amplification.
The application of the ROA card in the system involves two modes, i.e., the same-
fiber mode and the different-fiber mode. The first mode is shown in Figure 6-101: the
reverse pump light produced by the ROA card and the amplified signals from the
RGU, opposite in direction, are transmitted using the same optical fiber.
Figure 6-102 shows the application among different optical fibers, and the reverse
pump light produced by the ROA card in the figure is sent to the RGU through an
independent optical fiber.
Figure 6-101 Application of the ROA Card in the System–Using the Same Fiber
Version: D 445
Figure 6-102 Application of the ROA Card in the System–Using Different Fibers
Note:
The RGU serves as the gain medium connected to the optical fiber link
via the optical cable connection box. Since the pump source is at the
terminal station, and the pump light reaches the gain medium through a
section of optical fiber, the RGU is also known as the remote gain unit.
Generally, the RGU is placed on the line 80km away from the ROA card.
Figure 6-103 illustrates the ROA card’s composition and signal flow.
446 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-103 Composition and Signal Flow of the ROA Card
u Pump module
The pump module sends the reverse pump light to the line side via the LINE
port, where a small amount of monitoring signal is output via the PMON port to
the OPM card or the test instrument for online monitoring of the optical signal’s
performance.
Meanwhile, the input line optical signal is received via the LINE port and sent to
the splitter through the pump module. The main part of the optical signal is
output from the SOUT port, and a small amount of monitoring signal is output
via the MON port to the OPM card or the test instrument for online monitoring of
the optical signal’s performance.
u BMU module
The BMU module on the card drives the pump laser according to the drive
current value set for the pump.
The BMU module monitors the module’s working status, including the pump
source’s drive current, the refrigerator’s cooling current, the pump source’s tube
core temperature, the input optical power, and the output optical power. Each
performance item has a normal range. If the range is exceeded, the BMU
module will generate urgent or non-urgent alarm information to light this card’s
alarm indicator LEDs and report various performance events and alarms to the
Version: D 447
In addition, the BMU module acts as an agent and executes the laser shutdown
and the eye protection commands committed by the network management
system.
6.8.5.4 Panel
See Figure 6-104 for the ROA card panel.
448 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-104 The ROA Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the ROA card are described in
Table 6-326.
Version: D 449
Table 6-326 Description of the ROA Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
Pressing down the button will turn off the card’s pump
Pump laser laser; that is, the reverse pump light output by the LINE
CUT
shutdown button port will be turned off. Releasing the button will turn on
the pump laser.
Monitoring port The port can be connected with the spectrum analyzer or
MON for the output the OPM card to monitor the spectrum of the main path
signal output signal.
Monitoring port
for the pump
PMON the OPM card to monitor the spectrum of the pump output
output optical
signal.
signal
Input port for the

main path / Inputs the line optical signal from the RGU / outputs the
LINE
output port for reverse pump light.
the pump light
Output interface
Outputs the amplified optical signal; usually connected
SOUT for the main
with the LINE_I port of the OSCAD card.
optical path
450 Version: D
6 Card
6.8.5.5 Specifications of the ROA Card
Table 6-327 Specifications of the ROA Card
Optical wavelength range (C-band 48-

nm 1528 to 1562
channel)
Pump light range nm 1468 to 1495

Insertion loss at pump OFF dB ≤1
Pump light isolation at pump OFF dB ≤ 0.3
Total output optical power of pump light mW ≥ 1000
Quantity of pump wavelengths – ≥2
Pump quantity per wavelength – 1 or 2
Table 6-328 Mechanical Parameters of the ROA Card
ROA 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-329 Power Consumption of the ROA Card
ROA 90
6.8.6 The RGU Unit
The following introduces the functions, application in the system, working principles
and panel of the RGU.
Version: D 451
6.8.6.1 Function
u The RGU unit is used in combination with the ROA card to extend the single-
span transmission distance, so as to meet the requirements for ultra-long
transmission without electronic regeneration. It can be used in places such as
desert and seabed where regeneration station is not available, or in the
equipment room where regeneration station is available.
u It is unnecessary to provide power supply or monitoring for the RGU in the

middle of the line.
The RGU unit is used in coordination with the ROA card to constitute the remote
pump subsystem, which is applied to the ultra-long span C-band WDM system
without electronic regeneration. The application of the RGU unit and the ROA card
in the system is shown in Application in the System.
The EDF (gain medium), WDM (wavelength division multiplexing) device, GFF
(dynamic gain flattening filter, optional), isolator and other passive devices, are
included in the RGU. Each RGU has n (n ≤ 12) such optical system(s). The two
kinds of signal flows in the RGU using the same fiber or different fibers are shown in
Figure 6-105 and Figure 6-106 respectively.
Figure 6-105 The RGU Card Principle (Using the Same Fiber)
452 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-106 The RGU Card Principle (Using Different Fibers)
6.8.6.4 Panel
The RGU is usually placed at the bottom of the optical cable connection box. The
appearance and panel of the RGU are shown in Figure 6-107.
Figure 6-107 The RGU Card Panel
The interfaces on the RGU panel are described in Table 6-330.
Table 6-330 Description of the RGU Panel
The 1st to the nth SI1: the optical input interface for the 1st signal
SI1 to SIN
optical interface SIN: the optical input interface for the nth signal
The 1st to the nth The optical interface for the input of the pump
PI1 to PIN
optical interface light; invalid in the mode using the same fiber
The 1st to the nth SO1: the optical output interface for the 1st signal
SO1 to SON
optical interface SON: the optical output interface for the nth signal
Version: D 453
6.9 Optical Protection Card
panels and specifications of the optical protection cards of the FONST 5000.
6.9.1 The OCP Card
The OCP card number is 2.028.130.
6.9.1.1 Function
u Implements 1+1 optical channel protection. According to the position of the

card, it can implement the optical channel wavelength protection or the optical
channel route protection.
u Implements two independent 1+1 optical channel protection groups.
u For optical channel wavelength protection and optical channel routing

protection, users can select the monitoring mode for them via the network
management system.
4 Selects the channel protection joint monitoring and the channel protection
power monitoring modes for the optical channel wavelength protection.
4 Selects the line protection joint monitoring and the line protection power
monitoring modes for the optical channel route protection.
4 Supports setting of protection switching conditions via the network

management system.
u Supports the setting of protection switching restore mode, the wait-to-restore

time, and the protection switching command via the network management
system.
454 Version: D
6 Card
The OCP card provides optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection and optical
channel 1+1 route protection between stations for the FONST 5000. The position of
the OCP card in the system depends on the protection mode.
u To achieve the optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection, the OCP card is
located between the client side equipment and the OTU card. Figure 6-108
shows the OCP card’s positioning in the system in the optical channel 1+1
wavelength protection mode.
u To achieve the optical channel 1+1 route protection, the OCP card is located
between the OTU card and the ODU / OMU card. Figure 6-109 shows the OCP
card’s positioning in the system in the optical channel 1+1 route protection
mode.
Figure 6-108 Positioning of the OCP Card in the System (Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength
Protection)
Version: D 455
Figure 6-109 Positioning of the OCP Card in the System (Optical Channel 1+1 Route
Protection)
Figure 6-110 illustrates the OCP card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-110 Composition and Signal Flow of the OCP Card
Each OCP card can conduct the dual-feeding and selective-receiving of two optical
signals. The dashed line in the figure is the boundary of two protection groups. The
two protection groups use the same working principle. In the following group 1 is
used as an example to introduce the principle.
456 Version: D
6 Card
The signal to be protected is input via the IN1 interface; next it is split by the
splitter into two signals; then the two signals are output to the optical
transponder card or the optical multiplexer card via the TX1A (working) and the
TX1B (protection) interfaces respectively.
The signals from the working and the protection channels are input to the
detection module via the RX1A (working) and the RX1B (protection) interfaces.
The detection module detects the signals’ degradation degree and feeds back
the result to the BMU module. According to the result, the BMU module selects
to receive the better one by controlling the optical switch. The selected signal is
output via the OUT1 interface.
6.9.1.4 Panel
Figure 6-111 illustrates the OCP card panel.
Version: D 457
Figure 6-111 The OCP Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the OCP card are described in
Table 6-331.
458 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-331 Description of the OCP Card Panel
Name Meaning Description Remark

status.
ACT -
indicator LED generally, ON indicates poor communication
system.

major alarm).
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor -
LED
alarm).
alarms.
Output interface Outputs the signal to client side equipment (in the
for the signal optical channel wavelength protection).
OUT1 selected from Connected with the RX interface on the line interface
the dual-fed card or the optical transponder card (in the optical
signals channel route protection).
Inputs the signal from the client side (in the optical
Input interface channel wavelength protection).
IN1 for the signal to Connected with the TX interface on the line interface
be protected card or the optical transponder card (in the optical
channel route protection).
Rx interface for Interfa-

the signal from ces in
RX1A
the working protec-
channel tion
Inputs the working / protection signal.
Rx interface for group 1
the signal from
RX1B
the protection
channel
Tx interface for
TX1A the signal to the
working channel
Tx interface for Outputs the working / protection signal.

the signal to the
TX1B
protection
channel
Version: D 459
Table 6-331 Description of the OCP Card Panel (Continued)
Name Meaning Description Remark

OUT2
Interfa-
IN2
ces in
RX2A The same as those of the corresponding interfaces in protection group
protec-
RX2B 1.
tion
TX2A group 2
TX2B
6.9.1.5 Specifications of the OCP Card
Table 6-332 Specifications of the OCP Card

IN→TXA, IN→TXB dB ≤ 4.5 Line 1, line 2
Insertion loss RXA→OUT,
dB ≤ 1.5 Line 1, line 2
RXB→OUT
Optical power
RXA / RXB dBm -30 to 20 Line 1, line 2
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1 –

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30 –
Table 6-333 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card
OCP 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-334 Power Consumption of the OCP card
OCP 5
460 Version: D
6 Card
6.9.2 The OMSP Card
The OMSP card number is 2.028.131.
6.9.2.1 Function
u Performs the 1+1 protection on the optical multiplex section layer on the optical
communication line to achieve high reliability.
u Supports setting of protection switching conditions via the network

management system.
u Supports setting of the protection switching commands via the network

management system.
The OMSP card is used in the FONST 5000 to perform the multiplex section
protection between stations. See Figure 6-112 for the positioning of the OMSP card
in the system.
Version: D 461
Figure 6-112 Positioning of the OMSP Card in the System
Figure 6-113 illustrates the OMSP card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-113 Composition and Signal Flow of the OMSP Card
462 Version: D
6 Card
The signal to be protected is input via the IN interface; next, it is split by the
splitter into two signals; then the two signals are output via the WTX and the
PTX interfaces to the OA cards on the working line and the protection line
respectively.
The signals from the PA cards on the working line and the protection line are
input to the detection module via the WRX and the PRX interfaces. The
detection module detects the signals’ degradation degree and feeds back the
result to the BMU module. According to the result, the BMU module selects to
receive the better one by controlling the optical switch. The selected signal is
output via the OUT interface.
6.9.2.4 Panel
See Figure 6-114 for the OMSP card panel.
Version: D 463
Figure 6-114 The OMSP Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the OMSP card are described in
Table 6-335.
464 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-335 Description of the OMSP Card Panel

ACT

UA/NUA
alarms.
Tx interface for The output signal is one of the two signals split from the
the signal to the signal on the IN interface of this card. Generally the PTX
PTX
protection interface is connected with the IN interface of the OA card
channel on the protection channel.
Rx interface for
the signal from Generally connected with the OUT interface of the PA
PRX
the protection card on the protection channel.
channel
Tx interface for The output signal is one of the two signals split from the
the signal to the signal on the IN interface of this card.
WTX
working Generally connected with the IN interface of the OA card
channel on the working channel.
Rx interface for
the signal from Generally connected with the OUT interface of the PA
WRX
the working card on the working channel.
channel
Outputs the dual-fed signals input via the PRX and the
Output interface
WRX interfaces.
OUT for the main
Connected with, for example, the OUT interface on the
channel signal
ODU48_E card.
Input interface Inputs the signal to be protected.

IN for the main Connected with, for example, the OUT interface on the
channel signal OMU48_E card.
Version: D 465
6.9.2.5 Specifications of the OMSP Card
Table 6-336 Specifications of the OMSP Card
IN→WTX
dB ≤ 4.5
IN→PTX
Insertion loss
WRX→OUT
dB ≤ 1.5
PRX→OUT
Optical power
WRX/PRX dBm -30 to 20
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30
Table 6-337 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card
OMSP 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-338 Power Consumption of the OMSP card
OMSP 3.5
6.9.3 The OLP (1:1) Card
The number of the OLP card is 2.159.066.
466 Version: D
6 Card
6.9.3.1 Function
u Performs optical line 1:1 protection based on the APS protocol, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms, so as to protect normal service
transmission against optical line failures.
u Multiplexes and demultiplexes the OSC signal into and from the main channel
signals; uses the OSC to transfer APS messages; that is, it is unnecessary to
configure the OSCAD card in the optical line 1:1 protection.
u Supports setting of the protection switching conditions via the network

management system.
u Supports setting of VOA items via the network management system for the
input signals from both the working and the protection lines, so as to ensure the
conformity in power of the optical supervisory signals from the working and the
protection lines.
The OLP (1:1) card is used in the FONST 5000 to perform optical line 1:1 protection
between any two adjacent nodes. The OLP (1:1) card’s positioning in the system is
illustrated in Figure 6-115.
Figure 6-115 Positioning of the OLP (1:1) Card in the System
Version: D 467
Figure 6-116 illustrates the OLP (1:1) card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-116 Composition and Signal Flow of the OLP (1:1) Card
As shown in Figure 6-116, two pairs of optical interfaces, namely the MAIN (the
working) and the PROT (the protection) interfaces on the card panel are used to
connect with two NEs; and the other two pairs of optical interfaces: namely the OSC
and the LINE interfaces are connected respectively with the OSC card and the
optical amplifier card at the local station.
1) The line signals first enter the built-in VOA module via the MAIN-I and
PROT-I interfaces respectively. After attenuated by the VOA (the
attenuation value can be set manually via the network management
system), the signals access the optical power detection module.
2) The detection module detects the performance of the two signals and
feeds back the result to the BMU module.
3) Based on the result, the BMU module controls the optical switch’s status.
¡ If the signal from the MAIN-I interface is normal after attenuated by the
VOA, the Optical Switch 2 will go into the cross-connect status –
transmit the optical signals input via the MAIN-I and the PROT-I
interfaces to the 1510 / 1550 demultiplexer and the optical power
detection module respectively.
468 Version: D
6 Card
¡ Otherwise, the Optical Switch 2 will go into the pass-through status –

transmit the optical signals input via the MAIN-I and the PROT-I
interfaces to the optical power detection module and the 1510 / 1550
demultiplexer respectively. The 1510 / 1550 demultiplexer outputs one
supervisory signal and one main channel signal via the LINE-O and
the OSC-O interfaces respectively.
1) The optical signals that enter the OSC_I interface and the LINE-I interface
are from the OSC card and the optical amplification card respectively.
2) The signal entering the OSC_I interface is split by the 1:2 splitter into two
signals: one signal is multiplexed with the signal from the LINE-I interface
via the 1510 / 1550 multiplexer and then output to the Optical Switch 1;
the other signal is transmitted to the Optical Switch 1 directly.
3) This card controls the status of the Optical Switch 1 according to the
information carried by the K1 byte from the opposite end.
¡ If the K1 byte is defined as working at the Rx end of this card, the

Optical Switch 1 will go into the cross-connect status – transmit the
two input optical signals to the MAIN-O and the PROT-O interfaces.
¡ If the K1 byte is defined as protection at the Rx end of this card, the

Optical Switch 1 will go into the pass-through status – output the two
optical signals from the 1510 / 1550 multiplexer and the 1:2 splitter via
the PROT-O and the MAIN-O interfaces respectively.
6.9.3.4 Panel
The OLP (1:1) card panel is shown in Figure 6-117.
Version: D 469
Figure 6-117 The OLP (1:1) Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OLP (1:1) card panel are described in
Table 6-339.
470 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-339 Description of the OLP (1:1) Card Panel

ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status;
generally, ON indicates poor communication between

major alarm).
alarm).
alarms.
Output port for the
Connected with the ERX or WRX interface on the
OSC_O optical supervisory
OSC card.
signal
Input port for the

Connected with the ETX or WTX interface on the
OSC_I optical supervisory
OSC card.
signal
Output interface for Generally connected with the IN interface on the PA

LINE_O
the main optical path card.
LINE_I Connected with the OUT interface on the OA card.
main optical path

MAIN_O the signal from the Outputs the signal from the working line to the ODF.
working line

MAIN_I signal from the Inputs the working line signal from the ODF.
working line

PROT_O the signal from the Outputs the signal from the protection line to the ODF.
protection line

PROT_I signal from the Inputs the protection line signal from the ODF.
protection line
Version: D 471
6.9.3.5 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card
Table 6-340 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card
OSC interface nm 1510±5

Standard wavelength of the C-
LINE interface nm
band
Operating
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
wavelength MAIN interface nm
of the C-band
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
PROT interface nm
of the C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
OSC_I→PRO_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB
≤ 2.5
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
Insertion loss
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 2.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (for the 1510 nm
dB ≥ 15
signal)
Isolation
OSC-O (for the 1550 nm
dB ≥ 30
signal)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
Table 6-341 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card
OLP (1:1) 368 × 30
472 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-342 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card
OLP (1:1) 5
6.9.4 The OLP (1+1) Card
The number of the OLP card is 2.159.073.
6.9.4.1 Function
u Performs the optical line 1+1 protection based on the APS protocol, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms, so as to protect normal service
transmission against optical line failures.
u Multiplexes and demultiplexes the OSC signal into and from the main channel
signals; uses the OSC to transfer APS messages; that is, it is unnecessary to
configure the OSCAD card in the optical line 1+1 protection.
u Supports the setting of protection switching conditions and the protection

switching commands via the network management system.
u Supports the setting of VOA items via the network management system for the
input signals from both the working and the protection lines, so as to ensure the
conformity in power of the optical supervisory signals from the working and the
protection lines.
The OLP (1+1) card is used to perform optical line 1+1 protection between any two
adjacent stations. Its positioning in the system is illustrated in Figure 6-118.
Version: D 473
Figure 6-118 Positioning of the OLP (1+1) Card in the System
Figure 6-119 illustrates the OLP (1+1) card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-119 Composition and Signal Flow of the OLP (1+1) Card
474 Version: D
6 Card
As shown in Figure 6-119, two pairs of optical interfaces, namely the MAIN (the
working) and the PROT (the protection) interfaces on the card panel are used to
transmit or receive line signals; and the other two pairs of optical interfaces: namely
the OSC and the LINE interfaces are connected respectively with the OSC card and
the optical amplifier card at the local station.
4 The working and protection line signals first enter the built-in VOA module
via the MAIN-I and PROT-I interfaces respectively. The VOA module is
used to perform the automatic equalization of optical power of the working
and protection signals. And the attenuation value can be set manually
using the network management system.
4 After being adjusted by the VOA, the two optical signals are transmitted to
the optical switch. The optical switch then select the working and
protection signals based on pass-through and cross-connect statuses. The
BMU controls the optical switch’s status.
4 After being selected by the optical switch, the working signal is

demultiplexed into one supervisory signal (1510 nm) and one main
channel signal (1550 nm) in the 1510 / 1550 demultiplexer. 95% of the
working optical signal is transmitted to the amplification card via the
LINE_O port and 5% is demultiplexed for power detection. The supervisory
signal is sent to the OSC / EOSC card via the OSC_O port and then
demultiplexed for power detection.
4 The protection signal, after being selected by the optical switch, is

demultiplexed into the supervisory signal using the 1510 / 1550
demultiplexer. And then the supervisory signal is demultiplexed again for
power detection.
4 The optical power detection module detects the performance of the

working and protection signals and communicates with the BMU. The BMU
then transmits the control signal to the optical switch and performs
protection switching.
Version: D 475
Signals from the OSC / EOSC card and the amplifier card are received from the
OSC_I port and the LINE_I port respectively. The two signals are multiplexed in
the 1510 / 1550 multiplexer, transmitted to the MAIN_O port and the PROT_O
port via the coupler, and finally sent to the working and protection lines
respectively.
Note:
When the line signal power is below the Input-OP- Low-Threshold, the
VOA module will terminate the automatic equalization of the optical
power of the working and protection signals.
6.9.4.4 Panel
Figure 6-120 illustrates the OLP (1+1) card panel.
476 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-120 The OLP (1+1) Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the OLP (1+1) card panel are described in
Table 6-343.
Version: D 477
Table 6-343 Description of the OLP (1+1) Card Panel

status.
Working indicator
ACT ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status;
LED
generally, ON indicates poor communication between

major alarm).
alarm).
alarms.
Output port for the
Connected with the ERX or WRX interface on the
OSC_O optical supervisory
OSC card.
signal
Input port for the

Connected with the ETX or WTX interface on the
OSC_I optical supervisory
OSC card.
signal

Generally connected with the IN interface on the PA
LINE_O the main channel
card.
signal

LINE_I Connected with the OUT interface on the OA card.
main channel signal

MAIN_O the signal from the Outputs the signal from the working line to the ODF.
working line

MAIN_I signal from the Inputs the working line signal from the ODF.
working line

Outputs the signal from the protection line to the
PROT_O the signal from the
ODF.
protection line

PROT_I signal from the Inputs the protection line signal from the ODF.
protection line
478 Version: D
6 Card
6.9.4.5 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card
Table 6-344 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card
OSC interface nm 1510±5

LINE interface nm Standard wavelength of the C-band
Operating 1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of
MAIN interface nm
wavelength the C-band
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of
PROT interface nm
the C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
OSC_I→PRO_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB
≤ 2.5
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
Insertion loss
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (for the 1510
dB ≥ 15
nm signal)
Isolation
OSC-O (for the 1550
dB ≥ 30
nm signal)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
Table 6-345 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card
OLP (1+1) 368 × 30
Version: D 479
Power Consumption
Table 6-346 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card
OLP (1+1) 3
6.10 Optical Supervisory Card
panel, and specifications of each optical supervisory card of the FONST 5000.
6.10.1 The OSC Card
The OSC card number is 2.319.117.
6.10.1.1 Function
u The card multiplexes and processes overhead bytes in two directions. For
example, in the east Tx direction, the card multiplexes the local overhead bytes
(including DCCR, DCCM, E1, E2, F1, K1, K2, and APR), two E1 signals, and the
spectrum analysis data from the OPM card into the 25 Mbit/s signal; then the
signal is converted into the 1510 nm (25.344 Mbit/s) optical signal by the Tx
optical module and transmitted to the OSCAD card or the OLP card. In the east
Rx direction, the card fulfills the reverse process.
u The card provides two E1 channels in both the east and the west, with
corresponding interfaces on the card panel, for the transmission of client side
E1 clock signals and E1 services.
480 Version: D
6 Card
u The user can configure the card as a bidirectional or unidirectional OSC card by
setting the switches in the card. The bidirectional OSC card can perform the
pass-through of bidirectional supervisory information even if the EMU card is
not present, so as to guarantee the normal monitoring at other stations. When
the card is configured as a unidirectional OSC card, the WTX and the WRX
interfaces on the card panel are valid. The unidirectional OSC card and the
bidirectional OSC card are used at the OTM station and the OADM station
respectively.
u This card has a sensitivity of -45 dBm (the card also supports the optical
module with a sensitivity of -48 dBm), and can well meet the requirement for
ultra-long haul transmission. The optical supervisory channel’s performance is
not influenced by the line amplification card failures.
card in the system.
Figure 6-121 illustrates the OSC card’s composition and signal flow.
Version: D 481
Figure 6-121 Composition and Signal Flow of the OSC Card
The OSC card receives electrical signals from the NE management card, the
order wire card, the OPM card on the backplane side, as well as receives E1
signals from interfaces on the card panel. Then the overhead processing
module implements framing and timing and the multiplexing module multiplexes
these signals.
Then the multiplexed electrical signal is sent to the Tx optical module,

converted into the 1510 nm optical signal via the E / O conversion, and
outputted to the OA or OSCAD card and multiplexed with the main channel
signals.
The OSC card receives the 1510 nm optical signals demultiplexed by the
OSCAD card, converts them into electrical signals via the O / E conversion,
extracts the timing signal, and sends the electrical signals to the overhead
processing module.
482 Version: D
6 Card
The overhead processing module terminates and demultiplexes these electrical

signals. It outputs the re-generated overhead bytes to the NE management
card, the order wire card, and the OPM card via the backplane bus. Meanwhile,
the module outputs the demultiplexed E1 signals to interfaces on the card
panel so that other devices can use these signals.
6.10.1.4 Panel
See Figure 6-122 for the OSC card panel.
Version: D 483
Figure 6-122 The OSC Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the panel of the OSC card are described in
Table 6-347.
484 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-347 Description of the OSC Card Panel

Working indicator ON or OFF indicates abnormal working status; generally, ON indicates
ACT
LED poor communication between the card and the network management
system.

W2M West E1 interface Each interface can input and output two E1 signals. The definition of the
connectors of each signal is described as below:
E2M East E1 interface
For the E1 interface’s impedance setting, see the following E1 interfaces’

impedance settings.
WTX / WRX West optical interface TX: The TX interface outputs the optical signal to the OSC_A port on the
OSCAD card or the OSC_I port on the OLP card.
ETX / ERX East optical interface RX: The RX interface receives the optical signal from the OSC_D port on
the OSCAD card or the OSC_O port on the OLP card.
6.10.1.5 Instruction to DIP Switch
The OSC card has two DIP switches: K1 and K2. By setting the two switches, you
can configure this card as a unidirectional or bidirectional OSC card.
If the OSC card communicates with another OSC card of the same type or with the
OSC card in version R2B or later on the FONST W1600, users should follow these
rules to set the switches:
u For the unidirectional card, set K1-2 (the 2nd bit of K1), K1-3, and K2-2 to OFF,
and the other bits to ON. In this case, the WTX / WRX optical interface on the
card panel is valid.
u For the bidirectional card, set all bits of K1 and K2 to ON.
Version: D 485
If the card communicates with the OSC card in version R2A or earlier (the optical
interface’s rate is 25 Mbit/s) on the FONST W1600, users should follow these rules
to set the switches:
u On the terminal, set K1-2, K1-3, K1-5, K2-2, and K2-3 to OFF, and the other bits
to ON.
u On the repeater, when the OSC card connects with the earlier version card in
the west, set K1-5 and K2-3 to OFF and the other bits to ON; when it connects
with the earlier version card in the east, set K1-3 and K2-5 to OFF and the other
bits to ON.
Note:
The OSC card can communicate with the EOSC card. The principles of
setting the DIP switches on the two cards are the same.
6.10.1.6 E1 Interface’s Impedance Setting
Four jumpers (JP1, JP5, JP6, and JP7) in the card set the impedance for the east
E1 interface 1, the east E1 interface 2, the west E1 interface 1, and the west E1
interface 2 respectively.
Each jumper has three pins. When the 1st and the 2nd pins are shorted, the
corresponding E1 interface’s impedance is 75 Ω. When the 2nd and the 3rd pins are
shorted, the corresponding E1 interface’s impedance is 120 Ω.
6.10.1.7 Specifications of the OSC Card
Table 6-348 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card
Item Specification Remark

Line rate 25.344 Mbit/s
–
Code 2B1H
Transmitting optical power -7 dBm to -2 dBm > 2 dBm for a long span module
Receiver sensitivity -45 dBm -48 dBm for a long span module
Input overload point -3 dBm -8 dBm for a long span module
486 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-348 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (Continued)

-20 dB width 0.5 nm
–
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
1510 ± 5 nm (room 1510 ± 10 nm at high temperature
temperature) (50℃)
Table 6-349 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048 kbit/s)
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2048 kbit/s

Bit rate accuracy ±50 ppm (±102.4 bit/s)
Code HDB3
Rectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-
Pulse shape
T G.703
Pair(s) in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75 Ω 120 Ω

Nominal peak voltage of a mask
2.37 V 3V
(pulse)
Peak voltage of a space (no pulse) 0±0.237 V 0±0.3 V

Nominal pulse width 244 ns
Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and
negative pulses at the center of the 0.95 to 1.05
pulse interval
Ratio of the widths of positive and

negative pulses at the nominal half 0.95 to 1.05
amplitude
Maximum peak-to-peak jitter at an

Compliant with ITU-T G.823
output port
Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

Return loss (dB) at the output port (51 to 102 kHz) ≥ 6 dB
(102 to 3072 kHz) ≥ 8 dB
Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

(51 to 102 kHz) ≥ 12 dB
Return loss (dB) at the input port
(102 to 2048kHz) ≥ 18 dB
(2048 to 3072 kHz) ≥ 14 dB
Attenuation at the input port 0 dB to 6 dB (1024 kHz)
Jitter tolerance at the input port Compliant with ITU-T G.823
Version: D 487
Table 6-350 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048 kHz)
Item Specification
Rectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-

Pulse shape
T G.703
Pair type Coaxial pair Symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75 Ω 12 Ω

Maximum peak voltage (Vop) 1.5 1.9
Minimum peak voltage (Vop) 0.75 1.0
≤ 0.05 UIp-p (the measuring frequency range is f1 =
Output jitter
20 Hz to f4 = 100 kHz) (ITU-T G.813)
Attenuation at the input port

0 dB to 6 dB attenuation at 2048kHz according to
Return loss ≥ 15dB (at the frequency of 2048 kHz)
Table 6-351 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC Card
OSC 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-352 Power Consumption of the OSC Card
OSC 10
6.10.2 The EOSC Card
The EOSC card number is 2.200.215.
488 Version: D
6 Card
6.10.2.1 Function
u Multiplexes and transmits overhead bytes in two directions. In the Tx direction,

the information on local overheads such as DCCR, DCCM, E1, E2, F1, K1, K2
and APR, two E1 channel signals, spectrum analysis data from the OPM card
and the clock signal are multiplexed into 25M signals. After being converted to
1510 nm optical signals (25.344 Mbit/s) via the optical module, the signals are
then transmitted to the OSCAD card or the OLP card. The reverse process
takes place in the Rx direction.
u Provides an E1 channel in both the east and the west, with corresponding RJ-
45 interfaces on the card panel, for the transmission of the client-side E1
services and E1 clock signal (only the west E1 channel can access the external
clock signal). The clock is a frequency synchronization clock.
u Provides a 1PPS+TOD out-of-band 1588 clock interface for the input / output of
the client 1588 clock. The clock is for time synchronization.
u Provides two GE optical interfaces and two FE electrical interfaces to transmit

PTP clock signals to the corresponding PTN equipment or receive PTP clock
signals from the PTN equipment, so that the OTN equipment can transfer the
1588 clock of the PTN equipment.
u The user can configure the card as a bidirectional or unidirectional EOSC card
by setting the switches in the card. The bidirectional EOSC card can perform
the pass-through of bidirectional supervisory information even if the EMU card
is not present, so as to guarantee the normal monitoring at other stations.
When the card is configured as a unidirectional EOSC card, the WTX and the
WRX interfaces on the card panel are valid. The unidirectional and bidirectional
EOSC cards are respectively used in the OTM and OADM stations.
u The receiving sensitivity of the card is -45 dBm (it also provides an optical
module with sensitivity of -48 dBm). The card can fully meet the extra long-haul
transmission requirement and the performance of the optical supervisory
channel will not be affected when the line amplifier card fails.
Version: D 489
The positioning and applications of the card in the system are the same as those of
the OSC card (See Positioning of Cards in the System). When the PTP clock needs
to be accessed or transferred in the system, the OSC card should be replaced by
the EOSC card.
Figure 6-123 illustrates the EOSC card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-123 Composition and Signal Flow of the EOSC Card
The west Tx and Rx signal flow is the same with the east Tx and Rx signal flow in
the EOSC card, except for the Tx and Rx optical modules. The paragraphs below
takes the Tx and Rx of signal in the west as an example to describe the EOSC
card’s signal flow.
The signals in the Tx direction consist of three parts: the overhead signals from
the EMU, OPM and OLP cards to the EOSC card via the backplane; the PTP
clock signals received by the local station; and the E1 service or E1 physical
clock signals received by the local station. The three parts are processed as
follows:
490 Version: D
6 Card
4 The EOSC card sends the overhead signals from the EMU, OPM and the
OLP cards via the backplane together with the E1 signals input via the
interfaces on the panel to the signal processing module. After framing and
timer processing in the signal processing module, the signals are sent to
the multiplexer recombination module.
4 The accessed PTP clock signal is transmitted into the clock processing
module and the BCM module to undergo processing, such as routing
selection and synchronous regeneration, is transmitted to the multiplexer
reconfiguration module.
4 The recombined electrical signals are then transmitted to the west optical
module. After E / O conversion, the signals are converted into 1510 nm
optical signals, transmitted to the OSCAD card and multiplexed into the
line signals.
The EOSC card receives the 1510 nm optical signals demultiplexed by the
OSCAD card. After the O / E conversion via the west optical module, the
signals enter the multiplexer reassembly module for demultiplexing. The
signals are finally demultiplexed into overhead signals, E1 service signals and
PTP clock signals that are needed by related cards.
4 The overhead signals are transmitted to the signal processing module.

After frame check, timing and overhead processing, the signals are then
sent to the EMU, OPM and OLP cards via the backplane.
4 The E1 signals are sent to the port on the panel for the use of other
devices.
4 The PTP clock signals, together with the physical clock signals restored by
the line signals, enter the clock processing module. After synchronous
regeneration and routing, the signals are output via the FE1, FE2, OUT1,
OUT2 and 1PPS&TOD ports.
See Figure 6-124 for the EOSC card panel.
Version: D 491
Figure 6-124 The EOSC Card Panel
See Table 6-353 for a description of the interfaces and indicator LEDs on the EOSC
card panel.
492 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-353 Description of the EOSC Card Panel

Working status ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally,
ACT
OTNM2000.
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
1PPS&TOD Clock interface Used to input / output one 1PPS+TOD time signal.
West E1 Each W2M / E2M interface can input or output one E1 signal.
W2M
interface The impedance settings of the E1 interfaces are described in
E1 Interface’s Impedance Settings hereinafter.
East E1
E2M The W2M can be used as the input / output interface for
interface
external clocks.
100M electrical
FE1
interface 1
100M electrical
FE2
interface 2
100M electrical
FE3 Transmits PTP clock signals to the corresponding PTN
interface 3
equipment, or receives PTP clock signals from the PTN
100M electrical
FE4 equipment.
interface 4
GE1 port Tx
OUT1/IN1
and Rx
GE2 port Tx
OUT2/IN2
and Rx
West optical TX: Outputs the optical signal to the OSC_A port on the
WTX/WRX
interface OSCAD card or the OSC_I port on the OLP card.
East optical RX: Receives the optical signal from the OSC_D port on the
ETX/ERX
interface OSCAD card or the OSC_O port on the OLP card.
The EOSC card has two DIP switches: K1 and K2. By setting the two switches, you
can configure this card as a unidirectional or bidirectional EOSC card.
Version: D 493
If the EOSC card communicates with another EOSC card of the same type or with
the OSC card in version R2B or later on the FONST W1600, users should follow
these rules to set the switches:
u On the terminal, set K1-2, K1-3, K1-5, K2-2, and K2-3 to OFF, and the other bits
to ON.
u On the repeater, when the EOSC card connects with the earlier version card in
bits to ON.
Note:
The EOSC card can communicate with the OSC card. The principles of
Four jumpers (JP1, JP5, JP6, and JP7) in the card set the impedance for the east
E1 interface 1, the east E1 interface 2, the west E1 interface 1, and the west E1
494 Version: D
6 Card
6.10.2.7 Specifications of the EOSC Card
The specifications of the clock interface and the GE optical interface of the EOSC
card are shown in Table 6-354 and Table 6-355. The other specifications are the
same with those of the OSC card.
Table 6-354 Clock Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card
Clock Type Description
External clock synchronization source

Inputs one 120 Ω 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz signal.
(W2M)
Synchronization output clock (W2M) Outputs one 120 Ω 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz signal.
External time synchronization source

One 1PPS+TOD time signal input
(1PPS + TOD)
Synchronization output time (1PPS

One 1PPS+TOD time signal output
+TOD)
Table 6-355 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card

nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range

power
at reference
point S dBm -8 -5 0
power


Receiver at dBm -20 -23 -23
10-12)
reference
point R dBm -3 -3 -3
10-12)
Version: D 495
Table 6-356 Mechanical Parameters of the EOSC Card
EOSC 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-357 Power Consumption of the EOSC Card
EOSC 30
6.10.3 The FOSC Card
The FOSC card number is 2201741.
6.10.3.1 Function
Compared with the EOSC card, it adds the following new functions:
u Uses the FPGA to implement functions of the specific cores BCM56524 and
WGP21881.
u Adds the one-step mode and quick packet transmit functions of the 1588
protocol, and supports the 1588V2 clock transmit and receive via the FE
interface.
u Extends the OSC channel from 25.344M to FE rate; extends the bandwidth of
DCCR and DCCM to 20 M (dependent on the EMU and ASCU).
u Adds the point-to-point Ethernet function.
u Adds the OTDR module and supports online optical line diagnosis.
496 Version: D
6 Card
FOSC card in the system, similar to the EOSC card. When the system needs to
transmit OSC at a rate larger than 25.344 M or at FE rate, the FOSC card should be
used instead of the EOSC card.
Figure 6-125 shows the composition and signal flow of the FOSC card.
Figure 6-125 Composition and Signal Flow of the FOSC Card
the FOSC card, except for the Tx and Rx optical modules. The paragraphs below
takes the Tx and Rx of signal in the west as an example to describe the signal flow
of the FOSC card.
the EMU card, OPM and OLP cards to the FOSC card via the backplane; the
PTP clock signals received at the local station; and the E1 service or E1
physical clock signals received by the local station. The three parts are
processed as follows:
Version: D 497
4 The FOSC card sends the overhead signals from the EMU card, OPM and
the OLP cards transmitted via the backplane and the E1 signals input from
the card panel interfaces to the signal processing module. After framing
and timing in the signal processing module, these signals are sent to the
multiplexer and reassembly module.
4 The BCM module and the clock processing module route the accessed
PTP clock signals, regenerate these signals synchronously, and finally
send them to the multiplexer and reassembly module.
4 The recombined electrical signals are then transmitted to the west optical
module. After E / O conversion, the signals are converted into 1510nm
optical signals, transmitted to the OSCAD card and finally multiplexed into
the line signals.
The FOSC card receives the 1510 nm optical signals demultiplexed by the
OSCAD card. After the O / E conversion via the west optical module, the
electrical signals enter the multiplexer and reassembly module for
demultiplexing. The signals are finally demultiplexed into overhead signals, E1
service signals and PTP clock signals that are needed by relevant cards.

sent to the EMU card, OPM and OLP cards via the backplane.
devices.
See Figure 6-126 for the FOSC card panel.
498 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-126 The FOSC Card Panel
See Table 6-358 for a description of the interfaces and indicator LEDs on the FOSC
card panel.
Version: D 499
Table 6-358 Description of the FOSC Card Panel

ACT
OTNM2000.
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
West clock
W1PPS
interface
Used to input / output one 1PPS time signal.
East clock
E1PPS
interface
West E1 Both 2M_W and 2M_E can input or output one E1 signal.
2M_W
East E1
2M_E The W2M can be used as the input / output interface for
interface
external clocks.
100M electrical
FE1
interface 1
100M electrical
interface 2
GE1 port Tx
GE1 equipment.
and Rx
GE2 port Tx
GE2
and Rx
Ethernet
ETH1 electrical
Extends the OSC channel from 25.344M to FE rate; extends
interface 1
the bandwidth of DCCR and DCCM to 20 M (dependent on
Ethernet
the EMU and ASCU).
ETH2 electrical
interface 2
West optical TX: Outputs the optical signal to the OSC_A port on the
OSCW
interface OSCAD card or the OSC_I port on the OLP card.
East optical RX: Receives the optical signal from the OSC_D port on the
OSCE
interface OSCAD card or the OSC_O port on the OLP card.
500 Version: D
6 Card
The card has two DIP switches: K1 and K2. By setting the two switches, you can
configure this card as a unidirectional or bidirectional FOSC card.
If the card communicates with another FOSC card of the same type or with the OSC
card in version R2B or later on the FONST W1600, follow these rules to set the
switches:
u For the unidirectional card, set K1-2 (the 2nd bit of K1), K1-3 and K2-2 to OFF,
interface’s rate is 25 Mbit/s) on the FONST W1600, follow these rules to set the
switches:
u On the terminal, set K1-2, K1-3, K1-5, K2-2 and K2-3 to OFF, and the other bits
to ON.
u On the repeater, when the OSC card connects with the earlier version card in
bits to ON.
Note:
The FOSC card can communicate with the OSC card. The principles of
6.10.3.6 E1 Interface’s Impedance Settings
Four jumpers (JP1, JP5, JP6 and JP7) in the card set the impedance for the east E1
interface 1, the east E1 interface 2, the west E1 interface 1, and the west E1
Version: D 501
6.10.3.7 Specifications of the FOSC Card
The specifications of the clock interface and the GE optical interface of the FOSC
card are shown in Table 6-359. The other specifications are the same as those of
the OSC card.
Table 6-359 Major Interface Specifications of the FOSC Card
Item Specification Description
-45 dBm (ordinary FE span)

Receiver sensitivity -38 dBm (25.344 M short –
haul)
-10 dBm (25.344 M optical

module)
Input overload point –
-8 dBm (100 M optical
module)
-20 dB spectrum width £0.5 nm –

Side mode suppression ratio 30 dB –
Optical source wavelength 1510 ± 5 nm (room 1510 ± 10 nm at high
range of transmitter temperature) temperature (50℃)
The requirements for the

Transmitting optical power 0 dBm
optical modules are the same.
Output jitter at E1 electrical

＜ 50 ppm –
interface
1588 cascade jitter ＜ 100 ns For the entire system
Switching jitter at 1588 port ＜ 100 ns For the entire system
Switching jitter at 1588 clock ＜ 100 ns For the entire system
Route switching at 1588

＜ 100 ns For the entire system
power-off
502 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-360 Mechanical Parameters of the FOSC Card
FOSC 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-361 Power Consumption of the FOSC Card
FOSC 50
6.10.4 The BEOSC Card
The code of the BEOSC card is 2.201.432.
6.10.4.1 Function
u Multiplexes and transmits overhead bytes in two directions. In the Tx direction,

the information on local overheads such as DCCR, DCCM, E1, E2, F1, K1, K2
and APR, two E1 channel signals, spectrum analysis data from the OPM card
and the clock signal are multiplexed into 25M signals. After being converted to
OSC optical signals via the optical module, the signals are then transmitted to
the WOSAD card or the EOSAD card. The reverse process takes place in the
Rx direction.
u Supports single fiber in bi-direction transmission function: The built-in east and
west Tx and Rx OSC monitoring signal module is used together with the
EOSAD and WOSAD cards when performing the single fiber in bi-direction
transmission service in optical supervisory channel (OSC).
u Provides an E1 channel in both the east and the west, with corresponding RJ-
45 interfaces on the card panel, for the transmission of the client-side E1
services and E1 clock signal (only the west E1 channel can access the external
clock signal). The clock is a frequency synchronization clock.
Version: D 503
u Provides a 1PPS+TOD out-of-band 1588 clock interface for the input / output of
the client 1588 clock. The clock is for time synchronization.
u Provides two GE optical interfaces and two FE electrical interfaces to transmit

PTP clock signals to the corresponding PTN equipment or receive PTP clock
signals from the PTN equipment, so that the OTN equipment can transfer the
1588 clock of the PTN equipment.
u The user can configure the card as a bidirectional or unidirectional BEOSC

card by setting the switches in the card. The bidirectional BEOSC card can
perform the pass-through of bidirectional supervisory information even if the
EMU card is not present, so as to guarantee the normal monitoring at other
stations. When the card is configured as a unidirectional BEOSC card, the
WTX and the WRX interfaces on the card panel are valid. The unidirectional
and bidirectional BEOSC cards are respectively used in the OTM and OADM
stations.
u The receiving sensitivity of the card is -45 dBm (it also provides an optical
module with sensitivity of -48 dBm). The card can fully meet the extra long-haul
transmission requirement and the performance of the optical supervisory
channel will not be affected when the line amplification card fails.
The positioning of the card in the system is the same as that of the EOSC / OSC
card (See Positioning of Cards in the System). The specific application is slightly
different. The BEOSC, WOSAD and EOSAD card should be used together. The
structure among cards is shown in Figure 6-127.
504 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-128 illustrates the BEOSC card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-128 Composition and Signal Flow of the BEOSC Card
Version: D 505
the BEOSC card, except for the Tx and Rx optical modules. The paragraphs below
takes the west Tx and Rx of signal for example to describe the BEOSC card’s signal
flow.
the EMU, OPM and OLP cards to the EOSC card via the backplane; the PTP
clock signals received by the local station; and the E1 service or E1 physical
clock signals received by the local station. The three parts are processed as
follows:
4 The BEOSC card transmits the overhead signals from the EMU, OPM and
the OLP cards via the backplane together with the E1 signals input via the
interfaces on the panel to the signal processing module. After framing and
timer processing in the signal processing module, the signals are
transmitted to the multiplexer and reassembly module .
4 The accessed PTP clock signal is transmitted into the clock processing
module and the BCM module to undergo processing, such as routing
selection and synchronous regeneration, is transmitted to the multiplexer
and reassembly module .
4 The reassembled electrical signals are then transmitted to the west optical
module. After E / O conversion, the signals are converted into OSC optical
signals, transmitted to the EOSAD card and multiplexed into the line
signals.
The BEOSC card receives the OSC optical signals demultiplexed by the
WOSAD card. After the O / E conversion via the west optical module, the
signals enter the multiplexer reassembly module for demultiplexing. The
signals are finally demultiplexed into overhead signals, E1 service signals and
PTP clock signals that are needed by related cards.

sent to the EMU, OPM and OLP cards via the backplane.
devices.
506 Version: D
6 Card
u Single fiber in bi-direction transmission function: The west optical module of the
BEOSC card transmits OSC1 signal and receives OSC2 signal and the east
optical module of the BEOSC card receives OSC1 signal and OSC2 signal.
The west optical module connects with the WOSAD card and the east optical
module connects with the EOSAD card to perform the single fiber in bi-direction
transmission service in the optical supervisory channel (OSC).
See Application in the System for connections among the BEOSC, WOSAD
and EOSAD cards. See The WOSAD Card for the introduction to the WOSAD
card. See The EOSAD Card for the introduction to the EOSAD card.
See Figure 6-129 for the BEOSC card panel.
Version: D 507
Figure 6-129 The BEOSC Card Panel
See Table 6-362 for a description of the interfaces and indicator LEDs on the
BEOSC card panel.
508 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-362 Description of the BEOSC Card Panel

ACT
OTNM2000.
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
1PPS&TOD Clock interface Used to input / output one 1PPS+TOD time signal.
West E1 Each W2M / E2M interface can input or output one E1 signal.
W2M
East E1
E2M The W2M can be used as the input / output interface for
interface
external clocks.
100M electrical
FE1
interface 1
100M electrical
FE2
interface 2
100M electrical
interface 3
100M electrical
FE4 equipment.
interface 4
GE1 port Tx
OUT1/IN1
and Rx
GE2 port Tx
OUT2/IN2
and Rx
West output
Outputs the OSC1 signal and usually connects to the OSC_
WTX optical
WA interface on the WOSAD card.
interface
West input
Inputs the OSC2 signal and usually connects to the OSC_
WRX optical
WD interface on the WOSAD card.
interface
East output
Outputs the OSC2 signal and usually connects to the OSC_
ETX optical
EA interface on the EOSAD card.
interface
East input
Inputs the OSC1 signal and usually connects to the OSC_ED
ERX optical
interface on the EOSAD card.
interface
Version: D 509
The BEOSC card has two DIP switches: K1 and K2. By setting the two switches,
you can configure this card as a unidirectional or bidirectional BEOSC card.
If the BEOSC card communicates with another BEOSC card of the same type or
with the OSC card in version R2B or above on the FONST W1600, users should
follow these rules to set the switches:
u For the unidirectional card, set K1-2, K1-3, K1-5, K2-2, and K2-3 to OFF, and
the other bits to ON.
u For the bidirectional card, when the BEOSC card connects with the earlier
version card in the west, set K1-5 and K2-3 to OFF and the other bits to ON;
when it connects with the earlier version card in the east, set K1-3 and K2-5 to
OFF and the other bits to ON.
Note:
The BEOSC card can communicate with the EOSC and the OSC cards.
The principles of setting the DIP switches on the three cards are the
same.
Four jumpers (JP18, JP16, JP13, and JP12) in the card set the impedance for the
east E1 interface 1, the east E1 interface 2, the west E1 interface 1, and the west E1
510 Version: D
6 Card
When the 1st and the 2nd pins are shorted, the corresponding E1 interface’s
impedance is 75 Ω. When the 1st and the 2nd pins are not shorted, the
corresponding E1 interface’s impedance is 120 Ω.
6.10.4.7 Specifications of the BEOSC Card
The specifications of the optical interface and the GE optical interface of the BEOSC
card are shown in Table 6-363 and Table 6-364. The other specifications are the
same with those of the EOSC card and the OSC card.
Table 6-363 Optical Interface Specifications of the BEOSC Card

Line rate 25.344 Mbit/s
–
Code 2B1H
Transmitting optical power 0 dBm to 4 dBm –
For a long span module, it is -45 dBm;
-45 dBm (ordinary
Receiver sensitivity the report error of ±2 dB near the
span)
sensitivity is acceptable.
Input overload point -8 dBm -10 dBm for a long span module
-20 dB spectrum width ＜0.5 nm

Side mode suppression ratio ≥ 30 dB –
Extinction ratio ≥ 8.2 dB

1510 ± 5 nm (room 1510 ± 10 nm at high temperature
temperature) (50℃)
Table 6-364 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the BEOSC Card

dBm -3
Transmit- power
ter at Minimum mean launched

dBm -10
reference power
point S Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Version: D 511
Table 6-364 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the BEOSC Card (Continued)
Receiver Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤

dBm -22
at 10-12)
reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-
12
) dBm -3
point R
Table 6-365 Mechanical Parameters of the BEOSC Card
BEOSC 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-366 Power Consumption of the BEOSC Card
BEOSC 30
6.10.5 The OPM4 / OPM8 Card
The card number of the OPM4 / OPM8 card is 2.167.175 / 2.167.176.
6.10.5.1 Function
u Basic functions: The OPM4 card and the OPM8 card can perform spectrum
analysis of four and eight optical signals, respectively. For each signal, 96 ITU-
T standard-compliant channels can be detected.
u Spectrum analysis: You can input the signals to be monitored to this card and
monitor the wavelength quantity and each wavelength signal’s central
wavelength, optical power, and OSNR via the network management system.
512 Version: D
6 Card
u Automatic equalization of channel optical power: The card cooperates with the
VMU series of cards and the EMU card to perform automatic equalization of
channel optical power for the system. The OPM4 card and the OPM8 card
detect the optical power of each wavelength optical signal periodically. When
the power deviation value exceeds the preset threshold value, the system will
report the optical power unbalance alarm to trigger the automatic equalization
of the channel optical power of VMU series of cards.
The OPM4 card and the OPM8 card work with basically the same principles. The
following presents the working principles using the OPM4 card as an example.
Figure 6-130 illustrates the OPM4 card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-130 Composition and Signal Flow of the OPM4 Card
As shown in Figure 6-130, four optical signals to be monitored are input via the IN1
to the IN4 interfaces. When the BMU receives the command delivered by the
network management system, it controls the optical switch to select one signal and
send it to the spectrum analysis module.
The spectrum analysis module performs spectrum analysis of the optical signal and
sends the result, including the optical power, the OSNR, the wavelength quantity,
and the central wavelength to the BMU. The BMU then sends these data to the
EMU card and the network management system.
The BMU also collects the functional modules’ alarm, performance, working status,
and voltage detection data and reports them to the EMU card.
Version: D 513
6.10.5.3 Panel
Figure 6-131 illustrates the OPM4 card panel and the OPM8 card panel.
Figure 6-131 The OPM4 / OPM8 Card Panel
Table 6-367 describes the indicator LEDs and interfaces on the OPM4 card panel
and the OPM8 card panel, definitions of which are basically the same.
514 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-367 Description of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card Panel

ACT

Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
The 1st to the

8th Input
Inputs the optical signals to be monitored. Generally
interfaces for
Note 1
IN1 to IN8 connected with the MON interfaces on the OA and the PA
optical
cards.
communication
signals
Note 1: The OPM4 card provides four input interfaces, i.e. IN1 to IN4, for the optical
communication signals.
6.10.5.4 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
Table 6-368 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
Monitoring channel quantity – 96

Central wavelength detection accuracy dBm ±0.05
Power detection accuracy dBm ±0.5
Signal-to-noise ratio dynamic range dB 10 to 25
Signal-to-noise ratio detection accuracy dB ±1.5
Monitoring optical interface quantity – 4/8
Version: D 515
Table 6-369 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
OPM4 / OPM8 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-370 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
OPM4 / OPM8 10
6.10.6 The OTDR8 Card
The OTDR8 card number is 2.200.723.
6.10.6.1 Function
u The card is used for remote detection of the optical fiber lines in transmission
performance and can monitor up to eight channels of optical fiber lines.
u The card works in compliance with the Fresnel reflection and Rayleigh
scattering effect. The card can measure the attenuation of the entire optical
fiber link and details related, such as optical fiber length, loss between two
points, splice loss, faulty point, major attenuation point and optical fiber loss
coefficient.
u The OTDR test principle: The card injects a series of optical pulses into the
fiber under test regularly. It also extracts, from the same end of the fiber, light
that is scattered (Rayleigh backscatter) or reflected back from points along the
fiber, and then quantizes and encodes the optical signals, saves and displays
the result.
u The EMS GUI can display the attenuation curve of the tested line and the event
point of the line, such as optical fiber splice point, connector, breakpoint and
attenuator. This helps in daily maintenance and troubleshooting of optical fiber
lines.
516 Version: D
6 Card
Note 1: The OTDR8 card supports testing eight line fibers. This figure indicates the application for
four fibers.
Figure 6-132 Positioning of the OTDR8 Card and WDM2 Card in the System
Figure 6-133 illustrates the OTDR8 card’s composition and signal flow.
Version: D 517
Figure 6-133 Composition and Signal Flow of the OTDR8 Card
u The eight optical interfaces (L1 to L8) of the optical switch connect to the
external optical fiber being tested through the connector on the panel to send
the OTDR test optical signal to it. The optical interfaces also receive the
backscattering light reflected back.
u The OTDR module works keeping the Fresnel reflection and Rayleigh
scattering effect. The module analyzes and calculates the connector loss, loss
position and length, the fault point, loss between two points, the point with
massive attenuation and the optical fiber loss coefficient. The analyzed data
are sent to the network management system via BMU and displayed in the
GUI.
u The BMU controls the optical switch, and can select the line to be detected
from the eight lines via the network management system.
6.10.6.4 Panel
The OTDR8 card panel is shown in Figure 6-134.
518 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-134 The OTDR8 Card Panel
The indicator LEDs and interfaces on the panel of the OTDR8 card are described in
Table 6-371.
Version: D 519
Table 6-371 Description of the OTDR8 Card Panel

status.
Working indicator ON or OFF indicates the abnormal operating
ACT
LED status; generally, ON indicates the poor
communication between the card and the network
management system.

the card.
or major alarm).
Solid yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor
alarm).
alarms.
The card testing Output / input the 1625 nm testing optical signal
L1 to L8 optical interfaces 1 and generally are connected with OTDR_I and
to 8. OTDR_O interfaces on the WDM2 card.
6.10.6.5 Specifications of the OTDR8 Card
Table 6-372 Specifications of the OTDR8 Card
Test optical wavelength nm 1625±25

Dynamic range dB 37
Test distance km 5/10/25/50/100/200/250/400
Test pulse width ns 10/30/100/300/1000/3000/10000/20000
Back scattering dead zone m < 20
Fresnel reflection dead zone m <5
Test distance accuracy m ±1±3×test distance×10-5±resolution
Test loss accuracy dB ±0.1
Resolution m 0.05 to 80
520 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-373 Mechanical Parameters of the OTDR8 Card
OTDR8 368 × 60
Power Consumption
Table 6-374 Power Consumption of the OTDR8 Card
OTDR8 15
6.11 Channel Equilibrium Card
panel, and specifications of each channel equilibrium card of the equipment.
In the ultra-long-haul transmission, the power of the wavelengths in the incoming

direction of the main optical path is the same. However, due to different amplifier
gain flatness and different attenuation values of each wavelength in the line, the
power values of each wavelength at the receiving end may vary from each other
visibly. This will affect the normal receiving of signals. Thus it is very important to
keep the gain flatness on the entire line. The channel equalizer card is used to
guarantee the gain flatness between different wavelengths on the line.
6.11.1 The DGE Card
The DGE card number is 2.152.006.
6.11.1.1 Function
u Supports the manual / automatic optical power equalization or pre-emphasis;

effectively improves the flatness of the input optical signals so that the output
signals meet the flatness requirement of the optical receiver.
Version: D 521
u Supports setting the equalization or pre-emphasis for each channel separately

u Supports configuring the upper and lower limits for the input signal power and
the upper limit for the input signal flatness via the network management system.
The system will generate corresponding alarms when the actual input signal
parameters cross the set thresholds.
The DGE card is the dynamic gain equalizer card and is used in the long-haul
wavelength division system. It is suggested that you configure one DGE card after
every 15 optical amplifiers when more than 15 optical amplifiers are on the line.
After 15 sections, configure a DGE card after every 10 optical amplifiers. This card
can reduce the power difference between every channel at the receive end. It
enables automatic optical power equilibrium or pre-emphasis, so as to meet the
flatness requirements for the main optical path signal as specified in the relevant
standards.
This card can be applied in the OTM, OADM, OLA and other stations. It is usually
configured in the receive direction. The Figure 6-135 takes a DGE card in the
receiving direction of the OTM station as an example to illustrate the signal flow of
the DGE card in the system. Since the insertion loss of the DGE card is relatively
high and the system may configure more high insertion loss cards such as the DCM
card and the ITL50 card, you should use the PA + OA amplification mode at the
receiving direction.
Figure 6-135 Application of the DGE Card in the System
522 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-136 illustrates the DGE card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-136 Composition and Signal Flow of the DGE Card
The following introduces the functions of each module in the DGE card.
u Coupler
Transmits the signals input from the IN1 interface to the OCM module and the
DGE module respectively at the proportion of 1:99.
u OCM module
Scans and measures the power values of each channel.
u DGE module
Improves the flatness of the input optical signals; performs automatic optical
power equalization or pre-emphasis via the card configuration items in the EMS,
so as to meet the flatness requirements as specified in related standards.
u BMU module
Monitors the working status of the DGE module, completes the data buffering
and processes the control signals and alarm information. When the actual input
signal power and flatness cross the preset thresholds, the BMU will generate
an urgent or non-urgent alarm to illuminate the corresponding alarm indicator
LED on the card, and report the related alarm information to the EMS.
Version: D 523
6.11.1.4 Panel
See Figure 6-137 for the DGE card panel.
Figure 6-137 The DGE Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the DGE card panel are described in
Table 6-375.
524 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-375 Description of the DGE Card Panel

ACT
LED generally, ON indicates the poor communication between

card.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
alarms.
Input interface for
IN1 the main channel Receives optical signals that require gain flattening.
signal
Input interface for

IN2 the main channel Reserved interface, temporarily unavailable.
signal

OUT the main channel Transmits optical signals after gain flattening.
signal
Commissioning
COM Reserved interface, temporarily unavailable.
interface
6.11.1.5 Specifications of the DGE Card
Table 6-376 Mechanical Parameters of the DGE Card
DGE 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-377 Power Consumption of the DGE Card
DGE 20
Version: D 525
6.11.2 The GFF Card
The GFF card number is 2.152.007.
6.11.2.1 Function
u The GFF card conducts fixed compensation for the attenuation slope of the line
optical fiber.
u Applied to the WDM system in Band C to ensure the gain flatness between
every wavelength on the line.
The GFF card is the gain flatness filter card and is used in the long-haul wavelength
division system. It conducts fixed compensation for the attenuation slope of the line
optical fiber. The card reduces the differences between the power of the
wavelengths at the receiving end, so as to meet the optical signal flatness
requirements for the main optical path in the related standards. Table 6-378
illustrates the configuration rules of the GFF card.
Table 6-378 The Configuration Rules of the GFF Card
Quantity of the GFF Cards

Configuration Condition Remark
Configured
The line length

G.652 optical cable One per 260 km
exceeds 300 km.
The line length
G.655 optical cable One per 400 km
exceeds 500 km.
Amplifier with the saturation output of The line length
One per 300 km
22 / 23 dBm configured on the line exceeds 500 km.
The GFF card is an optical passive device and can be applied in the OTM, OADM,
OLA and other stations. It is usually configured in the receiving direction.
Figure 6-138 illustrates the application of the GFF card in the system.
526 Version: D
6 Card
OMU: optical multiplexer unit ODU: optical demultiplexer unit
OSCAD: 1510 / 1550 optical multiplexer /

demultiplexer card
Figure 6-138 Application of the GFF Card in the System
Figure 6-139 illustrates the GFF card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-139 Composition and Signal Flow of the GFF Card
The following introduces the functions of each module in the GFF card in this figure.
Gain flatness filter: Performs static compensation for the gain variation of line optical
fibers.
6.11.2.4 Panel
The GFF card panel is shown in Figure 6-140.
Version: D 527
Figure 6-140 The GFF Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the GFF card panel are described in
Table 6-379.
528 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-379 Description of the GFF Card Panel

ACT

card.
Alarm indicator
UA/NUA alarm).
LED
alarms.
Input interface
IN for the main Receives optical signals that require gain flattening.
optical path
Output interface
OUT for the main Transmits optical signals after gain flattening.
optical path
6.11.2.5 Specifications of the GFF card
Table 6-380 Mechanical Parameters of the GFF Card
GFF 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-381 Power Consumption of the GFF Card
GFF 0
Version: D 529
6.12 System Connection and Management Card
panel, DIP switches, and specifications of each system connection and
management card of the FONST 5000.
6.12.1 The EMU Card
The EMU card number is 2.319.118.
6.12.1.1 Function
u Processes overhead bytes for the 56 GCCs from the line interface cards and
the optical transponder cards and the two DCCs from the OSC card. For
convenience of description, GCCs and DCCs are referred to as DCCs
hereinafter.
u Performs the configuration management, fault management, performance

management and security management on the equipment, and saves the NE
management information for the management system.
4 The configuration management covers the configuration of the network

topology configuration and the NE type, and supports the log function.
4 The fault management covers the real-time monitoring and positioning of

the alarms and other related operations.
4 The performance management covers the monitoring and management of

the optical transmission values.
4 The security management includes the assignment of different operation

authorities to the operators with different levels.
u Provides the monitoring and software debugging interface (the f interface), the
alarm interface, the external monitoring interface, the F interface, and the
program download interface. Monitors its dual power supply and ambient
temperature, controls the system’s intelligent fans, and detects whether each
card is present.
530 Version: D
6 Card
u Implements the management extension function by bringing devices in the

cabinet and the adjacent cabinets into a uniform management platform via
network cables.
u Monitors the temperature and the power supply voltage in the equipment room
and reports the over-temperature alarm and the over- / under-voltage alarm.
u Supports 1+1 hot standby protection.
When channel subrack is used as the main subrack for the, the EMU card is used.
The EMU card mainly assists the network management system in configuration
management, fault management, performance management, security management
and saving the equipment management information, so as to enable the
intercommunication between equipment and management of the entire OTN
equipment.
Figure 6-141 illustrates the EMU card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-141 Composition and Signal Flow of the EMU Card
u CPU, control and processing module
Version: D 531
4 Controls, monitors, and manages each functional module in the card.
4 Detects whether each card is present in the subrack and reports relevant
4 The overhead processing module receives and processes overhead bytes

from the service cards; the control module can process up to 58 DCCs.
The overhead processing module also transmits overhead bytes to the
service cards.
u Communication module
4 Communicates with other cards.
4 Receives and transmits data from and to other cards via the Ethernet and
reports the data to the network management system.
6.12.1.4 Panel
See Figure 6-142 for the EMU card panel.
532 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-142 The EMU Card Panel
The indicator LEDs, buttons, and interfaces on the EMU card panel are described in
Table 6-382.
Version: D 533
Table 6-382 Description of the EMU Card Panel
Blinking quickly (four times per second) indicates

that the EMU card is incorrectly configured or
ACT Working indicator LED configured with incorrect time.
Blinking slowly (once per second) indicates that the
EMU card is working normally.
OFF means that the NE has no alarms or alarms are

filtered.
Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a
major alarm) in the NE.
UA / NUA Alarm indicator LED
Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (minor alarm) in
the NE.
Orange indicates both urgent and non-urgent alarms
in the NE.
Blinking indicates that the F interface is receiving
data.
Indicator LED for the
Not blinking indicates poor communication between
Ethernet
NET the card and the network management system if the
communication at the
NE is connected to the network management
F interface
system, or indicates a normal state if the NE is not
connected to the network management system.
Blinking indicates that the card communicates with

its BMU normally or the card is upgrading the
software.
BMU response Not blinking indicates that the card receives no
SBUS
indicator LED response from the BMU or the card is in standby
state.
If the indicator LED blinks irregularly, the card is in
poor communication with a certain BMU.
Software debugging
COM
interface
These interfaces’ connector
TEST Reserved
definitions are the same as those Interface type:
Network management
ETH3 of the AIF1 / 2 card’s Ethernet RJ-45 Note 1
system interface 3
interfaces.
Network management
ETH4
system interface 4
RESETH Reset button Pressing down the button will reset the card.
534 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-382 Description of the EMU Card Panel (Continued)
Pressing down the button will mute the current

alarm. The system will not ring upon an alarm
reported by the NE when this button is pressed
RING OFF Ring-off button
down.
If the button is released, the system will ring upon an
alarm reported by the NE.
East DCC
DCCE communication The east / west DCC refers to the two 512 kbit/s
indicator LED DCCs between the EMU card and the OSC card.
West DDC Blinking indicates that data are being received /
DCCW communication transmitted in the corresponding DCC.
indicator LED
SEL1 The two indicator LEDs blink at the same frequency
(once every 3 seconds). If both SEL1 and SEL2 are
OFF, the GCC communication LEDs 1 to 28 indicate
GCC indicator LED the communication states of GCCs 1 to 28
SEL2
respectively. If both SEL1 and SEL2 are ON, the
GCC communication LEDs 1 to 28 indicate the
communication states of GCCs 29 to 56 respectively.
ON indicates that data are being transmitted /

GCC communication received in the corresponding GCC. The association
1 to 28
indicator LED between the GCCs 1 to 56 and the slots is shown in
Distribution of GCCs in the Channel Subrack.
Note 1: Each RJ-45 interface on the card panel is provided with the yellow and green indicator
LEDs. When the yellow one is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the yellow one
is blinking, the port is transmitting data. When the green one is ON, the port is linked up
normally; when the green one is blinking, the port is receiving data.
6.12.1.5 DIP Switch in the EMU Card
Users can configure the NE's IP address by setting the ON or OFF status of the six
8-bit DIP switches on the EMU card. Configuration of IP address in this way is
based on hardware and requires no auxiliary software. Therefore, it is easy to
handle and much less error-prone.
The EMU card has six 8-bit DIP switches: K1 to K6, as shown in Figure 6-143. Each
switch has eight bits and each bit can be placed in the OFF or ON position. Among
them, K2 is reserved and others are used to set IP stack parameters for NEs.
Version: D 535
Figure 6-143 DIP Switches in the EMU Card
The five DIP switches for the configuration of NE IP address, i.e. K1 and K3 to K6,
are used as follows:
u Use of K1:
4 K1-1: Keep the factory setting of this bit (set in the ON position) for the
EMU card (while the K1-1 bit for the FCU card should be set in the OFF
position).
4 K1-2: This bit is for setting the Ethernet port’s priority. According to the
OSPF protocol, among the NEs in the same subnet, including the router,
the Ethernet port’s PRI should be set to OFF for one and only one of the
NE's EMU card or router, and it should be set to ON for all the others.
4 K1-3: This bit is for setting the way of configuring the NE’s IP address. OFF
means setting the IP address through DIP switches; in this way you should
set DIP switches K3 to K6. ON means setting the IP address by the LCT
downloading; in this way you should configure and download the IP
address through the LCT as well as set DIP switches K5 and K6.
4 K1-4: If both switches K1-4 and K1-1 are set to OFF, the card acts as an
EFCU card; if the switch K1-4 is set to ON and the switch K1-1 to OFF, the
card acts as an FCU card.
4 K1-5 to K1-7: Reserved.
536 Version: D
6 Card
4 K1-8: If the switch K1-8 is used in the channel subrack (3030105), the
switch K1-8 of the EMU / FCU / EFCU card is set to OFF. If the switch K1-8
is used in the other subracks, the switch K1-8 of the EMU / FCU / EFCU
card is set to ON.
u Use of K3 to K6: Switches K3 to K6 are used to set the NE’s IP address. K5

and K6 are used together to set this card’s physical address. When the bit K1-3
is placed in the OFF position, switches K3 to K6 should be set; when the bit K1-
3 is placed in the ON position, only switches K5 and K6 need to be set.
Correspondence relationship between switches K3 to K6 and the IP address:

Suppose the NE’s IP address is W.X.Y.Z, and W, X, Y, and Z are determined by
switches K3, K4, K5, and K6. Each switch’s 1st bit is the most significant bit and the
8th bit is the least significant bit. When a switch bit is placed in the ON position, its
corresponding data bit is 0; and when the switch bit is placed in the OFF position, its
corresponding data bit is 1. For example, if K3 is set to 00001010, K4 to 00010010,
K5 to 00000010, and K6 to 00000001, the NE’s IP address is 10.18.2.1.
When switches K5 and K6 act as physical address switches, the use of them is as
follows:
u When setting the NE’s attribute in EMS, make the configurations of Switch 1
and Switch 2 in the NE attribute interface identical with the settings of switches
K5 and K6 respectively. For example, when the K5 and K6 are set to 00001010
and 00001101, then Switch 1 and Switch 2 should be configured to 0xA and
0xD.
u When delivering the IP address via the LCT, keep the configurations of EMU
switch (hexadecimal) in the Management Configuration window of the LCT
identical with the settings of switches K5 and K6 respectively. For example, if
the K5 and K6 are set to 00001010 and 00001101, then EMU switch
(hexadecimal) should be configured to 0a and 0d respectively.
Note:
If a subrack is configured with both active and standby EMU cards, the
DIP switch settings should be identical for the active and standby EMU
cards.
Version: D 537
6.12.1.6 Specifications of the EMU Card
Table 6-383 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU / FCU / EFCU Card
EMU 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-384 Power Consumption of the EMU Card
EMU 22
6.12.2 The FCU Card
The FCU card number is 2.119.337.
6.12.2.1 Function
u Implements communication extension of the subrack in which the card is

located.
u Monitors its own dual power supplies and the ambient temperature, controls the
system’s intelligent fans, and detects whether each card is present based on
hardware.
When the channel subrack works as the extension subrack and the extension
subrack does not need to process the DCC channel, the FCU card is used. The
FCU card is used as the management card of the extension subrack to collect the
information of each card to the NE management card of the main subrack for
processing.
538 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-144 illustrates the FCU card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-144 Composition and Signal Flow of the FCU Card
u CPU and control module
The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarm and
performance information of each functional module for the subrack.
4 Provides the inter-card communication interface to connect with the

service cards and the core switch card for inter-card data communication.
4 Provides the network management system interface and the cascade

interface to connect with the network management terminal, so as to
create the channel for the network management system.
6.12.2.4 Panel
The indicator LEDs, interfaces, and buttons on the FCU card panel are the same as
those on the EMU card panel (including the distribution and the names), but only the
ACT indicator LED, the COM interface, and the RESETH button are valid for the
FCU card; for their meanings and usages, see the related topics on the EMU card.
Version: D 539
As the subrack communication extension interface within an NE, the COM interface
is usually connected to any COM interface in another subrack within the same NE to
extend the communication between the subracks.
6.12.2.5 DIP Switch in the FCU Card
The FCU card has six 8-bit DIP switches: K1 to K6. See below for the configuration
of each DIP switch:
u Set K1_1 to OFF.
u Set K1_4 to ON.
u K1-8: If the switch K1-8 is used in the channel subrack (3030105), the switch
K1-8 of the FCU card is set to OFF. If the switch K1-8 is used in the other
subracks, the switch K1-8 of the FCU card is set to ON.
u It is unnecessary to set the other bits.
Caution:
Do not set all the bits of K5 and K6 to ON at the same time; otherwise,
the FCU card will be reset repeatedly.
6.12.2.6 Specifications of the FCU Card
Table 6-385 Mechanical Parameters of the FCU Card
FCU 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-386 Power Consumption of the FCU Card
FCU 22
540 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.3 The EFCU Card
The EFCU card number is 2.119.383.
6.12.3.1 Function
u Processes overhead bytes for the 56 GCCs from the line interface cards and
the optical transponder cards and the two DCCs from the OSC card. For
convenience of description, GCCs and DCCs are referred to as DCCs
hereinafter.
program download interface. Monitors its dual power supply and ambient
temperature, controls the system’s intelligent fans, and detects whether each
card is present.
u Implements management extension – includes other devices in different

subracks in the same NE into a uniform management platform via network
cables.
and reports the over-temperature alarm and the over- / under-voltage alarm.
u Supports the 1+1 hot standby protection.
When the channel subrack works as the extension subrack and the extension
subrack needs to process the DCC channel, the EFCU card is used. The EFCU
card is used as the enhanced management card of the extension subrack to collect
the information of each card to the NE management card of the main subrack for
processing.
Figure 6-145 illustrates the EFCU card’s composition and signal flow.
Version: D 541
Figure 6-145 Composition and Signal Flow of the EFCU Card
u CPU, control and processing module

service cards.
4 Communicates with other cards.
542 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.3.4 Panel
The indicator LEDs, interfaces, and buttons on the EFCU card panel have the same
names and distribution as those on the EMU card panel.
Note:
As the subrack communication extension interface within an NE, the

COM interface is usually connected to any COM interface in another
subrack within the same NE to extend the communication between the
subracks.
6.12.3.5 DIP Switch on the EFCU Card
The EFCU card has six 8-bit DIP switches: K1 to K6. See below for the
configuration of each DIP switch:
u Set K1_1 to OFF.
u Set K1_4 to OFF.
u K1-8: If the switch K1-8 is used in the channel subrack (3030105), the switch
K1-8 of the EFCU card is set to OFF. If the switch K1-8 is used in the other
subracks, the switch K1-8 of the EFCU card is set to ON.
u The setting of the other switches is the same with that of the EMU card.
6.12.3.6 Specifications of the EFCU Card
Table 6-387 Mechanical Parameters of the EFCU Card
EFCU 368 × 30
Version: D 543
Power Consumption
Table 6-388 Power Consumption of the EFCU Card
EFCU 22
6.12.4 The EMVU Card
The card number of the EMVU card is 2.200.456.
6.12.4.1 Function
u The EMVU card can process the DCC and GCC overheads in up to 58 optical
directions, and supports GCC forwarding and route processing. The card can
access DCCs and GCCs in up to 112 directions, and process the data of any
58 unchannelized DCCs among them.
u Performs the configuration management, fault management, performance

management and security management on the equipment, and also saves the
NE management information for the management system.
4 The configuration management covers the configuration of the network

topology configuration and the NE type, and supports the log function.
4 The fault management covers the real-time monitoring and positioning of

the alarms and other relevant operations.
4 The performance management covers the monitoring and management of

the optical transmission values.
4 The security management covers the assignment of different operation

authorities to the operators at different levels.
program download interface. Monitors its four channels of power supply,
supports remote configuration of IP addresses, detects ambient temperature,
controls the system’s intelligent fans, detects whether each card is present
based on hardware, and supports the card self-booting function.
544 Version: D
6 Card
u The card provides a 24-port HUB, and provides four Ethernet interfaces, i.e.
WS interfaces on the card panel to enable the interconnection and
communication between the EMVU, BMU, ASCU and the network
management system.
u Provides the slot for a 48-port HUB to embed the HUB1 subcard for the intra-
card communication between the EMVU card and other cards such as the
optical / electrical interface card.
u Supports the 1+1 (active and standby) protection.
When the main subrack is the OTH subrack (3030066), the EMVU card is used. The
card is used to assist the network management system in configuration
management, fault management, performance management and security
management. It also helps restore the management information of the equipment,
so that the intercommunication between equipment sets can be achieved and the
entire OTN equipment can be managed.
Figure 6-146 illustrates the EMVU card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-146 Composition and Signal Flow of the EMVU Card
Version: D 545
The functions of each module shown in the EMVU card's signal flow diagram are as
below:
u CPU and control & processing module

service cards.
4 Enables communication between this card and other cards.
The EMVU card panel is shown in Figure 6-147.
546 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-147 The EMVU Card Panel
The indicator LEDs, buttons, and interfaces on the EMVU card panel are described
in Table 6-389.
Version: D 547
Table 6-389 The EMVU Card Panel
Blinking quickly (four times per second) indicates the EMVU

Working status card is incorrectly configured or configured with incorrect time.
ACT
indicator LED Blinking slowly (once per second) indicates that the EMVU
card is working normally.

Red indicates an urgent alarm (critical alarm or a major
Alarm indicator
UA / NUA alarm).
LED
Orange indicates both the urgent and non-urgent alarms.
Blinking indicates that the F interface is receiving data.

F interface Not blinking indicates poor communication between the card
Ethernet and the network management system if the NE is connected
NET
communication to the network management system, or indicates a normal
indicator LED state if the NE is not connected to the network management
system.
Blinking indicates that the card communicates with its BMU

normally or the card software is being upgraded.
BMU response Not blinking indicates that the card receives no response from
SBUS
indicator LED the BMU or the card is in standby state.
Blinking irregularly indicates that a communication
interruption occurs between the card and a certain BMU.
Subrack
communication
Extends the communication
COM extension
between subracks within an NE.
interfaces within
an NE
Software
Reserved testing and
CONS debugging
commissioning interface
interface
Interface type: RJ-45
Network
management
ETH3
system interface
3
Inputs Ethernet data.
Network
management
ETH4
system interface
4
RESETH Reset button Pressing down the button will reset the card.
548 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-389 The EMVU Card Panel (Continued)
Pressing down the button will mute the current alarm. The
system will not ring upon an alarm reported by the NE when
RING
Ring-off button the Ring-off button is pressed down.
OFF
If the button is released, the system will ring upon an alarm
reported by the NE.
East DCC
DCCE communication The east / west DCC refers to the two 512 kbit/s DCCs
indicator LED between the EMU card and the OSC card.
West DDC Blinking indicates that data are being received / transmitted in
DCCW communication the corresponding DCC.
indicator LED
SEL1 u If both SEL1 and SEL2 are extinguished, the GCC
communication LEDs 1 to 28 indicate the communication
states of GCCs 1 to 28 respectively.
u If SEL1 is illuminated and SEL2 is extinguished, the GCC
GCC indicator states of GCCs 29 to 56 respectively.
SEL2 LED u If SEL2 is illuminated and SEL1 is extinguished, the GCC
u If both SEL1 and SEL2 are illuminated, the GCC
ON indicates that data are being transmitted / received in the

GCC
corresponding GCC. The association between the GCCs 1 to
1 to 28 communication
112 and the slots is shown in Distribution of GCCs in the OTH
indicator LED
Subrack
Note 1: Each RJ-45 interface on the card panel is provided with the yellow and green indicator
LEDs. When the yellow indicator LED is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the
yellow indicator LED is blinking, the port is sending data. When the green indicator LED
is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the green indicator LED is blinking, the port
is receiving data.
6.12.4.5 The DIP Switches on the EMVU Card
The EMVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch–K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
Version: D 549
u Set the K1_1 to ON.
u Set the K1_4 to ON.
6.12.4.6 Specification of the EMVU Card
Table 6-390 Mechanical Parameters of the EMVU Card
EMVU 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-391 Power Consumption of the EMVU Card
EMVU 30
6.12.5 The EFCVU Card
The card number of the EFCVU card is 2.200.444.
6.12.5.1 Function
u Processes overhead bytes from the 56 GCCs of the line interface card and the
optical transponder card and the two DCCs of the OSC card. For convenience
of description, both GCCs and DCCs are referred to as DCCs hereinafter.
u Provides the external monitoring interface, the monitoring and software

debugging interface, and the ETH interface. Monitors its dual power supply and
ambient temperature, controls the system’s intelligent fans, and detects
whether each card is present based on hardware.
550 Version: D
6 Card
u Implements management extension—includes other devices in different

subracks in the same NE into a uniform management platform via network
cables.
and reports the alarms for over-high temperature, over-voltage and under-
voltage.
u Supports 1+1 hot standby protection.
When the OTH subrack (3030066) works as the extension subrack and the
extension subrack needs to process the DCC channel, the EFCVU card is used.
The EFCVU card is used as the enhanced management card of the extension
subrack to collect the information of each card to the NE management card of the
main subrack for processing.
Figure 6-148 illustrates the EFCVU card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-148 Composition and Signal Flow of the EFCVU Card
The functions of each module in the figure above are as below:
u CPU and control & processing module
Version: D 551

service cards.
4 Enables communication between this card and other cards.
The LEDs, interfaces and buttons on the EFCVU card panel have the same names
and distribution as those on the EMVU card panel.
is usually connected to any COM interface on the CAIF1 / CAIF2 card in another
subrack within the same NE to extend the communication between the subracks.
6.12.5.5 DIP Switches on the EFCVU Card
The EFCVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch-K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
u K1_1 should be set to OFF.
552 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.5.6 Specifications of the EFCVU Card
Table 6-392 Mechanical Parameters of the EFCVU Card
EFCVU 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-393 Power Concumption of the EFCVU Card
EFCVU 30
6.12.6 The FCVU Card
The card number of the FCVU card is 2.200.445.
6.12.6.1 Function
u Monitors the power supply of this card, detects the ambient temperature, and
reports the alarms for over-high temperature, over-voltage and under-voltage.
u Controls the intelligent fans in the system, and detects whether cards are
present in the system.
u Provides external monitoring interface, monitoring and software debugging

interface and the ETH interface.
u Extends external communication of the subrack in which the card is located.
Version: D 553
When the OTH subrack (3030066) works as the extension subrack and the
extension subrack does not need to process the DCC channel, the FCVU card is
used. The FCVU card is used as the management card of the extension subrack to
collect the information of each card to the NE management card of the main subrack
for processing.
Figure 6-149 illustrates the FCVU card’s composition and signal flow.
Figure 6-149 Composition and Signal Flow of the FCVU Card
The functions of each module in the figure are as below:
u CPU and control module
The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarm and
performance information of each functional module for the subrack.
4 Provides the inter-card communication interface to connect with the

service cards and the core switch card for inter-card data communication.
4 Provides the network management system interface and the cascade

interface to connect with the network management terminal, so as to set
up a channel for the network management system.
554 Version: D
6 Card
The indicator LEDs, interfaces and buttons on the FCVU card panel have the same
names and distribution as those on the EMVU card, except that the ACT indicator
LED, COM interface and RESET button are valid only for the FCVU card.
is usually connected to any COM interface on the CAIF1 / CAIF2 card in another
subrack within the same NE to extend the communication between the subracks.
6.12.6.5 The DIP Switches on the FCVU Card
The FCVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
u K1_4 should be set to ON.
6.12.6.6 Specification of the FCVU Card
Table 6-394 Mechanical Parameters of the FCVU Card
FCVU 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-395 Power Consumption of the FCVU Card
FCVU 30
Version: D 555
6.12.7 The ASCU Card
The ASCU card number is 2.119.290.
6.12.7.1 Function
The ASCU card can implement the signaling forwarding function of the SCU and the
intelligent control function of the ACU at the same time. Its functions are described
as follows:
u The SCU processes signals from the 56 GCCs of the line interface card and the
optical transponder card as well as the two DCCs of the OSC card, altogether
58 DCCM signals.
u The SCU forwards DCCM signals, enables or disables DCCs, and provides
information on whether a DCC is activated.
u Both the ACU and the SCU provide the program downloading interface; the
embedded processor used by the ACU supports continuous upgrade of both
internal memory and external memory.
u The ACU can run the ASON control plane software to perform the control plane
functions.
u Detects whether cards are present in the system based on hardware.
Figure 6-150 illustrates the ASCU card’s composition and signal flow.
556 Version: D
6 Card
Figure 6-150 Composition and Signal Flow of the ASCU Card
The functions of each module in the figure are described as below.
u SCU
Controls, monitors, and manages the card’s functional modules, receives

overhead byte signals from the backplane, processes the overhead bytes, and
implements the processing, bus conversion, and protocol conversion of 58
DCCs.
u Inter-card control and communication module
Performs the inter-card mutual control between the CPU, SCU and ACU.
u ACU
Runs the control plane software; implements functions of the control plane such
as route calculation and resource management.
4 Enables the communication between the active and the standby ASCU
cards.
4 Enables data interaction between the card and the EMU card via the
backplane bus.
Version: D 557
6.12.7.3 Panel
The ASCU card panel is shown in Figure 6-151.
Figure 6-151 The ASCU Card Panel
558 Version: D
6 Card
The ASCU card consists of two units: the ACU and the SCU. The LEDs, interfaces
and buttons on the card panel correspond to the two units respectively, as shown in
Table 6-396.
Table 6-396 Description of the ASCU Card Panel
Blinking quickly (four times per second) indicates the SCU unit
Working indicator
communicates with the EMU card normally.
ACT1 LED of the SCU
Blinking slowly (once per second) indicates the SCU unit is not
unit
configured correctly or in the standby status.
OFF indicates no alarm occurs in the SCU or all alarms are filtered.
Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major alarm) in the
Alarm indicator LED
ALM1 SCU unit.
of the SCU
Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (or a minor alarm) in the SCU unit.
Orange indicates both urgent and non-urgent alarms in the SCU unit.
Ethernet
communication Blinking indicates that data are being transmitted / received between the
NET
indicator LED of the SCU and the EMU card.
SCU
Blinking quickly (four times per second) indicates the operating is normal.
Working indicator
ACT2 Blinking slowly (once per second) indicates the ACU unit is not
LED of the ACU
configured correctly or in the standby status.
OFF means that the ACU unit has no alarms or alarms are filtered.
Red indicates an urgent alarm (a critical alarm or a major alarm).
Yellow indicates a non-urgent alarm (a minor alarm).
Alarm indicator LED
ALM2 When the card is booting up, the solid red LED indicates that the
of the ACU unit
program is not loaded; the flashing yellow LED indicates that the
hardware is being initiated.
The operation system executes the alarm function after it is loaded
successfully.
When the ACU is booting up, the LED blinking indicates that the software
is writing data into the flash and you should not unplug the card at this
ACU unit hardware
moment.
RUN / HDD memory read / write
When the ACU is running normally, the LED indicates the CF card’s
indicator LED
access status: blinking indicates the ACU is reading or writing data from
or into its CF card and you should not unplug the card at this moment.
East DCC The east / west DCC refers to the two 512 kbit/s DCCM channels
communication between the SCU and the OSC card.
DCCE
indicator LED of the Blinking indicates that data are being received / transmitted in the
SCU corresponding DCCM channel.
Version: D 559
Table 6-396 Description of the ASCU Card Panel (Continued)
West DCC
communication
DCCW
indicator LED of the
SCU
SEL1 The two indicator LEDs blink at the same frequency. If both SEL1 and
SEL2 are OFF, the GCC communication LEDs 1 to 28 indicate the
GCC indicator LED
communication states of GCCs 1 to 28 respectively. If both SEL1 and
SEL2 of the SCU unit.
SEL2 are ON, the GCC communication LEDs 1 to 28 indicate the
communication states of GCCs 29 to 56 respectively.
GCC
ON indicates that data are being transmitted / received in the
communication
1 to 28 corresponding GCC. The association between the GCCs 1 to 56 and the
indicator LED of the
slots is shown in Distribution of GCCs in the OTH Subrack.
SCU
RESETH SCU reset button Pressing down the button will reset the SCU of the card.
If the card acts as an ASCU card, when the card is powered on, pressing
down the button for six seconds or longer will turn off the card off safely.
ACU startup /
HLT / RST When the card is powered off, pressing down the button longer than six
shutdown button
seconds will turn on the card again.
The button is invalid when the card acts as a SCU card.
AETH1 The ACU program
downloading
AETH2
interface
SETH1 FTP program
downloading
Interface type: RJ-45 Note 1
interface for the
SCU / control plane
SETH2
access interfaces 1
and 2 for the control
plane
Note 1: Each RJ-45 interface on the card panel is provided with the yellow and green indicator LEDs. When the
yellow indicator LED is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the yellow indicator LED is blinking, the port
is transmitting data. When the green indicator LED is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the green
indicator LED is blinking, the port is receiving data.
560 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.7.4 Specifications of the ASCU Card
Table 6-397 Mechanical Parameters of the ASCU Card
ASCU 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-398 Power Consumption of the ASCU Card
ASCU 33
6.12.8 The SCU Card
The SCU card number is 2.119.290.
6.12.8.1 Function
u Processes signals from the 56 GCCs of the line interface cards and the optical
transponder cards as well as the two DCCs of the OSC card, altogether 58
DCCM signals.
u Forwards DCCM signals, enables or disables DCCs, and provides information

on whether a DCC is activated.
u Provides the program download interface; detects whether the cards are
present based on the hardware.
Figure 6-152 illustrates the SCU card’s composition and signal flow.
Version: D 561
Figure 6-152 Composition and Signal Flow of the SCU Card
The functions of each module on the SCU card in the figure are described as below.
u Signaling plane control module
Controls, monitors, and manages the card’s functional modules, receives and
processes overhead signals from the backplane, as well as implements the
processing, bus conversion, and protocol conversion of 58 DCCs.
4 Enables communication between the active and the standby SCU cards.
4 Implements data transmission between the SCU card and the EMU card
via the Ethernet and reports the data to the network management system.
6.12.8.3 Panel
The distribution of the indicator LEDs and interfaces on the SCU card panel are the
same as those on the ASCU card panel. The only difference is that the ACT2, ALM2,
RUN HDD indicator LEDs and the HLT/RST button are invalid for the SCU card.
As the subrack control plane communication extension interfaces within an NE, the
SETH1 and the SETH2 interfaces are usually connected with any ETH interface on
the AIF card or any SETH interface on the ASCU card in another subrack within the
same NE for control plane communication extension between subracks.
562 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.8.4 Specifications of the SCU Card
Table 6-399 Mechanical Parameters of the SCU Card
SCU 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-400 Power Consumption of the SCU Card
SCU 15
6.12.9 The AIF Card
The AIF card number is 3.699.315.
6.12.9.1 Function
The AIF card provides auxiliary and management interfaces such as the alarm
output interface (the ALM interface), the local monitoring interface (the f interface),
and the network management system interface (the F interface).
6.12.9.2 Panel
See Figure 6-153 for the AIF card panel.
Version: D 563
Figure 6-153 The AIF Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the AIF card panel are described in
Table 6-401.
564 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-401 Description of the AIF Card Panel
Subrack alarm output Generally connected with the alarm

ALM
interface interface on the PDP. Interface type: DB9
f Local monitoring interface Connected with the LCT.
Output interface for Outputs control signals.

CTR external control switch Generally connected with client
ON / OFF events environment monitoring equipment.
Input interface for Inputs the signals to be monitored.

MON external monitoring Generally connected with the client
switch ON / OFF events side equipment to be monitored.
COM1 Extends the communication among

COM2 subracks within an NE.
Subrack communication
These three interfaces and the COM
extension interfaces 1, 2,
interfaces on the EMU card panel and Interface type: RJ-45 Note 1
COM3 and 3 within an NE
the PWR card panel belong to the
same HUB.
F1 Inputs and outputs the network
management monitoring information;
Network management generally connected with the network
F2 system interfaces 1 and 2 management system host. The F1,
F2, and the EMU card panel's ETH3
and ETH4 belong to one HUB.
ETH1 Control plane interfaces 1 Extends communication among the

ETH2 and 2 control planes.
Note 1: Each RJ-45 interface on the AIF card panel is provided with the yellow and green indicator LEDs. When the
yellow one is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the yellow one is blinking, the port is sending data.
When the green one is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the green one is blinking, the port is receiving
data.
Table 6-402 defines connectors on the previous interfaces.
Table 6-402 Connectors on Interfaces of the AIF Card
Connector
Interface Connector Diagram Connector Number Description
Definition
1 E Signal ground
Driving signal of the alarm

ALM 2 SIREN
speaker
4 CALL Order wire call signal
Version: D 565
Table 6-402 Connectors on Interfaces of the AIF Card (Continued)
Connector
Interface Connector Diagram Connector Number Description
Definition
5 NUA Non-urgent alarm
6 G 0V
9 UA Urgent alarm
2 TD Inputs and outputs data to and

3 RD from the f interface
9 ECCO
f 4 ECCDO Output interface for the ECC
8 SECCO test
6 SECCDO
5 E Signal ground
2 CTRL1 The 1st control output signal
4 CTRL2 The 2nd control output signal
CTRL 6 CTRL3 The 3rd control output signal
8 CTRL4 The 4th control output signal
1, 3, 5, 7 E Signal ground
2 MON1 The 1st monitoring input signal
4 MON2 The 2nd monitoring input signal
MON 6 MON3 The 3rd monitoring input signal
8 MON4 The 4th monitoring input signal
1 FTP
COM1, COM2, Outputs Ethernet data
2 FTN
COM3, F1, F2,
3 FRP
ETH1, ETH2 Inputs Ethernet data
6 FRN
Note 1: The connectors undefined in this table are reserved and not used at present.
6.12.9.3 Specifications of the AIF Card
Table 6-403 Mechanical Parameters of the AIF Card
AIF 368 × 30
566 Version: D
6 Card
Power Consumption
Table 6-404 Power Consumption of the AIF Card
AIF 10
6.12.10 The EAIF Card
The EAIF card number is 3.699.332.
6.12.10.1 Function
The EAIF card provides the NE management card with extension interfaces, such
as the alarm output interface (the ALM interface), external switch ON / OFF events
output interface (HKC), external switch ON / OFF events monitor input interface
(HKA), the local monitoring interface (the f interface) and the network management
system interface (the F interface). The EAIF card is used in the FONST 5000
channel subrack.
Compared with the AIF card, the EAIF provides additional HKC and HKA interfaces.
The HKC is used to output external control signals. The HKA is used to input
external monitoring signals and usually connected to client monitoring equipment.
The HKA interface is used to monitor external switch ON / OFF events like access
control, humidity, temperature, naked flame, flooding, vibration and power supply
failure.
The 16 HKA interfaces on the EAIF card can select to connect devices that are to
be monitored. In the network management system, the EAIF card can report MON1
to MON16 alarms and set an alarm level for each alarm.
6.12.10.2 Panel
The EAIF card panel is shown in Figure 6-154.
Version: D 567
Figure 6-154 The EAIF Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the EAIF card panel are described in
Table 6-405.
568 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-405 Description of the EAIF Card Panel

ON or OFF indicates abnormal operating status; generally, ON indicates
poor communication between the card and the network management
system.


ALM
interface interface on the PDP.
Interface type: DB9
Local monitoring
f Connected with the LCT.
interface
HKC: output interface of Outputs control signals.
external control switch Generally connected with client
ON / OFF events environment monitoring equipment. Interface type:
HK
HKA: input interface of Inputs the signals to be monitored. SCSI-III 68-conductor plug
external monitoring Generally connected with the client
switch ON / OFF events side equipment to be monitored.
Extends the communication among

subracks within an NE.
Subrack communication
This interface and the COM
COM1 extension interface 1
interfaces on the EMU card panel
within an NE
and the PWR card panel belong to
the same HUB.
F1 Inputs and outputs the network
management monitoring Interface type: RJ-45 Note 1
Network management information; generally connected
system interfaces 1 and with the network management
F2
2 system host. The F1, F2, and the
EMU card panel's ETH3 and ETH4
belong to one HUB.
ETH1 Control plane interfaces Extends communication among the

ETH2 1 and 2 control planes.
Note 1: Each RJ-45 interface on the card panel is provided with the yellow and green indicator LEDs. When the
yellow one is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the yellow one is blinking, the port is sending data.
When the green one is ON, the port is linked up normally; when the green one is blinking, the port is receiving
data.
Table 6-406 defines connectors on the previous interfaces.
Version: D 569
Table 6-406 Definition for the Interface's Connectors on the EAIF Card
Connector Connector
Interface Connector Diagram Description
Number Definition
1 E Signal ground
2 SIREN Driving signal of the alarm speaker

ALM
6 G 0V
9 UA Urgent alarm
2 TD Inputs and outputs data to and from

3 RD the f interface
9 ECCO
f 4 ECCDO
Output interface for the ECC test
8 SECCO
6 SECCDO
5 E Signal ground
35 HKC 1 The 1st control output signal
36 HKC 2 The 2nd control output signal
37 HKC 3 The 3rd control output signal
38 HKC 4 The 4th control output signal

HKC
51 HKA 1 The 1st monitoring input signal
52 HKA 2 The 2nd monitoring input signal

HKA
53 HKA 3 The 3rd monitoring input signal
54 HKA 4 The 4th monitoring input signal
570 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-406 Definition for the Interface's Connectors on the EAIF Card (Continued)
Connector Connector
Interface Connector Diagram Description
Number Definition
1 to 32 E Signal ground
1 FTP
COM1, F1, Outputs Ethernet data
2 FTN
F2, ETH1
3 FRP
and ETH2 Inputs Ethernet data
6 FRN
Note 1: The connectors undefined in this table are reserved and not used at present.
6.12.10.3 Specifications of the EAIF Card
Table 6-407 Mechanical Parameters of the EAIF Card
EAIF 368 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-408 Power Consumption of the EAIF Card
EAIF 1
Version: D 571
6.12.11 The CAIF1 Card
The card number of the CAIF1 card is 2.200.440.
6.12.11.1 Function
The CAIF1 card is used in the OTH subrack(3030066).
u Outputs the system clock and 8 kHz frame timing clock to each card. The
output clock meets the application requirements of the cards.
u Processes the SSM signals in up to 57 directions, receives the 8 kHz line

synchronization timing signals from various cards, and controls the selection of
synchronization timing for each card.
u Provides level-3 synchronization reference source for the exterior, with the
BITS synchronization reference source of 2048 kHz and 2048 kbit/s available
for choice at the input and output interfaces; supports backup of the external
input clock and the output clock.
u Supports three operating modes: locked mode, holdover mode, and free
running mode.
u Selects and traces a suitable synchronization reference source automatically,

and can trace the external synchronization reference source the clock
extracted from the line.
u Performs high reliability and stability, so as to implement the automatic

switching between the active and standby clock cards when a fault occurs.
u Provides auxiliary and management interfaces such as the alarm output

interface (ALM), input interface for the signals to be monitored (MON), network
management system interface (F1) and subrack communication extension
interface within the NE (COM).
572 Version: D
6 Card
The card is used in the FONST 5000 to provide synchronization reference for each
tributary and for the system. Meanwhile, it receives the clock signals from each
service card as well as external clock signals, determines the priority levels of these
clock signals, and sends them to the terminal board for output.
Figure 6-155 illustrates the signal flows in the CAIF1 card.
Figure 6-155 Composition and Signal Flow of the CAIF1 Card
The functions of each module in the figure are described as follows:
u BMU module
4 Configures the card, reports alarms and faults, and switches the active and
the standby cards.
u Interface processing module
4 Inputs signals from each management and auxiliary interface on the card
panel.
4 Enables interconnection between part of the interfaces on the CAIF2 card

with the corresponding interfaces on other cards via the backplane.
u Clock processing module
Version: D 573
4 Processes the clock synchronization signals in the subrack.
4 Inputs and outputs clock signals into and from other cards in the subrack.
Provides power supply for the card.
The CAIF1 card panel is shown in Figure 6-156.
Figure 6-156 The CAIF1 Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the CAIF1 card panel are described in Table 6-409.
574 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-409 The CAIF1 Card Panel

ACT
indicator LED generally, ON indicates poor communication between

UA / NUA Alarm indicator LED alarm).
u LOCK: ON indicates that the clock is in the locked

mode.
LOCK /
Clock working status u FREE: ON indicates that the clock is in the free
FREE /
indicator LED running mode.
HOLD
u HOLD: ON indicates that the clock is in the hold
mode.
ALM
interface interface on the PDP.
Input interface for
Inputs the signals to be monitored.
external monitoring
MON Generally connected with the client
switch ON / OFF
side equipment to be monitored.
events
COM1 Extends the communication among
Subrack
subracks within an NE.
communication
The two interfaces and the COM
COM2 extension interfaces Interface type:
interfaces on the EMVU card panel
1 and 2 within an NE RJ-45
belong to the same HUB.
Inputs and outputs the network

management monitoring information;
Network
generally connected with the network
F1 management system
management system host. F1 and
interface 1
ETH3 and ETH4 on the EMVU card
panel belong to the same HUB.
Control plane access Extends communication among the

SETH1
interface 1 control planes.
Table 6-410 defines terminals on the aforesaid interfaces.
Version: D 575
Table 6-410 Terminals on interfaces of the CAIF1 card
Terminal Terminal Terminal

Interface Description
Diagram Number Definition
1 G 0V
2 SIREN Driving signal of the alarm buzzer

ALM
7 E Signal ground
8 UA Urgent alarm
2 MON1 The 1st monitoring input signal
4 MON2 The 2nd monitoring input signal
MON 6 MON3 The 3rd monitoring input signal
8 MON4 The 4th monitoring input signal
COM1, 1 FTP
Outputs Ethernet data
COM2, F1, 2 FTN
SETH1 3 FRP
Inputs Ethernet data
6 FRN
Note 1: The terminals undefined in this table are reserved and not used at present.
6.12.11.5 Specifications of the CAIF1 Card
Table 6-411 Mechanical Parameters of the CAIF1 Card
CAIF1 180×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-412 Power Consumption of the CAIF1 Card
CAIF1 15
576 Version: D
6 Card
6.12.12 The CAIF2 Card
The card number of the CAIF2 card is 2.200.462.
6.12.12.1 Function
The CAIF2 card is used in the OTH subrack (3030066).
u Outputs the system clock and 8KHz frame timing clock to each card. The
output clock meets the application requirements of the cards.
u Processes the SSM signals in up to 57 directions, receives the 8KHz line

synchronization timing signals from various cards, and controls the selection of
synchronization timing for each card.
u Provides level-3 synchronization reference source for the exterior, with the
BITS synchronization reference source of 2048 KHz and 2048 kbit/s available
for choice at the input and output interfaces; supports backup of the external
input clock and the output clock.
u Supports three operating modes: locked mode, holdover mode, and free
running mode.
u Selects and traces a suitable synchronization reference source automatically,

and can trace the external synchronization reference source the clock
extracted from the line.
u Performs high reliability and stability, so as to implement the automatic

switching between the active and standby clock cards when a fault occurs.
u Provides auxiliary and management interfaces such as the local monitoring

interface (f), control signal output interface (CTRL), subrack communication
extension interface within the NE (COM), and network management system
interface (F2) .
Version: D 577
The card is used in the FONST 5000 to provide synchronization reference for each
tributary and for the system. Meanwhile, it receives the clock signals from each
service card as well as external clock signals, determines the priority levels of these
clock signals, and sends them to the terminal board for output.
Figure 6-157 illustrates the signal flows in the CAIF2 card.
Figure 6-157 Composition and Signal Flow of the CAIF2 Card
u BMU module
4 Configures the card, reports alarms and faults, and switches the active and
the standby cards.
4 Inputs signals from each management and auxiliary interface on the card
panel.
4 Enables interconnection between part of the interfaces on the CAIF2 card

with the corresponding interfaces on other cards via the backplane.
u Clock processing module
578 Version: D
6 Card
4 Processes the clock synchronization signals in the subrack.
4 Inputs and outputs clock signals into and from other cards in the subrack.
The CAIF2 card panel is shown in Figure 6-158.
Figure 6-158 The CAIF2 Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the CAIF2 card panel are described in Table 6-413.
Version: D 579
Table 6-413 The CAIF2 Card Panel

ACT

UA / NUA Alarm indicator LED alarm).
u LOCK: ON indicates that the clock is in the locked

LOCK / mode.
Clock working
FREE / u FREE: ON indicates that the clock is in the free running
status indicator LED
HOLD mode.
u HOLD: ON indicates that the clock is in the hold mode.
Local monitoring
f Connected with the LCT.
interface
Outputs control signals.
external control
CTRL Generally connected with client environment
switch ON / OFF
monitoring equipment.
events
COM3 Subrack Extends the communication among subracks
communication within an NE.
Interface
extension interfaces The two interfaces and the COM interfaces on
COM4 type: RJ-
3 and 4 within an the EMVU card panel belong to the same
45
NE HUB.
Inputs and outputs the network management
Network monitoring information; generally connected
F2 management with the network management system host. F2
system interface 2 and ETH3 and ETH4 on the EMVU card panel
belong to the same HUB.
Control plane Extends communication among the control

SETH2
access interface 2 planes.
580 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-414 Terminals on Interfaces of the CAIF2 Card
Inter- Terminal Terminal Terminal

Description
face Diagram Number Definition
6 TD Outputs data from the f interface
8 RD Inputs data to the f interface
1 ECCO
f 2 ECCDO Output interface for the ECC protocol
4 SECCO test
5 SECCDO
3, 7 E Signal ground
2 CTRL1 The 1st control output signal
4 CTRL2 The 2nd control output signal
CTRL 6 CTRL3 The 3rd control output signal
8 CTRL4 The 4th control output signal
COM3, 1 FTP
Outputs Ethernet data
COM4, 2 FTN
F2 3 FRP
Inputs Ethernet data

SETH2 6 FRN
6.12.12.5 Specifications of the CAIF2 Card
Table 6-415 Mechanical Parameters of the CAIF2 Card
CAIF2 180×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-416 Power Consumption of the CAIF2 Card
CAIF2 15
Version: D 581
6.12.13 The CTU Card
The card number of the CTU card is 2.200.455.
6.12.13.1 Function
As the clock terminal board of the OTH subrack, the CTU card provides two 1PPS
+TOD external time synchronization interfaces (RJ-45) and two CKIO external clock
input interfaces (DB9).
Serving as the clock terminal board, the CTU card cooperates with the clock card to
input and output clock and time synchronization signals.
Figure 6-159 illustrates the signal flows in the CTU card.
Figure 6-159 Composition and Signal Flow of the CTU Card
4 Introduces clock and time signals from the panel.
582 Version: D
6 Card
4 Works together with the clock card to transfer clock and time signals via
the backplane.
The CTU card panel is shown in Figure 6-160.
Version: D 583
Figure 6-160 The CTU Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the CTU card panel are described in Table 6-417.
584 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-417 The CTU Card Panel
Working status
ACT ON (green): the power supply card has normal output.
indicator LED
Working status
CKALM1 ON indicates normal power supply to the equipment.
indicator LED
Working status
CKALM2 ON indicates normal power supply to the equipment.
indicator LED
External clock
CKIO1 Standard clock synchronization interface
interface 1
External clock
CKIO2 Standard clock synchronization interface
interface 2
1PPS+TOD time Pulse Per Second + Time of Day, standard external
TOD1
interface 1 time synchronization interface.
1PPS+TOD time Pulse Per Second + Time of Day, standard external

TOD2
interface 1 time synchronization interface.
Table 6-418 Terminals on Interfaces of the CTU Card
Inter-
Terminal Terminal Terminal
face Description
Diagram Number Definition
Name
2 ECKI1S External clock input signal line
External clock output signal

3 ECKO1S
line
CKIO1,
7 ECKI1G External clock input signal line
CKIO2
External clock output signal
8 ECKO1G
line
5 E Signal ground
3 PPS_N PPS signal input
4 GND
Signal ground
TOD1, 5 GND
TOD2 6 PPS_P PPS signal output
7 TOD_N TOD signal input
8 TOD_P TOD signal output
Version: D 585
6.12.13.5 Specification of the CTU Card
Table 6-419 Mechanical Parameters of the CTU Card
CTU 368×30
Power Consumption
Table 6-420 Power Consumption of the CTU Card
CTU 2
6.12.14 The PWRV Card
The card number of the PWRV card is 2.200.453.
6.12.14.1 Function
u The PWRV card provides the -48V power supply for the OTH subrack of the
FONST 5000.
u Provides protection against over-voltage, under-voltage and transient

interruption.
u Protects the equipment against lightning shock, and provides the lightning
protection failure alarm output interface.
u Provides the backup 5V power supply (with maximum current of 4A) for the
equipment.
u The PWRV cards in the slots F0 and 18 provide power supply for the front side
of the subrack, and performs 1+1 active and standby protection; the PWRV
cards in the slots 37 and 38 provide power supply for the back side of the
subrack and performs the 1+1 active and standby protection.
586 Version: D
6 Card
See Figure 6-161 for the PWRV card panel.
Figure 6-161 The PWRV Card Panel
The interfaces and LEDs on the PWRV card panel are described in Table 6-421.
Table 6-421 The PWRV Card Panel
Power supply output indicator ON (green): the power supply card

ACT
LED has normal output.
Lightning protection failure alarm ON (red) indicates failure of the

ALM
indicator LED lightning protection function.
Introduces the -48 DC power supply

–48V, 0V DC power supply interface
from the PDP unit.
Version: D 587
6.12.14.3 Specification of the PWRV Card
Table 6-422 Mechanical Parameters of the PWRV Card
PWRV 148×32
Power Consumption
Table 6-423 Power Consumption of the PWRV Card
PWRV 20
6.12.15 The PWR Card
The card number of the PWR card is 2.933.289 / 2.933.286.
This equipment provides two types of PWR cards. They are different in whether to
provide the clock function required by GCC channels. The PWR card with the clock
function is numbered with 2.933.289 and the card without the clock function with
2.933.286. The PWR card with the clock function is usually configured in the
channel subrack.
6.12.15.1 Function
u The -48V power access function: Inputs one -48 V power supply; that is,
inducts the -48 V power supply from the PDP to the subrack and feeds 50 A to
the other cards in the subrack centrally.
u Standby 5 V power supply: Provides the 5 V standby power supply for other
cards in the subrack.
u Clock function: Provides the system’s GCCs with 17 channels of 19.44 MHz
clock and seventeen 8 kHz FP signals. Only the PWR card numbered with
WKE2.933.289 performs this function.
588 Version: D
6 Card
u Accessing Ethernet signals: Accesses one Ethernet signal. When the

equipment is not configured with the AIF card, this card’s Ethernet interface
may perform the subrack communication extension within an NE.
u 1+1 hot standby protection: Supports 1+1 hot standby.
6.12.15.2 Panel
See Figure 6-162 for the PWR card panel.
Figure 6-162 The PWR Card Panel
The interfaces and indicator LEDs on the PWR card panel are described in
Table 6-424.
Version: D 589
Table 6-424 Description of the PWR Card Panel
The PWR card with the number 2.933.289:

u Blinking quickly: active, normal operating status.
u Blinking slowly: standby, normal operating status.
u ON: standby. The SW button is not pressed down for
locking the status or the internal device is faulty (see
Working the description of the SW button).
ACT
indicator LED u OFF: The PWR card is not powered or fails.
The PWR card with the number 2.933.286:
u ON: The PWR card works normally. The ACT indicator
LEDs of the active and standby PWR cards should be
ON when the card works normally.
u OFF: The PWR card is not powered or fails.
Inputs the -48 V power supply from the PDP to the subrack.
Definitions of the terminals are described as follows:
Input interface
POWER of the power
supply
It is valid only for the PWR card with the clock function (the
card number is 2.933.289).
In the normal working status, SW buttons should be
pressed down on both the active and the standby cards.
Under this condition, the ACT indicator LEDs on the active
Button for
and the standby cards should respectively blink quickly and
SW locking the
slowly.
status
Before switching between the active and the standby cards
or replacing the card, you should release the SW button on
the active card. Under this condition, the card’s ACT
indicator LED is ON, indicating the card is not active and
can be unplugged safely.
590 Version: D
6 Card
Table 6-424 Description of the PWR Card Panel (Continued)
It is used to extend the communication between subracks

Subrack
within an NE. This interface, the COM interface on the EMU
communication
card panel, and the three COM interfaces on the AIF card
COM Note 1 extension
panel belong to the same HUB. For definitions of the
interfaces
terminals on this interface, see the description of the AIF
within an NE
card’s COM interfaces.
Note 1: The COM interface is equipped with the yellow and green indicator LEDs. When the
corresponding indicator LED is solid yellow, the port is linked up normally; when this
indicator LED blinks, the port is sending data. When the corresponding indicator LED is
solid green, the port is linked up normally; when this indicator LED blinks, the port is
receiving data.
6.12.15.3 Specifications of the PWR Card
Table 6-425 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card
PWR 190 × 30
Power Consumption
Table 6-426 Power Consumption of the PWR Card
PWR 8
6.13 DCM
The following introduces the functions, panel, and specifications of the DCM.
The DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module) can compensate the dispersion of

optical signals accumulated during the process of signal transmission in optical
fibers and compresses the optical pulse signals to resume the optical signals. The
DCM is used together with the optical amplification card to enable log-haul signal
transmission with optical regeneration.
Version: D 591
The DCM is an outlaid unit and is installed in the DCM plug-in frame. Each DCM
plug-in frame can contain two DCMs at most.
It is applicable for the FONST 1000 / 3000 / 4000 / 5000.
6.13.1 Function
u Compensates dispersion for different transmission distances. The label on the

DCM panel indicates the distances in which the DCM can compensate the
dispersion.
u Compensates the dispersion accumulated in the fiber transmission and

compresses the optical pulses to restore the optical signal.
u Cooperates with the optical amplification card to implement long-haul

transmission with optical regeneration.
6.13.2 Panel
Figure 6-163 The DCM Panel
The following gives a description of the DCM panel.
u Optical interfaces: The DCM provides one pair of optical interfaces on its panel,
without distinction for Rx and Tx.
u DCM label: The label on the DCM panel indicates the fiber type, wavelength
band, and distance for which the DCM can compensates. In Figure 6-163, the
check boxes of C and 40km are selected. It indicates that the DCM
compensates C-band signals on the G.652 fiber for 40 km.
592 Version: D
6 Card
6.13.3 DCM Specifications
Optical lines with a rate of 10 Gbit/s or above are sensitive to dispersion. Therefore,
dispersion compensation is required for lines longer than a certain distance. The
compensation solution can be selected according to Table 6-427 and Table 6-428
based on the chromatic dispersion of 20 ps/nm per km of the G.652 optical fiber.
Table 6-427 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza- Operating
Compensa- Maximum Input
Module Slope tion Wave-
tion Insertion PMD (ps) Power
Type Compensa- Dependent length
Distance Loss (dB) Allowed
tion Rate Loss (dB) Range (nm)
(km) (dBm)
1 20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20

2 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
3 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20 1528 to
90% to 110%
4 80 8 0.7 0.1 20 1568
5 100 9 0.8 0.1 20
6 120 9.8 0.3 0.1 20
Table 6-428 The G.655 Fiber - DCM Specifications
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza-
Compensa- Maximum Input Operating
Module Slope tion
tion Insertion PMD (ps) Power Wavelength
Type Compensa- Dependent
Distance Loss (dB) Allowed Range (nm)
tion Rate Loss (dB)
(km) (dBm)
1 40 5 0.5 0.3 24
90% to 1528 to
2 80 8 0.7 0.3 24
110% 1568
3 120 9.8 0.9 0.3 24
Table 6-429 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM
Item Panel Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)
DCM 50 × 491 × 270.5
Version: D 593
7 Wire and Cable
The following introduces various wires, cables and connectors for the FONST 5000.
Power Cable and Earth Ground Cable
Alarm Cable
Clock Cable
E1 Cable
Network Cable
Cable for the HK Interface
Optical Fiber Jumper
594 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.1 Power Cable and Earth Ground Cable
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the power
cable and earth ground cable.
7.1.1 Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064)
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the cabinet
power cable (for the PDP 3000064).
7.1.1.1 Application
The cabinet power cable is used to introduce the external -48V power supply to the
PDP in the cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to the power distribution
cabinet and the earth ground bar in the equipment room; the other end is connected
to the PDP unit on the top of the cabinet.
7.1.1.2 Structure
The cabinet power cables of the PDP (3000064) include the 25 mm2 power cable,
the 16 mm2 power cable, and the PE protection earth ground cable, as shown in
Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064)
Color Code Quantity Description
Blue 408000003 8 -48 V power cable (25 mm2)
Black 408000006 4 GND power earth ground cable (25 mm2)
Blue 3.696.097 8 -48 V power cable (16 mm2)
Black 408000033 4 GND power earth ground cable (16mm2)
Yellow- / green 3.696.100 1 PE protection earth ground cable
Note 1: When the input power supply of the PDP is 50 A, use the 25 mm2 power cable and
power earth ground cable. When the input power supply of the PDP is 20 A, use the 16
mm2 power cable and power earth ground cable.
For the -48 V power cable and the PE protection earth cable, one end is the cord
end terminal, and the other end is the bare wire. See Figure 7-1.
Version: D 595
Figure 7-1 The -48 V Power Cable and PE Protection Cable for the Cabinet (Connected with
the PDP 3000064)
One end of the 25 mm2 GND power earth ground cable is the M6 uninsulated ring
terminal and the other end is the bare wire, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 GND Cabinet Power Cable (25 mm2, Connected with the PDP 3000064)
One end of the 16 mm2 GND power earth ground cable is the M6 copper cord end
terminal and the other end is the bare wire, as shown in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 GND Cabinet Power Cable (16 mm2, Connected with the PDP 3000064)
7.1.1.3 Connection
One end of the cabinet power cable is connected with the PDP, and the other end is
connected with the head of row cabinets. Table 7-2 lists the connection relationship
of the cabinet power cable with the PDP.
Table 7-2 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064)
Color Connector on PDP External Connector

Connectors -48V_A_1 to -48V_A_4 of ACB
(active) External -48 V DC power
Blue
Connectors -48V_B_1 to -48V_B_4 of ACB supply
(standby)
External power earth

Black Four GND connectors on the busbar
ground
Yellow- / External protection earth

PE connector on the left of XS6 on the PDP
green ground
596 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.1.2.1 Application
7.1.2.2 Structure
The cabinet power cable of the PDP (3000068) is shown in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 The Cabinet Power Cable for the PDP 3000068
Color Code Quantity Description
Blue 408000021 2 -48 V power cable
Black 408000020 2 GND power earth ground cable
PE protection earth ground

Yellow- / green 408000019 1
cable
One end of the -48 V power cable / PE protection earth ground cable / GND power
earth ground cable is the M6 uninsulated ring terminal and the other end is the bare
wire, as shown in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 The Cabinet Power Cable for the PDP 3000068
Version: D 597
7.1.2.3 Connection
One end of the cabinet power cable is connected with the PDP, and the other end is
connected with the head of row cabinets. Table 7-4 lists the connection relationship
of the cabinet power cable with the PDP.
Table 7-4 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Power Cable (for the PDP 3000068)
Color Connector on PDP External Connector

-48V_A connector (active)
Blue External -48 V DC power supply
-48V_B connector (standby)
0V_A connector (active)

Black External power earth ground
0V_B connector (standby)
Yellow- / green PE connector External protection earth ground
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the cabinet
7.1.3.1 Application
7.1.3.2 Structure
The cabinet power cable of the PDP (3030078) includes the 35mm2 power cable
and 70mm2 power cable and PE protection earth ground cable, as shown in
Table 7-5.
598 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-5 Description for the Cabinet Power Cables (to PDP-3000078)
Color Cable Number Quantity Description
-48V power cable

Blue 408000138 4
(35mm2)
GND power earth ground

Black 408000139 4
cable (35mm2)
-48V power cable

Blue 408000135 2
(70mm2)
GND power earth ground

Black 408000134 2
cable (70mm2)
PE protection earth
Yellow- / green 3.696.100 1
ground cable
Note 1: When the PDP input power supply is 200A, you should select the 70mm2 power cable
and power ground cable. When the PDP input power supply is 20A, 100A and 120A,
you should select the 35mm2 power cable and power ground cable.
One end of the -48V power cable and the GND power earth ground cable is the
dual-hole uninsulated crimped terminal and the other end is the bare wire, as shown
in Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 The Cabinet Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)
One end of the PE protection earth ground cable is the cord end terminal and the
other end is the bare wire, as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 The PE Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-3000078)
7.1.3.3 Connection
One end of the cabinet power cables is connected to the PDP unit and the other end
is connected to the head of row cabinet in the equipment room. See Table 7-6 for
the connections between the cabinet power cables and the PDP.
Version: D 599
Table 7-6 The Connection of the Cabinet Power Cable (PDP-3000078)
External
Color PDP Connection End Connection
End
Four channels of external power supply input
u External -48 V power input connector (A) Two channels of external power
supply input
4 The connector at the left side u The connector at the right side
corresponds to SW1-1 of input connector (A) of the
external power supply -48V
4 The connector at the right side External -48V
corresponds to SW1-1 and
Blue corresponds to SW1-2 DC power
SW1-2.
u External -48 V power input connector (B) supply
u The connector at the left side of
4 The connector at the left side input connector (A) of the
corresponds to SW2-1 external power supply -48V
4 The connector at the right side SW2-2.
corresponds to SW2-2
Four channels of external power supply input

u External 0V power input connector (A) Two channels of external power
supply input
4 The connector at the left side u The connector at the right side
corresponds to SW1-1 of input connector (A) of the
external power supply 0V
4 The connector at the right side
corresponds to SW1-1 and External power
Black corresponds to SW1-2
SW1-2. earth ground
u External 0V power input connector (B)
u The connector at the left side of
4 The connector at the left side input connector (B) of the
corresponds to SW2-1 external power supply 0V
4 The connector at the right side SW2-2.
corresponds to SW2-2
External
Yellow- /
PE connector at the left side of XS5. - protection earth
green
ground
600 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Warning:
u Make sure the switch of the external power supply is shut off before
connecting or removing the cabinet power cables. Do not connect or
remove the power cables while they are powered.
u It is advised to install all power cables at a time.
7.1.4 Subrack Power Cable (for the PDP 3000064)
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the subrack
7.1.4.1 Application
The subrack power cable connects the PDP on the top of the cabinet to the power
interface in the subrack and inducts the -48 V power supply to the subrack from the
PDP.
7.1.4.2 Structure
The power cable for the OTH subrack (3030066) of the PDP (3000064) is shown in
Figure 7-7. The subrack side is a double-hole terminal, and the PDP side is a cord
end terminal. The cable code is 408.000.070 / 408.000.071.
Note 1: The structure of the 408000070 subrack power cable is cord end terminal + blue power
cable + double-hole terminal.
Note 2: The structure of the 408000071 subrack power cable is cord end terminal + black power
cable + double-hole terminal.
Figure 7-7 The Subrack Power Cable for the PDP 3000064
Version: D 601
The power cable for the channel subrack is shown in Figure 7-8. The subrack side is
a D-type female five-conductor power plug, and the PDP side has two cord end
terminals. The cable code is 3.696.217.
(1) -48 V, blue (2) 0 V, black
The D type five-conductor plug’s pins are illustrated in Figure 7-9. The pins A1, A2
and A5 are connected inside the plug, as well as the pin A3 is connected to the pin
A4 inside the plug.
Figure 7-9 Definition of Connectors for the Subrack Power Cable (PDP 3000064)
7.1.4.3 Connection
The connection of the subrack power cable for the PDP (3000064) is shown in
Table 7-7.
602 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-7 Connection of the Subrack Power Cable with the PDP 3000064
Cable Name Cable Connector Connected to

-48V_A_1 to -48V_A_4 connectors
corresponding to XS2 and XS7 in area A on the
Cord end terminal (-48 PDP (active -48 V)
V, blue) -48V_B_1 to -48V_B_4 connectors
corresponding to XS3 and XS8 in area B on the
PDP (standby -48 V)
OTH subrack 0V_A_1 to 0V_A_4 connectors corresponding to

(3030066) XS4 and XS5 in area A on the PDP (active 0 V)
Cord end terminal (0 V,
power cable 0V_B_1 to 0V_B_4 connectors corresponding to
black)
XS9 and XS10 in area B on the PDP (standby 0
V)
Dual-hole terminal (-48 -48V connector on the PWRV card in the OTH
V, blue) subrack (3030066)
Dual-hole terminal (0 V, 0V connector on the PWRV card in the OTH

black) subrack (3030066)
-48V_A_1 to -48V_A_4 connectors

corresponding to XS2 and XS7 in area A on the
Cord end terminal (-48 PDP (active -48 V)
V, blue) -48V_B_1 to -48V_B_4 connectors
corresponding to XS3 and XS8 in area B on the
Channel PDP (standby -48 V)
subrack power 0V_A_1 to 0V_A_4 connectors corresponding to

cable XS4 and XS5 in area A on the PDP (active 0 V)
Cord end terminal (0 V,
0V_B_1 to 0V_B_4 connectors corresponding to
black)
XS9 and XS10 in area B on the PDP (standby 0
V)
D-type five-conductor The POWER interface on the PWR card in the

female plug channel subrack
Version: D 603
7.1.5.1 Application
The subrack power cable connects the PDP on the top of the cabinet to the power
interface in the subrack and inducts the -48 V power supply to the subrack from the
PDP.
7.1.5.2 Structure
The subrack power cable of the PDP (3000068) is shown in Figure 7-10. The
connector of the subrack power cable on the equipment side is a D-type five-
connector female plug for connecting with the subrack, and the connector on the
PDP side is the cord end terminal. The cable code is 3.696.217.
(1) -48 V, blue (2) 0 V, black
7.1.5.3 Connection
The connection of the subrack power cable for the PDP (3000068) is shown in
Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Connection of the Subrack Power Cable with the PDP 3000068
Cable Connector Connected to

The -48V_A_1 to -48V_A_3 connectors on the PDP
(active -48 V)
Cord end terminal (-48 V, blue)
The -48V_B_1 to -48V_B_3 connectors on the PDP
(standby -48 V)
XS1 on the PDP (active 0 V)

Cord end terminal (0 V, black)
XS2 on the PDP (standby 0 V)
The POWER interface on the PWR card of the FONST

D-type five-conductor female plug
5000
604 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the subrack
7.1.6.1 Application
The subrack power cable connects the PDP on the cabinet top and the power
interface in the subrack. The subrack power cable inducts the -48V power supply
from the PDP on the cabinet top to the subrack.
7.1.6.2 Structure
The power supply cable between the PDP (3000078) and the OTH subrack (3030066)
is shown in Figure 7-11. The cable number is 408000131 / 408000132.
Note 1: The structure of the 408000131 power cable is: Dual-hole uninsulated crimped terminal +
25 mm2 blue power cable + cord end terminal.
Note 1: The structure of the 408000132 power cable is: Dual-hole uninsulated crimped terminal +
25 mm2 double-sheathed black power cable + Dual-hole uninsulated crimped terminal.
Figure 7-11 The OTH Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)
The power supply cable between the PDP (3000078) and the channel subrack is
shown in Figure 7-12. The cable code is 408000140.
Version: D 605
Note 1: The structure of the 408000140 power cable is: D-type five-conductor power female plug
+ 16 mm2 blue- / black power cable + cord end terminal + M6 uninsulated ring terminal.
Figure 7-12 The Channel Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)
7.1.6.3 Connection
See Table 7-9 for the connection of the PDP (3000078) subrack power cable.
Table 7-9 The Connection of the Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078)
Cable Cable Connector Connected to

-48V output connector of branch power rail on the
PDP
u SW1-1 corresponds to the 1st output active
connector
Cord end terminal u SW1-2 corresponds to the 2nd output active
(-48V, blue) connector
u SW2-1 corresponds to the 1st output standby
connector
u SW2-2 corresponds to the 2nd output
OTH subrack
standby connector
(3030066)
0V output connector of branch power rail on the
power cable
PDP
u 0V_A_1 and 0V_A_2 correspond to the 1st
output active connector.
Dual-hole uninsulated
u 0V_A_3 and 0V_A_4 correspond to the 2nd
crimped terminal (0V,
black)
u 0V_B_1 and 0V_B_2 correspond to the 1st
output standby connector.
u 0V_B_3 and 0V_B_4 correspond to the 2nd
606 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-9 The Connection of the Subrack Power Cable (to PDP-3000078) (Continued)
Cable Cable Connector Connected to

The -48V terminal block on the PWRV card in the
crimped terminal (-48V,
OTH subrack (3030066)
blue)
The 0V terminal block on the PWRV card in the
crimped terminal (0V,
black)
-48V output connector of branch power rail on the

PDP
u SW1-1 corresponds to the 1st output active
connector
Cord end terminal u SW1-2 corresponds to the 2nd output active
(-48V, blue) connector
u SW2-1 corresponds to the 1st output standby
connector
u SW2-2 corresponds to the 2nd output
standby connector
Channel
0V output connector of branch power rail on the
subrack power
PDP
cable
u 0V_A_1 and 0V_A_2 correspond to the 1st
Cord end terminal (0V, u 0V_A_3 and 0V_A_4 correspond to the 2nd
black) output active connector.
u 0V_B_1 and 0V_B_2 correspond to the 1st
u 0V_B_3 and 0V_B_4 correspond to the 2nd
D-type five-conductor The POWER interface on the PWR card in the

female plug channel subrack

3000064)
protection earth ground cable (for the PDP 3000064).
Version: D 607
7.1.7.1 Application
The cabinet protection earth ground cable is used to connect the cabinet and the
PDP. The cabinet protection earth ground cable has been connected before delivery.
Installers should check the connection of the cabinet protection earth ground cable
on site according to the introduction.
7.1.7.2 Structure
Structure
The cabinet protection earth cable is shown in Figure 7-13. Its PDP side connector
is the cord end terminal, and cabinet side connector is the M6 uninsulated ring
terminal. The cable code is 408.000.007.
Figure 7-13 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable for the PDP 3000064
7.1.7.3 Connection
Connection
The connection of the cabinet protection earth ground cable is shown in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (for PDP
3000064)

Cord end terminal PE connector on the right of XS6 on the PDP
Uninsulated ring terminal Earth ground point at the top of the cabinet

3000068)
608 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.1.8.1 Application
PDP. The cabinet protection earth ground cable has been connected before delivery.
Installers should check the connection of the cabinet protection earth ground cable
on site according to the introduction.
7.1.8.2 Structure
Structure
The cabinet protection earth ground cable is shown in Figure 7-14. The M6
uninsulated copper terminal is on the PDP side, and the M6 pre-insulation ring
terminal is on the cabinet side. The cable code is 408.000.018.
Figure 7-14 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable for the PDP 3000068
7.1.8.3 Connection
Connection
Table 7-11 Connection Relationship of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (for the
PDP 3000068)

Uninsulated copper terminal The inside PE connector of the PDP
M6 pre-insulation ring terminal Earth ground point at the top of the cabinet
Version: D 609

3000078)
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the cabinet
7.1.9.1 Application
PDP.
Note:
The cabinet protection earth ground cables have been connected before
delivery. Users need to check the connection conditions on site against
the cable descriptions.
7.1.9.2 Structure
Structure of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable for the PDP (3000078)
The cabinet protection earth ground cable for the PDP (3000078) is shown in
Figure 7-15. The cable at the PDP side connects the cord end terminal and the
cable connector at the cabinet side is M6 uninsulated ring terminal. The cable code
is 408000007.
Figure 7-15 The Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-3000078)
7.1.9.3 Connection
610 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-12 Connection of the Cabinet Protection Earth Ground Cable (to PDP-3000078)

Cord end terminal PE connector on the right side of XS5 on the PDP
Uninsulated ring terminal The earth ground point on the top of the cabinet
7.1.10 Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable
protection earth ground cable.
7.1.10.1 Application
The subrack protection earth ground cable is used to connect the subrack and the
protection earth ground connector of the cabinet.
The subrack protection earth ground cable inside the cabinet has been connected
before delivery. Installers should check the connection of the subrack protection
earth ground cable on site according to the introduction. When adding subracks for
capacity expansion, users should connect the subrack protection earth ground
cables as follows.
7.1.10.2 Structure
The FONST 5000's subrack protection earth ground cable is shown in Figure 7-16.
The cable has M6 pre-insulation ring terminals at both ends and a yellow- / green
cable between them. The cable code is 3.696.084.
Figure 7-16 The Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable
7.1.10.3 Connection
The connection of the subrack protection earth ground cable is shown in Table 7-13.
Version: D 611
Table 7-13 Connection of the Subrack Protection Earth Ground Cable

Uninsulated ring tongue crimped Vertical mounting flange / cabinet top earth ground
terminal point / cabinet bottom earth ground point
Uninsulated ring tongue crimped

Subrack earth ground hole
terminal
7.2 Alarm Cable
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the alarm
cable.
7.2.1 Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the alarm
cable for the head of row cabinet.
7.2.1.1 Application
The alarm cable for the head of row cabinet is used to connect the PDP with the
head of row cabinet, for outputting the cabinet alarm signals to the head of row
cabinet from the cabinet.
7.2.1.2 Structure
One end of the alarm cable for the head of row cabinet is a three-conductor D-type
connector and the other end is a three-conductor cable led out by the connector. As
shown in Figure 7-17, the brown wire outputs CALL (order wire call) signal, the
black wire outputs NUA (non-critical alarm) signal and the blue wire outputs UA
(critical alarm) signal. The cable code is 3.695.135.
612 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
(1) Brown, order wire call (CALL) (2) Black, non-urgent (3) Blue, urgent alarm (UA)
alarm (UNA)
Figure 7-17 The Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet
Note:
Installers need to make plugs for the head of row cabinet by themselves
according to the situation of the head of row cabinet in the equipment
room.
7.2.1.3 Connection
Table 7-14 shows the connection relationship of the alarm cable for the head of row
cabinet.
Table 7-14 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the Head of Row Cabinet

The XP2 interface of the PDP 3000051
Three-conductor D-type connector The XP1 interface of the PDP 3000064
The XPB1 interface of the PDP 3000078
Three-conductor cable The head of row cabinet
7.2.2 Subrack Alarm Cable (for the PDP 3000068)
Version: D 613
7.2.2.1 Application
The subrack alarm cable connects the subrack and the PDP, and outputs the
subrack alarms to the PDP.
7.2.2.2 Structure
Structure
One end of the channel subrack alarm cable for the PDP (3000068) is the DE-9
connector and the other end is the RJ-45 connector, as shown in Figure 7-18. The
cable code is 409.000.013.
Figure 7-18 The Subrack Alarm Cable for the PDP 3000068
7.2.2.3 Connection
Connection
Table 7-15 shows the connection relationship of the subrack alarm cable.
Table 7-15 Connection Relationship of the Subrack Alarm Cable (for the PDP 3000068)

RJ-45 connector One among the idle sockets AlmIn1 to AlmIn3 on the PDP.
The ALM interface on the AIF / EAIF card in the channel

DE-9 connector
subrack.
614 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.2.3.1 Application
subrack alarms to the PDP.
7.2.3.2 Structure
The OTH subrack (3030066) alarm cable for the PDP (3000064) is a universal
straight-through network cable. Both ends of the network cable are installed with the
RJ-45 connectors (also known as crystal heads), as shown in Figure 7-19. The
One end of the channel subrack alarm cable for the PDP (3000064) is the DE-9
connector and the other end is the RJ-45 connector (crystal head in general), as
shown in Figure 7-20. The cable code is 409.000.013.
Version: D 615
7.2.3.3 Connection
Table 7-16 shows the connection relationship of the subrack alarm cable of the
PDP (3000064).
Table 7-16 Connection of the Subrack Alarm Cable with the PDP 3000064
Cable
Connected to
Connector
PDP side Any idle socket in AlmIn1 to AlmIn4 on the PDP
The ALM interface on the CAIF1 card in the OTH subrack

Subrack side
The ALM interface on the AIF / EAIF card in the channel subrack
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the subrack
alarm cable (for the PDP 3000078).
7.2.4.1 Application
subrack alarm to the PDP.
616 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.2.4.2 Structure
The PDP (3000078) and the OTH subrack (3000066) alarm cable is a universal
straight-through cable. Both ends of the network cable are installed with the RJ-45
connectors (commonly known as crystal head), as shown in Figure 7-21. The cable
code is 3.695.095.
Figure 7-21 The OTH Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078)
The alarm cable between the PDP (3000078) and the channel subrack is shown in
Figure 7-22. One end is the DE-9P connector and and the other end is the RJ-45
connector (commonly known as crystal head). The cable code is 409000013.
Figure 7-22 The Channel Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078)
7.2.4.3 Connection
Table 7-17 shows the connection relationship of the subrack alarm cable of the
PDP (3000078).
Version: D 617
Table 7-17 Connection of the Subrack Alarm Cable (to PDP-3000078)

PDP side RJ-45 connector Sockets XS1 to XS3 on the PDP
ALM interface on the CAIF1 card in the
RJ-45 connector
Subrack side
The ALM interface on the AIF / EAIF
DE-9 connector
card in the channel subrack
7.2.5 PDP Alarm Cable
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the FONST
5000's PDP alarm cable .
7.2.5.1 Application
The PDP alarm cable is used to connect the PDPs at the cabinet front side and rear
side, so as to cascade the alarms of the two PDPs.
7.2.5.2 Structure
The alarm cable of PDP (3000064) is universal straight-through cable. Both ends of
the network cable are installed with the RJ-45 connectors (commonly known as
crystal head), as shown in Figure 7-23. The cable code is 3.695.095.
Figure 7-23 The PDP (3000064) Alarm Cable
Two ends of the PDP (3000078) alarm cable are both D-type 4-conductor connector
and the appearance is shown in Figure 7-24. The cable code is 409000084.
618 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Figure 7-24 The PDP (3000078) Alarm Cable
7.2.5.3 Connection
The connection of the alarm cable for the PDP (3000064) is shown in Table 7-18.
Table 7-18 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the PDP (3000064)

One of sockets "AlmIn1" to "AlmIn4" on the PDP at the front of
RJ-45 connector
the cabinet
One of sockets "AlmIn1" to "AlmIn4" on the PDP at the rear of
RJ-45 connector
the cabinet
The connection of the alarm cable for the PDP (3000078) is shown in Table 7-19.
Table 7-19 Connection of the Alarm Cable for the PDP (3000078)

The corresponding one of sockets "XP1" to "XP3" on the PDP
D-type four-conductor
at the front of the cabinet Note 1
The corresponding one of sockets "XP1" to "XP3" on the PDP
D-type four-conductor
at the rear of the cabinet
Note 1: The alarm cascade connectors (XP1 to XP3) on the PDP (3000078) correspond to the
alarm convergence connectors (XS1 to XS3) on the subrack one to one. When two
PDPs are installed inside one cabinet, if the alarm cable of the front part of the subrack
is connected with the XS1 connector of the front PDP and the alarm cable of the rear
part of the subrack is connected with the XS2 connector of the rear PDP, users should
respectively cascade the XP1 connector of the front PDP and the XP2 connector of the
rear PDP.
7.3 Clock Cable
The following introduces the application, structure and connection of the clock cable.
Version: D 619
7.3.1 Application
The clock cable is used to connect the equipment clock interface and the
synchronization reference source or the lower-level clock.
7.3.2 Structure
See Figure 7-25 for the interfaces on the external clock cable. The cable code is
3.695.084 / 3.695.085.
Figure 7-25 The Interface of the External Clock Cable
Table 7-20 defines the pins of the external clock cable.
Table 7-20 The Definition for the Pins of the External Clock Cable
75Ω Clock Cable 120Ω Clock Cable

Cable Termin- Wire Termin- Definition
Wire Color
al No. Property al No.
Insulated, External clock input
2 Core 2
transparent signal
The 1st cable
Shielded Insulated, External clock input
7 7
wire yellow ground
Insulated, External clock output

3 Core 3
The 2nd transparent signal
cable Shielded Insulated, External clock output
8 8
wire yellow ground
- - - 5 - General signal ground
Note 1: The pins not listed here in the table are reserved for future use.
7.3.3 Connection
See Table 7-21 for the connection of the external clock cable.
620 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-21 Description of the External Clock Cable Connection

DE-9 connector The CKIO1 or CKIO2 interface on the CTU card
The other end of the cable External synchronization reference interface
The connection of the cable is shown in Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 The Connection of the External Clock Cable
7.4 E1 Cable
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the E1 cable.
7.4.1 Application
The E1 cable is used to access the E1 client side signals to the corresponding E1
interfaces on the OSC / EOSC card.
Version: D 621
7.4.2 Structure
The E1 cable has two types: the 75 Ω E1 cable and the 120 Ω E1 cable. One end of
the E1 cable is DE-9P connector, and the other end is the bare wire. The plug and
appearance of the E1 cable are shown in Figure 7-27. The cable code is 3.695.431 /
3.695.432.
Figure 7-27 Appearance of the DE-9 Connector
The color-coding scheme for the DE-9P connector of the E1 cable (75 Ω) is shown
in Table 7-22.
Table 7-22 Pinout and Wiring for the DE-9P Connector of the E1 Cable (75 Ω)
Connector
E1 Signal Note 1 Cable Number Cable Property Note 2
Number
1 Internal conductor (core)
R1 1
6 Shield (ground)

T1 2
7 Shield (ground)

R2 3
8 Shield (ground)

T2 4
9 Shield (ground)
Note 1: Ri indicates the i-th input and Ti indicates the i-th output. The terminal not listed here is
temporarily not in use.
Note 2: The shielded copper foil inside the plastic casing is connected to the metal shell of the
plug.
The color-coding scheme for the DE-9P connector of the E1 cable (120 Ω) is shown
in Table 7-23.
622 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Table 7-23 Pinout and Wiring for the DE-9P Connector of the E1 Cable (120 Ω)
Connector
E1 Signal Note 1 Cable Number Cable Color
Number
1 Blue with one red bar
R1 The 1st twisted pair
6 Blue with one black bar
2 The 2nd twisted Pink with one red bar
T1
7 pair Pink with one black bar
3 Green with one red bar
R2 The 3rd twisted pair
8 Green with one black bar
4 Orange with one red bar
T2 The 4th twisted pair
9 Orange with one black bar
Note 1: Ri indicates the i-th input and Ti indicates the i-th output. The terminal not listed here is
temporarily not in use.
7.4.3 Connection
The connection relationship of the E1 cable is shown in Table 7-24.
Table 7-24 Connection of the E1 Cable

Bare wire The corresponding interface on the DDF
DE-9P connector The E1 interface on the OSC / EOSC card
7.5 Network Cable
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the network
cable.
7.5.1 Network Cable between the Network Management

System and the Equipment
cable between between the network management system and the equipment for the
FONST 5000.
Version: D 623
7.5.1.1 Application
The network cables are used to connect the OTNM2000 host with the equipment for
transferring the supervisory signal.
7.5.1.2 Structure
The network management cable connected to the is the universal network cable,
including straight-through and cross-over network cables. Both ends of the network
cable are installed with the RJ-45 plugs (also known as crystal heads), as shown in
Figure 7-28. The cable code is 3.695.095 (straight-through) / 3.696.096 (cross-over).
Figure 7-28 The Network Cable
7.5.1.3 Connection
u Cross-over Cable
One end of the cross-over cable connects with the F1 or F2 interface on the
equipment side directly, and the other end connects with the network card
interface of the network management computer.
u Straight-through Cable
Two straight-through network cables are used. One of them is used to connect
the F1 or F2 interface on the equipment side and the HUB, and the other is for
connecting the network card interface of the network management computer
and the HUB.
624 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.5.2 Network Cable between Subracks
cable between subracks for the FONST 5000.
7.5.2.1 Application
The network cables between subracks are arranged between the main subrack and
the extended subrack to achieve intercommunication between subracks on
monitoring information on the management plane and the control plane.
7.5.2.2 Structure
The network cables between subracks provided with the equipment are universal
straight-through network cables. Both ends of the network cable are installed with
the RJ-45 connectors (also known as crystal heads), as shown in Figure 7-29. The
Figure 7-29 The Network Cable
7.5.2.3 Connection
Generally, the network cables between subracks have been properly connected in
the cabinet before delivery, and are shipped together with the cabinet, and the on-
site installation is not needed. Table 7-25 shows the interconnection of monitoring
information between subracks.
Version: D 625
Table 7-25 Interconnection of Network Cables between Subracks
Main Subrack Extended Subrack

Type Remark
Interface Interface
Interconnection
Information The COM interface The COM interface
between extended
interconnection on the AIF Note 1 / on the FCU / FCVU /
subracks and the
Information between cards EMU / EMVU card EFCU / EFCVU card
main subrack
interconnection on
The ETH3 / ETH4
the management
Information interface on the EMU The ETH3 / ETH4
plane
interconnection / EMVU card or the interface on the
between NEs F1 / F2 interface on EFCU / EFCVU card
Concatenation
the AIF card
between extended
The SETH1 / SETH2
subracks and the
interface on the
The SETH1 / SETH2 main subrack
Information interconnection on the control ASCU card or the
interface on the SCU
plane ETH1 / ETH2
card
interface on the AIF
card
Note 1: The AIF cards include the CAIF1 card, the CAIF2 card, the EAIF card and the AIF card.
7.5.3 RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the RJ-45
cable for the CTR / MON interface of the FONST 5000.
7.5.3.1 Application
The RJ-45 cable for the CTR interface outputs control signals, and is generally
connected to the user environment monitoring equipment. The RJ-45 cable for the
MON interface is used to input signals to be monitored, and is generally connected
to the user’s equipment to be monitored.
7.5.3.2 Structure
The RJ-45 cable for the CTR / MON interface has the RJ-45 plug on the equipment
end and the bare wire on the other end. See Figure 7-30 for the appearance and
structure of the cable and the plug. The cable code is 3.695.458.
626 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Figure 7-30 The RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface
See Table 7-26 and Table 7-27 for definition of the color-coding scheme of the RJ-
45 cable for the CTR / MON interface.
Table 7-26 Pinout and Wiring of the RJ-45 Cable for the CTR Interface
Connector
Pin Number Twisted Pair Number / Color Description
Definition
White- /
1 The 2nd twisted E Signal ground
orange
pair
2 Orange CTRL1 The 1st control output signal
3 White- / green E Signal ground

The 3rd twisted pair
6 Green CTRL3 The 3rd control output signal
5 White- / blue E Signal ground

The 1st twisted pair
4 Blue CTRL2 The 2nd control output signal
7 White- / brown E Signal ground

The 4th twisted pair
8 Brown CTRL4 The 4th control output signal
Table 7-27 Pinout and Wiring of the RJ-45 Cable for the MON Interface
Connector
Definition
White- /
1 The 2nd twisted E Signal ground
orange
pair
2 Orange MON1 The 1st monitoring input signal
3 White- / green E Signal ground

The 3rd twisted pair
6 Green MON3 The 3rd monitoring input signal
5 White- / blue E Signal ground

The 1st twisted pair
4 Blue MON2 The 2nd monitoring input signal
7 White- / brown E Signal ground

The 4th twisted pair
8 Brown MON4 The 4th monitoring input signal
Version: D 627
7.5.3.3 Connection
Figure 7-31 shows the connection of the RJ-45 cables for the CTR / MON interface,
using the MON interface of the CAIF1 card as an example.
Figure 7-31 Connection of the RJ-45 Cable for the CTR / MON Interface
7.6 Cable for the HK Interface
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the cable for
the HK interface.
7.6.1 Application
The HK interfaces on the EAIF card include HKC and HKA interfaces. The HKC
interface is used to output control signals and usually connected to the user’s
environment monitoring equipment. The HKA interface is used to input signals to be
monitored and is usually connected to the user’s equipment to be monitored. The
HKC and the HKA interfaces share a cable.
628 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.6.2 Structure
The cable for the HK interface has the SCSI-II 68-conductor plug on the equipment
end, and the bare wire on the other end. See Figure 7-32 for the appearance and
structure of the cable and the plug. The cable code is 3.695.267.
Figure 7-32 The Cable for the HK Interface
See Table 7-28 for definition of the cable color-coding scheme for the HK interface.
Table 7-28 Cable Pinout and Wiring for the HK Interface
Connector
Definition
1 White E Signal ground
A twisted pair The 1st control output
35 Blue HKC 1
signal

A twisted pair The 2nd control output
36 Orange HKC 2
signal

A twisted pair The 3rd control output
37 Green HKC 3
signal

A twisted pair The 4th control output
38 Brown HKC 4
signal
5 A twisted pair White E Signal ground
Version: D 629
Table 7-28 Cable Pinout and Wiring for the HK Interface (Continued)
Connector
Definition
The 5th control output
39 White- / blue HKC 5
signal

40 White- / orange HKC 6
signal

41 White- / green HKC 7
signal

42 White- / brown HKC 8
signal
9 Red E Signal ground

43 Blue HKC 9
signal

44 Orange HKC 10
signal

45 Green HKC 11
signal

46 Brown HKC 12
signal

47 White- / blue HKC 13
signal

48 White- / orange HKC 14
signal

49 White- / green HKC 15
signal

50 White- / brown HKC 16
signal
630 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Connector
Definition
17 Black E Signal ground
A twisted pair The 1st monitoring input
51 Blue HKA 1
signal

A twisted pair The 2nd monitoring input
52 Orange HKA 2
signal

A twisted pair The 3rd monitoring input
53 Green HKA 3
signal

A twisted pair The 4th monitoring input
54 Brown HKA 4
signal

55 White- / blue HKA 5
signal

56 White- / orange HKA 6
signal

57 White- / green HKA 7
signal

58 White- / brown HKA 8
signal
25 Yellow E Signal ground

59 Blue HKA 9
signal

60 Orange HKA 10
signal

61 Green HKA 11
signal
28 A twisted pair Yellow E Signal ground
Version: D 631
Connector
Definition
The 12th monitoring input
62 Brown HKA 12
signal

63 White- / blue HKA 13
signal

64 White- / orange HKA 14
signal

65 White- / green HKA 15
signal

66 White- / brown HKA 16
signal
7.6.3 Connection
Figure 7-33 shows the connection relationship of the cable for the HK interface.
632 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
Figure 7-33 Connection of the Cable for the HK Interface
7.7 Optical Fiber Jumper
The following introduces the application, structure, and connection of the optical
fiber jumper.
Version: D 633
7.7.1 Application
The optical fiber jumper is used to connect optical interfaces on different cards in the
equipment or connect the external optical interfaces of the equipment and the ODF.
The FONST 5000's optical fiber jumpers have three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-
FC/PC, and LC/PC-SC/PC.
7.7.2 Structure
Select an appropriate optical fiber jumper according to the connector types of the
optical interfaces on the equipment at both the local and far ends. An LC/PC optical
fiber connector is used for the optical interfaces on the equipment side.
Connectors of the optical fiber are shown in Table 7-29.
Table 7-29 The Fiber Connector Diagram
Type Diagram
LC/PC
FC/PC
SC / PC
634 Version: D
7 Wire and Cable
7.7.3 Connection
The LC/PC-LC/PC is usually used in the connection among internal optical

interfaces of the equipment. The LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC are usually used
in the connection among optical interfaces of the equipment and the ODF.
Version: D 635
Appendix A Summary of Card
Numbers
The following introduces the card numbers of the FONST 5000.
Table A-1 shows the numbers of cards supported by the OTH subrack (3030066)
and the WDM subrack.
Table A-1 Summary of Card Numbers
Card Name Card Number Card Name Card Number

8TDA 2.170.797 VMU48_E 2.166.235
8TDG 2.170.823 VMU40_O 2.166.249
8TDGS 2.170.903 VMU40_E 2.166.236
8TDGF 2.170.798 ODU48_O 2.166.246
8TGX 2.200.524 ODU48_E 2.166.233
8TA1 2.170.799 ODU40_O 2.166.234
8TS1 2.170.824 ODU40_E 2.166.247

2.166.239 / 2.166.237 /
8TA 2.170.876 OMU2/4/8
2.166.250
2.166.240 / 2.166.238 /
16TA 2.200.864 ODU2/4/8
2.166.251
2TA2 2.170.888 ITL50 2.166.241
4TA2 2.170.877 OSCAD 2.166.243
8TA2 2.170.879 WOSAD 2.201.428
10TA2 2.200.449 EOSAD 2.201.429
4TEA2 2.170.982 BEOSC 2.201.432
8TEA2 2.170.983 BIDI 2.201.314
TA3 2.170.897 WDM2 2.200.815
ETA3 2.200.532 WSS8M 2.159.067 / 2.159.075
TA4 2.200.450 WSS8D 2.159.068 / 2.159.074
TGX 2.170.889 WSS4M 2.159.070
8EF 2.200.365 WSS4D 2.159.069
MXCU 2.200.446 FWSS8M 2.201.749
SXCU 2.200.459 FWSS8D 2.201.750
LMS2E 2.170.801 / 2.170.832 FWSS20M 2.201.706
2LMS2E 2.200.088 FWSS20D 2.201.707
636 Version: D
Appendix A Summary of Card Numbers
Table A-1 Summary of Card Numbers (Continued)

LMS3E (double-
2.170.881 / 2.200.183 WSS8MR 2.201.649
slot)
LMS3E (single-
2.200.874 / 2.200.902 WSS8DT 2.201.648
slot)
LMS4E 2.200.451 WSS8T 2.201.819

2LA2 2.170.878 WSS20T 2.201.818
4LA2 2.170.878 ODU8T 2.201.652
8LA2 2.170.880 SOAD8 2.162.084
4TEL2 2.170.962 OA 2.802.118 / 2.802.119
4LXA2 2.200.772 PA 2.802.117
MST2 2.200.795 HOA 2.082.122
2.018.141 / 2.018.146 /
OTU2S ROA 2.802.123
2.200.914
2OTU2S 2.200.915 RAU_F / RAU_B 2.802.120
4OTU2S 2.018.154 VGA 2.201.752
OTU2E 2.854.033 / 2.854.034 MSA 2.200.038
OTU2F 2.018.152 / 2.018.153 OCP 2.028.130
OTU3S 2.018.151 / 2.200.180 OMSP 2.028.131
OTU3S
2.151.211 OLP_1:1/OLP_1+1 2.159.066 / 2.159.073
(Coherent)
OTU3E 2.854.038 / 2.200.184 OPM4 2.167.175

OTU3E
2.200.935 OPM8 2.167.176
(Coherent)
2.018.150 / 2.200.181 /
OTU3F OSC 2.319.117
2.200.589
OTU4S 2.200.307 EOSC 2.200.215
OTU4E 2.200.537 FOSC 2.201.741
OTU4F 2.200.536 OTDR8 2.200.723
EMVU 2.200.456 GFF 2.152.007
EFCVU 2.200.444 DGE 2.152.006
FCVU 2.200.445 ASCU / SCU 2.119.290 / 2.119.361
EMU 2.319.118 AIF 3.699.315
EFCU 2.119.383 EAIF 3.699.332
OMU48_O 2.166.244 CAIF1 / CAIF2 2.200.440 / 2.200.462
OMU48_E 2.166.231 PWRV 2.200.453
OMU40_O 2.166.245 PWR 2.933.289
OMU40_E 2.166.232 CTU 2.200.455
Version: D 637
Table A-1 Summary of Card Numbers (Continued)

VMU48_O 2.166.248 FCU 2.119.337
638 Version: D
Appendix B Abbreviations
3R Reamplifying, Reshaping and Retiming
ACB Air Circuit Breaker

ADM Add / Drop Multiplexer
APD Avalanche Photon Diode

APR Automatic Power Reduction
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BC Boundary Clock
BER Bit Error Ratio

BMC Best Master Clock
BMU Board Management Unit
BoD Bandwidth on Demand

CD Chromatic Dispersion
CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DCC Data Communication Channel

DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network

DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E2ETC End-to-End Transparent Clock
ECC Embedded Communication Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMS Element Management System
EMU Element Management Unit
Version: D 639
EOS Ethernet over SDH

ESC Electrical Supervisory Channel
ESCON Enterprise System Connection Architecture
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVOA Electrical Variable Optical Attenuator
FC Fiber Channel
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber-Channel Connection
FOADM Fixed Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer
GCC General Communication Channel

GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMC Grandmaster Clock

HDB3 High Density Bipolar of Order 3
IC Integrated Circuit
ID Identity
IP Internet Protocol
International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication
ITU-T
Standardization Sector
L Long-haul
LCT Local Craft Terminal

LMP Link Management Protocol
LSP Label Switch Path

MSAN Multi-Service Access Network
MSTP Multi-Service Transport Platform
NE Network Element
NNI Network Node Interface
O/E/O Optical / Electrical / Optical Conversion
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OC Ordinary Clock
OCh Optical Channel
OCP Optical Channel Protection
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
ODU Optical Demultiplexer Unit
640 Version: D
Appendix B Abbreviations
ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OLT Optical Line Terminal
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OMU Optical Multiplexer Unit
OPA Optical Pre-amplifier
OPM Optical Channel Performance Monitor
OPUk Optical Channel Payload Unit-k
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
OTH Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTM Optical Transport Module
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTU Optical Channel Transport Unit
OVPN Optical Virtual Private Network
P2P Peer-to-Peer
P2PTC Peer-to-Peer Transparent Clock
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer
PC Permanent Connection
PDP Power Distribution Panel
PIN Positive-Intrinsic-Negative
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTN Packet Transport Network
PTP Precision Time Protocol

QoS Quality of Service
ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering
Rx Receiver
S Short-haul
Version: D 641
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Switched Connection
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SN Serial Number
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SPC Soft Permanent Connection
SRLG Shared Risk Link Group
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-n Synchronous Transport Module-Level n (n=1, 4, 16,64, 256)
TC Transparent Clock
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TE Traffic Engineering
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UTC Coordinated Universal Time

VLSM Variable Length Subnet Mask
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WSS Wavelength Selective Switch
XFP 10-Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable
642 Version: D
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company
To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.
Documentation Name
Code and Version
Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?
8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?
9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?
□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)
10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:
Satisfied (please specify)
Unsatisfied (please specify)
12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:
Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

FiberHome Hardware Description

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FiberHome Hardware Description

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FONST 5000

Intelligent OTN Equipment

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection

Describes the equipment’s structures, functions, signal

Describes the equipment’s appearance and structure, how

OTN Series Intelligent OTN Gives a detailed introduction to notices of fault

Describes classification and category of alarm and

Includes four manuals, i. e., product description, operation

Quick Installation Guide for the

Quick Installation Guide for the

Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000064); briefs how

Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000068); briefs how

Introduces the functions of the PDP (3000078); briefs how

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u Data communication technology

u Optical fiber communication technology

u SDH communication theory

FONST 5000 FiberHome FONST 5000 Equipment

FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management

8TDGF 8-Port Data Service Interface Card

2TA2 2-Port 10G Service Interface Card

8TEA2 Eight-port,STM64/10GE WAN/LAN, General, LC

TGX GE Interface Card with Switch Function

4-Port 10G Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced

2LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

4LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

8LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

4TEL2 4 Port 10G Enhanced Line Interface Card

MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card

4OTU2S 4-ports 10G Optical Transponder Unit

OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)

100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with

OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC

8EF 8-Port FC Service Distance Extension Card

EOSAD East 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card

WOSAD West 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card

BEOSC Bidirectional Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel

OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card